ET200SM e

Important information,
Contents
Product overview 1
Installation 2
SIMATIC
Commissioning and 3
diagnostics
ET 200S General technical 4
Motor starters specifications
Fail-safe motor starters Terminal modules 5
Safety integrated SIGUARD
system PM-D power module 6
Manual Direct and soft starters 7
Reversing starters 8
Safety integrated SIGUARD 9
system
Expansion modules 10
Fail-safe modules 11
Appendix
Order numbers A
Dimensional drawings B
Applications C
Glossary, Index
This document is part of the
documentation package
6ES7151-1AA00-8BA0
Release 11/2002
Safety guidelines
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to pro-
tect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle
and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
Safety note
Contains important information for the acceptance test and the safety-related use of the product.
Danger
Indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions
are not taken.
Warning
Indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions
are not taken.
Warning
Indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Important
Draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particu-
lar part of the documentation.
Qualified personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are
defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems
in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalogue or the techni-
cal descriptions, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have
been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly,
and operated and maintained as recommended.
Brands
SIMATIC®, SIMATIC HMI® and SIMATIC NET® are brands of SIEMENS AG.
Some other designations used in these documents are also brands; the owner's rights may be violated if they
are used by third parties for their own purposes.
Copyright Siemens AG 2002 All rights reserved Disclaimer of liability

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its con- We have checked this manual to ensure that its contents are correct
tents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders and applicable in relation to the hardware and software it describes.
will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by Despite all our endeavors, however, discrepancies cannot be wholly
patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. excluded and so we cannot guarantee complete correctness and
applicability. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly
and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Sug-
gestions for improvement are welcomed.
Technical Assistance: Telephone: +49 (0) 9131-7-43833 (8°° - 17°° CET) Fax: +49 (0) 9131-7-42899
E-mail: nst.technical-assistance@siemens.com
Internet: www.siemens.de/lowvoltage/technical-assistance
Technical Support: Telephone: +49 (0) 180 50 50 222
Siemens AG
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Geschäftsgebiet Niederspannungs-Schalttechnik ! Siemens AG 2002
D-91050 Erlangen Technical data subject to change without notice.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Important information
Purpose of the manual

This manual is an addition to the following manuals:
• ET 200S Distributed I/O System
• IM 151/CPU Interface Module
• ET 200S Process-Related Functions
• ET 200S Positioning
• ET 200S Serial Interface Module
• ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules
• Safety Engineering in SIMATIC S7, System Description
• S7 Distributed Safety Configuration and Programming
This manual describes all the functions of the ET 200S motor starters. The
manual does not deal with general ET 200S functions. You can find descrip-
tions of these in the SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System manual.
Target group
This manual describes the hardware of the ET 200S motor starters and fail-
safe motor starters, and the safety integrated SIGUARD system. It is aimed
at configuration engineers, commissioning engineers and maintenance per-
sonnel.
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 i
Delivery package
The delivery package (order number 6ES7151-1AA00-8BA0) consists of
6 manuals with the following contents:
SIMATIC ET 200S ET 200S IM 151/CPU Interface Module

Motor Starters Distributed I/O System
Fail-Safe Motor Starters
Safety Integrated SIGUARD
System
• Installing and wiring motor • Installing and wiring the • Addressing of

starters ET 200S IM 151/CPU
• Commissioning and diagno- • Commissioning and diagno- • ET 200S with IM 151/CPU in
stics of motor starters stics the PROFIBUS network
of the ET 200S
• Technical specifications of • Commissioning and diagno-
motor starters • Technical specifications of stics of the IM 151/CPU
IM 151, digital and analog
• Fail-safe motor starters • Technical specifications of
electronics modules, techno-
the IM 151/CPU
• Safety integrated SIGUARD logy modules
system • STEP 7 instruction list
• Order numbers for ET 200S
• Order numbers
ET 200S ET 200S ET 200S

Process-Related Functions Positioning Serial Interface Module
• 1Count 24V/100kHz • 1STEP5V/204 kHZ • 1 SI

• 1Count 5V/500kHz • 1PosInc/Digital • Modbus/USS
• 1SSI • 1PosSSI/Digital
• 2PULSE • 1PosInc/Analog
• 1PosSSI/Analog

ii GWA-4NEB950007202-07
The delivery package for S7 F Systems (order number 6ES7988-8FA11-8BA0)

consists of 3 manuals with the following contents:
Distributed I/O System Safety Engineering S7 Distributed Safety

ET 200S in SIMATIC S7, Configuration and
Fail-Safe Modules System Description Programming
• Product overview • Use, structure and principle • Configuration of the F-CPU

of fail-safe programmable and fail-safe modules
• Configuration options
controllers
• Parameter assignment of
• Configuration and parame-
• Technical information on F safety functions
ter assignment
technology
• Programming
• Addressing and mounting
• Monitoring and the calcula-
• Wiring and fitting tion of response times
• Diagnostics
• Technical specifications
• Fail-safe modules
Scope of validity
This manual is valid for ET 200S motor starters. It contains a description of
the components that were valid at the time the manual was published. We
reserve the right to enclose a product information document containing up-
to-date information about new components and new versions of compo-
nents.
What's new?
In comparison to edition 06 the current edition has the following
changes:
Subject Section
Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter 7.3

Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter 8.3
PM-D F X1 and F-CM fail-safe modules, examples 11

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 iii
Certification
The product series in the ET 200S distributed I/O system - motor starters,
fail-safe motor starters, and safety integrated SIGUARD system corre-
sponds to the following rule specifications:
• EU directive 73/23/EEC on low voltage
• EU directive (89/336/EEC) on electromagnetic compatibility
• Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: UL 508 registered (Industrial Control Equipment)
• Canadian Standards Association: CSA C22.2 Number 142, tested (Process Control
Equipment)
Standards, certificates and approvals

The ET 200S distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61158/EN 50170, Vol-
ume 2, PROFIBUS. The ET 200S distributed I/O device fulfills the require-
ments and criteria of IEC 61131, Part 2 and the requirements for obtaining
the CE marking. ET 200S has CSA and UL approval.
You will find detailed information on the relevant standards, certificates, and
approvals in Section 7.1 of the SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System
manual.
Disclaimer of liability
The products described in this manual were developed to discharge safety-
oriented functions as part of a higher-order system or machine. A complete
safety system generally comprises sensors, analyzers, signaling devices and
concepts for safe shutdowns. The manufacturer of the system or machine is
responsible for ensuring correct overall functioning. Siemens AG, its subsid-
iaries and its affiliated companies (hereinafter designated “Siemens”) are
not in a position to guarantee all features of a higher-order system or
machine not designed by Siemens.
Siemens also refuses to accept liability for recommendations, express or
implicit, in the subsequent description. No warranty, guarantee or liability
claims above and beyond the General Terms and Conditions of Supply and
Sale of Siemens can be derived from the subsequent description.

iv GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Position in the information landscape

As well as this manual, you will need the manual for the DP master you are
using.
Note
You will find a list of the contents of the SIMATIC ET 200S manuals in Section 1.4 of this
manual.
We recommend that you begin by reading this section so as to find out which parts of
which manuals are most relevant to you in helping you to do what you want to do.
Aids to accessing information

You can find specific information in the manual quickly by using the follow-
ing aids:
• There is a list of contents at the front of the manual.
• Each chapter contains subheadings that provide you with an overview of the contents
of the relevant sections.
• Following the appendices you will find a glossary, in which important technical terms
used in the manual are defined.
• At the end of the manual you will find a detailed index, which makes it easy for you to
find the information you are looking for.
Constantly updated information

Should you have any queries regarding motor starters, please get in touch
with the point of contact in your region responsible for low-voltage switch-
gear/controlgear with communication capability. You can obtain a list of the
points of contact, along with the latest release of the manual, at the follow-
ing Internet address:
http://www.siemens.de/siriusnet

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 v

vi GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Contents
1 Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.1 General components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.2 Components up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width for
standard motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.1.3 Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for
high feature motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.1.4 Fail-safe components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.1.5 Components required for the safety integrated SIGUARD system . . . 1-10
1.1.6 Components of the expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.2 ET 200S configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.3 Maximum number of modules that can be connected/maximum
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
2 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Slot rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Installation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 Installation measurements and clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.4 Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.4.1 What is derating?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.4.2 Derating factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.4.3 DM-V15 spacing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.4.4 Criteria for configurations with/without DM-V15 spacing modules . . . 2-7
2.5 Installing terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.6 Inserting power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.7 Installing and removing motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.7.1 Standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm . . . . . 2-17
2.7.2 High feature/fail-safe motor starters with an installation width of
65 or 130 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.8 Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps . . . . . 2-30

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 vii
3 Commissioning and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Control kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3 Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.4 2DI control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.5 2DI COM control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.6 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.7 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.7.1 Diagnostics and monitoring through the user program . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.7.2 Diagnosis by LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.8 LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.8.1 Diagnosis of the PM-D power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.8.2 Diagnosis of the PM-D F1 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.8.7 Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.8.8 Diagnosis of the PM-D F X1 fail-safe power/expansion module . . . . . 3-28
3.8.9 Diagnosis of the fail-safe F-CM contact replicator. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.8.10 Diagnosis of the standard DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x and
RS1-x motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3.8.11 Diagnosis of the high feature DS1e-x, RS1e-x and
DSS1e-x motor starters Fail-safe F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x motor starters 3-31
3.8.12 Diagnosis of xB3, xB4 brake control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3.9 Process image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.9.1 Process image of the standard DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x, and
RS1-x motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.9.2 Process image of the high feature DS1e-x, RS1e-x, and
DSS1e-x motor starters Fail-safe F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x motor starters 3-36
3.9.3 Process image of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.10 Switch ES Motor Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
4 General technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Shipping and storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
5 Terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Assignment of the terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-D power module . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3 Terminal modules for motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.1 TM-DS45 terminal modules for standard DS, DS-x and
DS1-x direct starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.2 TM-DS65 terminal modules for the high feature DS1e-x direct starter
and the high feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3.3 TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters . . . 5-8
5.3.4 Technical specifications, TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65 . . . . . . 5-9
5.3.5 TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters 5-10
5.3.6 TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x high feature reversing starter . 5-11
5.3.7 TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters . 5-12
5.3.8 Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130 . . . . 5-13
5.4 Power bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

viii GWA-4NEB950007202-07
6 PM-D power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 PM-D power module for motor starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.1.2 Technical specifications - PM-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
7 Direct starters and soft starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Standard direct starters DS, DS-x, DS1-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.2.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.2.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.3 Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3 High feature DS1e-x direct starter Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter . . . 7-11
7.3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.3.2 Additional features of the F-DS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.3.3 Module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.3.4 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.4 High feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.4.1 Physical principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.4.2 Application and use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.4.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7.4.4 Notes on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7.4.5 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
7.5 Description of fixed values and parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.5.1 Permanently set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.5.2 Actual motor current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.5.3 User-definable parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7.5.4 Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
7.5.5 Trip Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
7.6 Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
8 Reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Standard reversing starters RS, RS-x, RS1-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.3 High feature RS1e-x reversing starter Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter 8-11
8.3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.3.2 Additional features of the F-RS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.3.3 Module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.3.4 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 ix
9 Safety integrated SIGUARD system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47 and TM-X15 S27-01 . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.3 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.4 View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.2.5 Terminal assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.2.6 Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules . . . . 9-9
9.2.7 TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.3 Power modules PM-D F1 to 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.3.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
9.3.2 Electrical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9.4 Connection module PM-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.5 ET 200S with safety integrated SIGUARD system . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.6 Safety integrated system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.6.1 Safety circuit with integrated SIGUARD combination . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
9.6.2 Two safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations . . . . . . 9-28
9.6.3 Two cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations
(potential group, potential subgroup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.6.4 Three cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations
(potential group, potential subgroup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.6.5 Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2824,
category 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
9.6.6 Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2823 . . . . 9-36
9.6.7 Safety circuit incorporating pneumatic valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
9.6.8 Safety circuit incorporating external actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
9.6.9 Emergency stop combined with protective door . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
9.6.10 Emergency stop combined with 2 cascaded protective-door circuits . . 9-44
9.6.11 Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 2 . . . . . . . . 9-46
9.6.12 Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 3 or 4 . . . . . . 9-48
9.6.13 One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails . . . . . . . 9-50
9.6.14 Two emergency-stop circuits, three shutdown groups . . . . . . . . . 9-52
9.6.15 Floating connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous
safety circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
9.6.16 DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starters up to safety category 4. . . . 9-56
9.6.17 ET 200S SIGUARD with AS-i Safety at work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
10 Expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1 Overview of expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2 TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules . . . . . . . 10-3
10.3 Brake control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.3.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.3.2 TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.3.3 Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and
DS1-x, DS1e-x, and F-DS1e-x motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.3.4 Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and
RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.3.5 Externally powered brake xB1, xB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10.3.6 Internally powered brake xB2, xB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10.3.7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10.3.8 Removing the brake control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

x GWA-4NEB950007202-07
11 Fail-safe modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.2 Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 and TM-FCM30-S47 . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.2.2 Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 for the PM-D F X1 power/expansion
module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.2.3 Terminal module TM-FCM30-S47 for the F-CM contact replicator . . . 11-7
11.3 Power/expansion module PM-D F X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.3.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
11.4 F-CM contact replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
11.4.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
11.4.3 Technical specifications - F-CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
11.5 Examples with fail-safe modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
11.5.1 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits . . . . 11-24
11.5.2 Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external
safety combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
11.5.3 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations . . . . . . . . . 11-28
11.5.4 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator . . . . . . . . 11-30
11.5.5 Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator . . . . 11-32
11.5.6 ET 200S fail-safe motor starter with AS-i Safety at work . . . . . . . . 11-34
safety combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
11.5.8 ET 200S fail-safe motor starter and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC 11-38
11.5.9 Distributed selective detection of safety signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 xi
A Order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 Motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A.1.1 ET 200S standard direct starters DS, DS-x and DS1-x . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.1.2 ET 200S standard reversing starters, RS, RS-x and RS1-x . . . . . . . A-3
A.1.3 ET 200S starters high feature with electronic overload protection
(DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.1.4 ET 200S high feature motor starter for Switch ES . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.1.5 ET 200S fail-safe motor starter with electronic overload protection
(F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.2 Components for the ET 200S motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.3 Components for the safety integrated SIGUARD system . . . . . . . . A-7
A.4 Components for expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A.5 Fail-safe components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
B Dimensional drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.1 Motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

B.1.1 DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters and TM-DS45 terminal module B-2
B.1.2 High feature DS1e-x direct starter,
High feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter
and TM-DS65 terminal module Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter and
TM-FDS65 terminal module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.1.3 RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters and TM-RS90 terminal module B-4
B.1.4 RS1e-x high feature reversing starter and TM-RS130 terminal module
F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter and TM-FRS130 terminal module . . B-5
B.2 Power modules, connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B.2.1 PM-D power module and TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module . . . . . . . B-6
B.2.2 PM-D F1 to 5 power modules and
terminal modules TM-PF30 S47-B0/-B1/-C0/-C1/-D0
PM-D F PROFIsafe power module and TM-PF30 S47-F1 terminal module
PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and
TM-PFX30 S47-G0/-G1 terminal modules
F-CM contact replicator and TM-FCM30 S47-E0 terminal module. . . . B-7
B.2.3 PM-X connection module and TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module . . . . B-8
B.3 DM-V15 spacing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B.4 Expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
B.4.1 xB1 to 4 brake control modules and
TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules . . . . . . . . . B-9

xii GWA-4NEB950007202-07
C Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.1 Examples with brake control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.1.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation
without brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.1.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with
external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
internal power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C.1.4 Example with frequency converter and 400 V brake with internal
power supply and delayed EMERGENCY STOP shutdown, category 3 . C-8
C.1.5 Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve . . . . . . C-10
C.1.6 Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor . . . . . . C-12
C.2 Examples with reversible motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C.2.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds
with one Dahlander winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C.2.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with two
Dahlander windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gl-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 xiii
Figures
Figure 1-1: ET 200S with motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Figure 1-2: ET 200S with motor starters and electronic modules . . . . . . . . 1-14
Figure 1-3: ET 200S with motor starters and safety integrated SIGUARD
system up to category 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Figure 1-4: ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters up to category 4/SIL3 . . . . 1-16
Figure 1-5: ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters and fail-safe electronic
modules up to category 4/SIL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Figure 1-6: Potential groups and load groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Figure 2-1: DM-V15 spacing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-2: Criteria for vertical installation on horizontal rails with
DS, DS-x, DS1-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2-3: Criteria for horizontal installation on vertical rails with
DS, DS-x, DS1-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-4: Criteria for vertical installation on horizontal rails with
F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-5: Configuration example for derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Figure 2-6: Determining the derating for a configuration example . . . . . . . 2-10
Figure 2-7: Mechanical coding of terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-8: Inserting power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-9: Specifying the safety group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Figure 2-10: Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps . . . 2-31
Figure 3-1: Current setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-2: Overload tripping test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Figure 3-3: Preventing unauthorized persons from switching on . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-4: Lock in the terminal module preventing unauthorized persons
from switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-5: Wiring diagram for control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-6: Sketched wiring diagram, 2DI control module . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 5-1: TM-DS45 terminal modules for standard DS, DS-x and
DS1-x direct starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Figure 5-2: TM-DS65 terminal modules for DS1e-x high feature direct starter
and DSS1e-x soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Figure 5-3: TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters . 5-8
Figure 5-4: TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS, RS-x,
RS1-x standard reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Figure 5-5: TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x high feature
reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Figure 5-6: TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x
reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Figure 5-7: TM-DS45 terminal block - example for DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard
direct starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Figure 5-8: PE/N terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

xiv GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Figure 5-9: Current flow in the power bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Figure 6-1: Power module PM-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Figure 7-1: Standard DS, DS-x and DS1-x direct starters . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Figure 7-2: Sketched circuit diagram - DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters 7-6
Figure 7-3: High feature DS1e-x direct starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Figure 7-4: Sketched circuit diagram of high feature DS1e-x direct starter . . . 7-13
Figure 7-5: Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Figure 7-6: Sketched circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter . . 7-18
Figure 7-7: Typical current and torque curve of a three-phase
asynchronous motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Figure 7-8: Current and torque curves for star-delta starting . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Figure 7-9: Method of operation of a frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Figure 7-10: Phase firing of the supply voltage by semiconductor elements in
the DSS1e-x soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Figure 7-11: Current and torque curves for a soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Figure 7-12: High feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Figure 7-13: Sketched circuit diagram - high feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x . 7-34
Figure 7-14: Time ramp/timing diagram, DSS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Figure 7-15: Cyclic duration factor CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Figure 7-16: Load and motor torques and motor terminal voltage for
operation with soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Figure 7-17: Reductions as a function of site altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Figure 7-18: Principle of anti-blocking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Figure 7-19: Tripping class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Figure 7-20: Idle time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Figure 7-21: Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Figure 8-1: RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Figure 8-2: Sketched circuit diagram - RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard
reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Figure 8-3: High feature RS1e-x reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Figure 8-4: Sketched circuit diagram - high feature RS1e-x reversing starter . . 8-13
Figure 8-5: Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Figure 8-6: Sketched circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter 8-18
Figure 9-1: External wiring of the SIGUARD EMERGENCY STOP
circuit (category 4) EN 954-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Figure 9-2: View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Figure 9-3: TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Figure 9-4: Views of the SIGUARD PM-D F1 to 5 power modules . . . . . . . 9-14
Figure 9-5: Basic circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F1, F2 power
modules with TM-PF30 S47-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Figure 9-6: Basic circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F3, F4 power
modules with TM-PF30 S47-C1 or C0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Figure 9-7: Block circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F5 power module . . 9-18

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 xv
Figure 9-8: PM-X connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Figure 9-9: Circuit diagram for SIGUARD emergency stop circuit . . . . . . . . 9-21
Figure 9-10: Safety circuit with integrated SIGUARD combination . . . . . . . . 9-26
Figure 9-11: Two safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations . . . . 9-28
Figure 9-12: Two cascaded safety circuits with integrated
SIGUARD combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Figure 9-13: Three cascaded safety circuits with integrated
SIGUARD combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Figure 9-14: Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2824,
category 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Figure 9-15: Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2823,
category 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Figure 9-16: Safety circuit incorporating pneumatic valves . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Figure 9-17: Safety circuit incorporating external actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Figure 9-18: Emergency stop combined with protective door . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Figure 9-19: Emergency stop combined with 2 cascaded protective-door circuits 9-44
Figure 9-20: Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 2 . . . . . . 9-46
Figure 9-21: Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 3 or 4 . . . . 9-48
Figure 9-22: One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails . . . . . 9-50
Figure 9-23: Two emergency-stop circuits, three shutdown groups . . . . . . . 9-52
Figure 9-24: Floating connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and
autonomous safety circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Figure 9-25: DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starters up to safety category 4 . . 9-56
Figure 9-26: ET 200S SIGUARD with AS-i Safety at work . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Figure 10-1: Brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Figure 10-2: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Figure 10-3: Configuration with brake control module and spacing module . . . 10-10
Figure 10-4: Sketched circuit diagram of externally powered brake . . . . . . . 10-17
Figure 10-5: Sketched circuit diagram of internally powered brake . . . . . . . . 10-21
Figure 10-6: Mechanical coding of terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Figure 11-1: PM-D F X1 power/expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Figure 11-2: Block diagram for the PM-D F X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Figure 11-3: F-CM contact replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Figure 11-4: Block diagram for the F-CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Figure 11-5: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits
up to category 4/SIL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Figure 11-6: Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and
external safety combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Figure 11-7: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations up to
category 4/SIL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28
Figure 11-8: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator up to
category 4/SIL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Figure 11-9: Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator
up to category 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32

xvi GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Figure 11-10: Example with PM-D F X1 power module and AS-i Safety at work
up to category 4/SIL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Figure 11-11: Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and
external safety combinations up to category 4/SIL3 . . . . . . . . . 11-36
Figure 11-12: ET 200S fail-safe motor starters and PM-D F X1 with central
safety PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
Figure 11-13: Distributed selective detection of safety signals . . . . . . . . . . 11-40
Figure A-1: Removing coding elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Figure C-1: Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation
without brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Figure C-2: Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake
with external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Figure C-3: Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake
with internal power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Figure C-4: Example with frequency converter and 400 V brake with
internal power supply and delayed EMERGENCY STOP shutdown,
category 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Figure C-5: Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve . . . . C-10
Figure C-6: Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor . . . . C-12
Figure C-7: Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with
one Dahlander winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
Figure C-8: Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with
2 Dahlander windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 xvii
Tables
Table 1-1: General components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Table 1-2: Components for standard motor starters up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm
installation width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Table 1-3: Components for high feature motor starters up to 7.5 kW and
65/130 mm installation widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Table 1-4: Fail-safe components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Table 1-5: Components of the SIGUARD emergency stop circuit . . . . . . . . 1-10
Table 1-6: Components of the expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Table 1-1: Parameter length of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Table 1-2: Maximum current-carrying capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Table 2-1: Slot rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Table 2-2: Installation measurements and clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Table 2-3: Installing terminal modules - standard direct starter: example . . . 2-12
Table 2-4: Removing terminal modules - standard direct starter: example . . 2-14
Table 2-5: Installing a standard motor starter with installation width of
45 or 90 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Table 2-6: Removing a standard motor starter with an installation width of
45 or 90 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Table 2-7: Electrical connections during installation/removal of the
standard motor starter (45 or 90 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Table 2-8: Installing a high feature/fail-safe motor starter with an installation
width of 65 or 130 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Table 2-9: Deinstalling a high feature/fail-safe motor starter with an installation
width of 65 or 130 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Table 2-10: Electrical connections during installation/removal of a
high feature/fail-safe motor starter (65 mm or 130 mm) . . . . . . . 2-28
Table 3-1: Signal states, control module 2DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Table 3-2: Technical specifications, 2DI control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Table 3-3: Configuring motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Table 3-4: Power module fault types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Table 3-5: Expansion module fault types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Table 3-6: Fault types for motor starters up to 5.5 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Table 3-7: Fault types for motor starters up to 7.5 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Table 3-8: LED status and error displays on the PM-D power module . . . . . 3-22
Table 3-9: LED status and error displays on the SIGUARD
PM-D F1 power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

xviii GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Table 3-14: Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Table 3-15: Status and error displays with LEDs on the fail-safe
PM-D F X1 power/expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
F-CM contact replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Table 3-17: LED status and error displays on the
standard motor starters (5.5 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Table 3-18: LED status and error displays for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x,
F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Table 3-19: LED status and error displays for F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x . . . . . . 3-33
Table 3-20: LED status and fault displays for xB3, xB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Table 3-21: Input behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Table 5-1: Assignment of the terminal modules for power modules . . . . . . 5-2
Table 5-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for motor starters . . . . . . . 5-3
Table 5-3: Assignment of the terminal modules for fail-safe modules . . . . . 5-3
Table 5-4: Terminal assignment of the TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for
the PM-D power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Table 5-5: Technical specifications - TM-P15 S27-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Table 5-6: Technical specifications - TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65 . . . 5-9
Table 5-7: Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130 . . 5-13
Tabelle 6-1: Parameters for the PM-D power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tabelle 6-2: Technical specifications - PM-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Table 7-1: Overview of direct starters and soft starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Table 7-2: Parameters for the DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters . . . . 7-7
Table 7-3: Technical specifications - DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters 7-8
Table 7-4: Technical specifications DS... - circuit breaker, contactor,
auxiliary switch block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Table 7-5: Parameters for the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and the
fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Table 7-6: Technical specifications of the high feature DS1e-x direct starter
and the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Table 7-7: Technical specifications of the DS1e-x and F-DS1e-x -
starter protection switch and contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Table 7-8: Switching frequency for DSS1e-x soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Table 7-9: Parameters for DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starter . . . . . . . 7-42
Table 7-10: Technical specifications - DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starter . 7-44
Table 7-11: Technical specifications DSS1e-x - starter protection switch,
soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Table 7-12: Actual motor current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Table 7-13: Description of actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Table 8-1: Overview of reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Table 8-2: Parameters for the RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters . . 8-7

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 xix
Table 8-3: Technical specifications - RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard
reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Table 8-4: Technical specifications RS... - circuit breaker, contactor,
auxiliary switch block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Table 8-5: Parameters for the high feature RS1e-x reversing starter and the
fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Table 8-6: Technical specifications - high feature RS1e-x reversing starter,
fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Table 8-7: Technical specifications of the RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x - starter
protection switch and contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Table 9-1: Assignment of the terminal modules for SIGUARD modules . . . . 9-4
Table 9-2: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-B0 terminal module . . 9-7
Table 9-3: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-B1 terminal module . . 9-7
Table 9-4: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-C0 terminal module . . 9-8
Table 9-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-C1 terminal module . . 9-8
Table 9-6: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal module . . 9-9
Table 9-7: Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules . . 9-9
Table 9-8: Terminal assignment of the TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module
for the PM-X connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Table 9-9: Technical specifications - TM-X15 S27-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Table 9-10: Features of the SIGUARD PM-D F1 to 5 power modules . . . . . . 9-13
Table 9-11: Parameters for SIGUARD PM-D F1 to 5 power modules . . . . . . 9-15
Table 9-12: Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Table 9-13: Technical specifications - PM-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Table 9-14: Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 1 - standard direct starters . . . . . 9-22
Table 9-15: Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 2 - standard reversing starters . . 9-23
Table 10-1: Overview of expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Table 10-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for expansion modules . . . 10-3
Table 10-3: Features of the brake control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Table 10-4: Parameter for brake control modules xB3, xB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Table 10-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01
terminal module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Table 10-6: Technical specifications - TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 . . . 10-12
Table 10-7: Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and
DS1-x, DS1e-x, and F-DS1e-x motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Table 10-8: Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and
RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Table 10-9: Technical specifications, brake control module xB1, xB3 . . . . . . 10-18
Table 10-10: Technical specifications, brake control module xB2, xB4 . . . . . . 10-22
Table 10-11: Installing terminal module for brake control module . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Table 10-12: Connecting the brake control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Table 10-13: Connecting the motor starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Table 11-1: Overview of the fail-safe modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Table 11-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for fail-safe modules . . . . . 11-4

xx GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Table 11-3: Terminal assignment of the TM-PFX30 S47-G0/G1 terminal
modules for the PM-D F X1 power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Table 11-4: Technical specifications - TM-PFX30 S47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Table 11-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-FCM30-S47 terminal modules
for the F-CM contact replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Table 11-6: Technical specifications - TM-FCM30-S47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Table 11-7: Parameters for the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module . . . . . . 11-10
Table 11-8: Technical specifications - PM-D F X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Table 11-9: Parameters for the F-CM contact replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Table 11-10: Technical specifications - F-CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 xxi
xxii GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Product overview 1
Section Subject Page
1.1 Overview 1-2
1.1.1 General components 1-2
1.1.2 Components up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width for 1-4

standard motor starters
1.1.3 Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for 1-6

high feature motor starters
1.1.4 Fail-safe components 1-8
1.1.5 Components required for the safety integrated SIGUARD system 1-10
1.1.6 Components of the expansion modules 1-12
1.2 ET 200S configuration options 1-13
1.3 Maximum number of modules that can be connected/maximum 1-18

configuration
1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals 1-20

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 1-1
Product overview
1.1 Overview
1.1.1 General components
The following table shows the general components required for a configuration
with motor starters.
Component Function Drawing
DIN rails ... are the mechanical supports onto which

the terminal modules of the ET 200S are
snapped. 100 mm
Interface ... connects the ET 200S with the PROFI-

module BUS-DP master and prepares the data for
IM 151 the electronic modules and motor starters
connected.
(See the ET 200S Distributed I/O System
manual.)
Power mod- The module monitors the voltage of the

ule PM-D electronic components and contactors for a
group of motor starters (potential group)
(see Chapter 6).
Terminal ... carry the wiring and take the PM-D power
modules module
TM-P15 (with terminating cover)
S27-01 (see Section 5.2).
Spacing ... a spacing module must be inserted

module between the DS, DS-x, and DS1-x standard
DM-V15 direct starters and the F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
fail-safe motor starters in the case of high
ambient temperatures and for operation in
the upper current setting range of the circuit
breaker.
Configuration not necessary
(see Section 2.4.3).
Table 1-1: General components

1-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Product overview
Jumper ... loops L1, L2 and L3 through

module ... for closing gaps in the power bus, for
L1/L2/L3 example when expansion modules and
spacing modules are used
Available types:
• With L1/L2/L3 throughfeed,
15 mm, 30 mm
15/30 mm
Jumper ... adds a PEN conductor (N) and protective

module ground (PE) to the power bus.
PE/N ... for closing gaps in the PE/N bus, for
example when expansion modules and
spacing modules are used
Available types: 15/30 mm
• with PE/N throughfeed,
15 mm, 30 mm
Caps ... protect the contacts of the power bus

from touching (IP 20) and included with the
terminal modules with power bus infeed
and with the terminal blocks with PE/N
infeed
(see Section 2.8).
Terminating ... terminates the internal data bus of the

module ET 200S electrically and is included with the
IM module.
(see Section 2.8 and the ET 200S Distrib-
uted I/O System manual).
Terminating ... prevents the contacts of the motor start-

cover ers from being touched and is included with
the terminal modules TM-P15 S27-01,
TM-PF30 S47 B1/C1/F1, and
TM-PFX30 S47-G1.
(see Section 2.8).
3-phase ... for expanding the conductor cross sec-

feed-in termi- tion for power infeed - if necessary - as fol-
nal for S0 lows:
• single- or multi-core:
2.5 to 25 mm 2
• finely stranded with wire end ferrule:
2.5 to 25 mm 2
AWG 12 to 4
(see Appendix A.2)
Table 1-1: (cont.) General components

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 1-3
Product overview
1.1.2 Components up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width for standard

motor starters

Standard Standard direct starter SIRIUS
direct starters
DS ... switches a motor on or off.
(discontinued ... protects three-phase motors up to 5.5 kW
type) in the event of overloading and short
circuiting.
DS-x ... also controls a brake control module (xB1
(discontinued to 4).
type) Only the brake function of the xB3 and xB4
modules is supported, the inputs have no
effect.
DS1-x ... also controls a brake control module (xB3
or xB4)
(see Section 7.2).
Terminal mod- ... carries the wiring and takes a standard
ule direct starter (DS, DS-x or DS1-x).
TM-DS45 ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the inte-
grated power bus.
Available types:
• with power bus infeed for a load group
(drawing on left), including 3 caps
• with power bus throughfeed
(drawing on right)
Standard Standard reversing starter SIRIUS
reversing
starter
RS ... switches a motor rotating clockwise or
(discontinued counterclockwise on or off.
type) ... protects three-phase motors up to 5.5 kW
in the event of overloading and short
circuiting.
RS-x ... also controls a brake control module (xB1
(discontinued to 4).
type) Only the brake function of the xB3 and xB4
modules is supported, the inputs have no
effect.
RS1-x ... also controls a brake control module (xB3
or xB4).
(see Section 8.2).
Terminal ... carries the wiring and takes a standard
module reversing starter (RS, RS-x or RS1-x).
TM-RS90 ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the inte-
grated power bus.
Available types:
(drawing on right)
Table 1-2: Components for standard motor starters up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width

1-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Product overview

PE/N terminal ... adds a PEN conductor (N) and protective
block ground (PE) to the power bus.
Available types:
• with PE/N infeed and connection to
right, including 2 caps, 45 mm
• with PE/N connection and throughfeed,
45 mm
(see Sections 5.3.1 and 5.3.5).
Control kit ... for manual operation of the contactor and
checking the wiring
(only for DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x, RS1-x)
(see Section 3.2).
Control unit ... for direct drive of the contactor coils and
for ET 200S for checking the wiring and operation of the
powers section for commissioning and serv-
ice purposes.
(only for DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x, RS1-x)
(see Section 3.3).
Table 1-2: (cont.)Components for standard motor starters up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 1-5
Product overview
1.1.3 Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for high

feature motor starters

High feature High feature direct starter with electronic
direct overload protection
starters ... switches a motor on or off.
DS1e-x ... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW
circuiting.
... also controls a brake control module
(xB1 to 4).
... with integrated fail-safe kit
(see Section 7.3).
Hight feature High feature direct soft starter with elec-
direct soft tronic overload protection
starter ... switches a motor on or off.
DSS1e-x ... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW
circuiting.
(xB1, 3)
(see Section 7.4).
Terminal ... carries the wiring and takes a high feature
module direct starter DS1e-x or high feature direct
TM-DS65 soft starter DSS1e-x.
... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the inte-
grated power bus.
Available types:
(drawing on right)
High feature High feature reversing starter with elec-
RS1e-x tronic overload protection
reversing ... switches a motor rotating clockwise or
starter counterclockwise on or off.
... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW
circuiting.
(xB1 to 4).
... with integrated fail-safe kit
(see Section 8.3).
Terminal ... carries the wiring and takes a high feature
module reversing starter RS1e-x.
TM-RS130 ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the inte-
grated power bus.
Available types:
(drawing on right)
Table 1-3: Components for high feature motor starters up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation widths

1-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Product overview

Terminal ... adds a PEN conductor (N) and protective
block ground (PE) to the power bus.
and jumper
Available types:
module
• with PE/N infeed and connection to
PE/N
right, including 2 caps, 65 mm
• with PE/N connection and throughfeed,
65 mm
(see Sections 5.3.2, 5.3.3, 5.3.6, and 5.3.7).
2DI control Digital module with 2 inputs for parameteriz-
module able high feature motor starters. Actions, for
example, for full local operation, limit-posi-
tion operation, emergency start ...
(for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x,
F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x)
(see Section 3.4).
2DI COM The same as the 2DI control module but
control with an option to connect to the PC via the
module LOGO! PC cable
(order no.: 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0)
(see Section 3.5).
Table 1-3: (cont.)Components for high feature motor starters up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation widths

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 1-7
Product overview
1.1.4 Fail-safe components
Fail-safe Fail-safe direct starter with electronic over-

direct starter load protection
F-DS1e-x ... switches a motor on or off.
... switches off safely if there is no SG sig-
nal.
circuiting.
... also controls a brake control module (xB1
to 4).
(see Section 7.3).
Terminal ... carries the wiring and takes a fail-safe F-
module DS1e-x direct starter.
TM-FDS65 ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the inte-
grated power bus.
... contains the coding for the safety group
(SG1 to SG6)
Available types:
(drawing on right)
Fail-safe Fail-safe, high feature reversing starter with
reversing electronic overload protection
starter ... switches a motor rotating clockwise or
F-RS1e-x counterclockwise on or off.
... switches off safely if there is no SG sig-
nal.
circuiting.
(xB1 to 4).
(see Section 8.3).
Terminal ... carries the wiring and takes a fail-safe
module F-RS1e-x reversing starter.
TM-FRS130 ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the inte-
grated power bus.
... contains the coding for the safety group
(SG1 to SG6)
Available types:
(drawing on right)
Table 1-4: Fail-safe components

1-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Product overview
PM-D F X1 ... supplies external safety devices

power/expan- ... loops the 6 SG buses and U1 and M
sion module through
(see Section 11.3).
TM-PFX30 ... carries the wiring and takes a PM-D F X1

terminal power/expansion module
module Available types:
• Incoming supply from the left for expan-
sion
• Without an incoming supply from the left
as power module
(see Section 11.2).
F-CM contact ... used in conjunction with a fail-safe power

replicator module PM-D F PROFIsafe 1) or PM-D F X1 SF
... makes 4 floating relay contacts available

Switches off the relay contacts safely if
there is no SG signal.
(see Section11.4).
PWR
STAT
TM-FCM30 ... carries the wiring and takes a contact rep-

terminal licator module
module (see Section 11.2).
1
) Power module PM-D F PROFIsafe
see the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules manual.
Table 1-4: (cont.)Fail-safe components

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 1-9
Product overview
1.1.5 Components required for the safety integrated SIGUARD system
The following table shows the components required to set up a SIGUARD emer-
gency stop circuit.
SIGUARD The module monitors the voltage of the

power mod- electronic components and contactors for a
ule PM-D F1 group of motor feeders (potential group).
to 4 ... Ensures that all motor starters in a group
are switched off in the interests of safety.
... Is required to meet the requirements of
safety categories 2 to 4 (EN 954-1).
... Ensures safe switching of other enabling
circuits as a function of PM-D F1 to 4
PM-D F5 ... Achieves the category of the associated
PM-D F1 to 4
(see Section 9.3).
SIGUARD ... carry the wiring and take the PM-D F1 to

terminal 5 power module.
modules ... incorporate the terminals for the sensor
TM-PF30 S47 circuits (PM-D F1, 2).
... incorporate the terminals for the auxiliary
voltages (PM-D F1 to 4).
... incorporate the terminals for the enabling
circuits (PM-D F5).
... types ...B1 and ...C1
with terminating cover
(see Section 9.2).
SIGUARD ... for connecting the release circuit

connection ... for connecting an external infeed contac-
module tor/release circuit
PM-X ... for integrating ET 200S motor starter
groups in external safety circuits
(see Section 9.4).
SIGUARD ... carries the wiring and takes the

terminal PM-X connection module.
module The same model is used for the start and
TM-X15 end of a motor starter group
S27-01 (see Section 9.2.7).
Table 1-5: Components of the SIGUARD emergency stop circuit

1-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Product overview
Infeed contac- ... is a second circuit-breaking element in

tor, for the main circuit.
example ... is required for category 3 (EN 954-1) and
SIRIUS higher.
Fail-safe kit 1 ... is required for category 2 (EN 954-1) and

for standard higher.
direct starters ... consists of c
DS, DS-x, • an auxiliary switch block (a)
DS1-x • a contact holder with a connecting lead
for the direct starter (b)
• two contact supports for the
terminal module (c)
... is already integrated in the DS1e-x and a b
TM-DS65
(see Section 9.5).
Fail-safe kit 2 ... is required for category 2 (EN 954-1) and

for higher. d
standard ... consists of
reversing • two auxiliary switch blocks (a)
starters • a contact holder with a connecting lead
RS, RS-x, for the reversing starter (b)
RS1-x • four contact holders for the terminal a
module (c)
• a connecting lead (d)
c
... is incorporated into RS1e-x and
TM-RS130
(see Section 9.5).
b
Table 1-5: (cont.) Components of the SIGUARD emergency stop circuit

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 1-11
Product overview
1.1.6 Components of the expansion modules
Brake control ... for all motor starters except DS and RS -./
()'%*+%,
module
% 0
xB1 ... with externally powered mechanical & '

$ %
brakes (24 VDC/4 A) !"#"
xB3 ... and 2 inputs

$12/34$5
xB2 ... with internally powered mechanical 4).44
brakes (500 VDC/0.7 A)

xB4 ... and 2 inputs
Terminal ... carries the wiring and takes a brake con-

module trol module (xB1 or xB2).
TM-xB15
S24-01
Terminal ... carries the wiring and takes a brake con-

module trol module xB3 or xB4.
TM-xB215
S24-01 (see Section 10.3.2).
Table 1-6: Components of the expansion modules

1-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Product overview
1.2 ET 200S configuration options

Motor starters with the following features can be combined as follows:
• Motor starters with installation widths of 45/90 mm (standard motor starters) and
65/130 mm (high feature motor starters) can be combined in any configuration.
• Supply through the backplane bus is compatible.
• Power infeed between the motor starters with installation widths of 45/90 mm and
65/130 mm is separate, on account of the different installation lengths.
Safety note
Only applies in fail-safe mode (fail-safe technology)
It is not permissible to combine fail-safe modules with standard modules in a
single fail-safe potential group, with the exception of expansion modules such
as xB1 to xB4, depending on the category (see Sections 7.3, 8.3).
ET 200S with motor starters
Termin. module
IM 151 DS1-x DS1-x DS1-x RS1-x DS1e-x DS1e-x
PM-D
!"#$%&'(%&)*+,-"#
Terminating cover
Figure 1-1: ET 200S with motor starters

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 1-13
Product overview
ET 200S with motor starters and electronic modules
Termin. module
IM 151 DS1-x DS1-x DS1e-x DS1e-x
2DI DC 24 V
2DI DC 24 V
2DI DC 24 V
2DI DC 24 V
PM-D
PM-E
PM-E
Terminating cover
Figure 1-2: ET 200S with motor starters and electronic modules
ET 200S with motor starters and safety integrated SIGUARD system up to

category 4
Termin. module
DS1-x DS1-x RS1-x DS1e-x
PM-D F1
IM 151
PM-D
PM-X
contactor
Infeed
Terminating cover
Figure 1-3: ET 200S with motor starters and safety integrated SIGUARD system up to category 4

1-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Product overview
Parts list
The following parts list contains all the components required for an ET 200S
sample configuration with motor starters and safety-integrated SIGUARD sys-
tem (see Figure 1-3).
Abbreviation Order number Description
IM 151 6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0 IM 151 interface module
PM-D 3RK1903-0BA00 Power module for motor starter
TM-P15 3RK1903-0AA00 Terminal module for power module

S27-01
TM-DS45S32 3RK1903-0AB00 Terminal module for standard direct starter with power
bus infeed
DS1-x 3RK1301-0KB00-0AA2 Standard direct starter, electromechanical, 0.9 to 1.25 A
TM-PF30 3RK1903-1AA10 SIGUARD terminal module with infeed for power module
S47-B1
PM-D F1 3RK1903-1BA00 SIGUARD power module for emergency stop
TM-DS45S32 3RK1903-0AB00 Terminal module for standard direct starter with power
bus infeed
DS1-x 3RK1301-1EB00-0AA2 Standard direct starter, electromechanical, 2.8 to 4.0 A
F kit 1 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1, for standard direct starter
TM-RS90S31 3RK1903-0AC10 Terminal module for standard reversing starter, with

power bus throughfeed
RS1-x 3RK1301-1BB00-1AA2 Standard reversing starter, electromechanical,

1.4 to 2.0 A
F kit 2 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2, for standard reversing starter
TM-DS65 S32 3RK1903-0AK00 Terminal module for high feature direct starter with power
-01 FS L bus infeed
DS1e-x 3RK1301-0CB10-0AA2 High feature direct starter with electronic overload protec-
tion, 2.4 to 16 A
TM-X15 3RK1903-1AB00 Terminal module for SIGUARD connection module

S27-01
PM-X 3RK1903-1CB00 SIGUARD connection module
Terminating cover (component of the terminal modules

with power bus infeed for power modules for motor start-
ers)
Terminating module (component of the IM 151)
3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed contactor as second disconnection option

(e.g. SIRIUS, size 2)

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 1-15
Product overview
ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters up to category 4/SIL3
Termin. module
IM 151 F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x
PM-D F X1
Terminating cover
Figure 1-4: ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters up to category 4/SIL3
ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters and fail-safe electronic modules up to

category 4/SIL3
Termin. module
PM-D F PROFIsafe
IM 151 F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x

High
Feature
F DO
F DO
PM-E
PM-E
F DI
F DI
Terminating cover
Figure 1-5: ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters and fail-safe electronic modules up to category 4/SIL3

1-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Product overview
Potential and load groups

A potential group consists of a power module and all the modules to the right of
the power module up to the next power module.
A load group consists of a motor starter with power infeed and all the motor
starters to the right of it up to the next motor starter with a power infeed.
Potential group 1 Potential group 2
IM 151 DS-x1 DS1-x DS1-x DS1-x DS1-x DS1-x RS1-x DS1-x

PM-D
PM-D
Termin. module
Terminating cover
Load group 1 Load group 2 Load group 3
Jumper module
Figure 1-6: Potential groups and load groups

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 1-17
Product overview
1.3 Maximum number of modules that can be

connected/maximum configuration
Please note the following rules when configuring your ET 200S station:
• The maximum number of modules is 64.
This includes:
- Interface module
- Power modules
- Electronic modules
- Reserve modules
- Motor starters
• The maximum width is 1 m.
• The maximum length of the parameters is 244 bytes (depending on the DP master
used).
The following table contains the parameter length of the different modules in bytes:
Module Parameters Module Parameters
(bytes) (bytes)
PM-D 3 DS 3
PM-D F1 3 RS 3
PM-D F2 3 DS-x 3
PM-D F3 3 RS-x 3
PM-D F4 3 DS1-x 3
PM-D F5 3 RS1-x 3
PM-X 1 DS1e-x 12
PM-D F X1 3 RS1e-x 12
F-CM 3 DSS1e-x 12
PM-D F PROFIsafe 20 F-DS1e-x 12
xB3 3 F-RS1e-x 12
xB4 3
xB1 - 1)
xB2 - 1)
DM V15 - 1)
1
) Not included with the configuration tool
Table 1-1: Parameter length of the modules

1-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Product overview
• The following table shows you the maximum current-carrying capacity of the modules
you have to take into consideration:
Maximum
Power modules current-carrying Modules that can be connected
capacity
PM-D 10 A The number of modules that can

be connected depends on the
PM-D F1 total current of all the modules
in this potential group. This must
PM-D F2 2A+4A not exceed the relevant maxi-
PM-D F3 (see Section 9.3.3) mum current-carrying capacity.
PM-D F4
PM-D F X1 6A
PM-D F PROFIsafe Making current: 10 A

Continuous current:
5A
Table 1-2: Maximum current-carrying capacity

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 1-19
Product overview
1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals

The components of the ET 200S are described in various manuals in the
ET 200S manual package. The examples below show the possible ET 200S con-
figurations and the manuals required for them.
You use the following components ...

The ET 200S consists of You will need information from
the following components: the following manuals:
IM 151
ET 200S Distributed I/O System

PM-E
2DO
2AO
2DI
2AI
2PULSE

IM 151
PM-E
1SSI
2DO
+
2DI
ET 200S Process-Related Functions

1Posinc/Dig.

1Posinc/An.
IM 151
PM-E
+
2DO
2DI
ET 200S Positioning
Modbus/USS

IM 151
PM-E
+
2DO
2DI
2AI
ET 200S Serial Interface Module

IM 151/
+
PM-E
2DO
2AO
CPU
2DI
2AI
IM 151/CPU Interface Module
DS1-x DS1-x
IM 151
PM-E
2DO
2AO

2DI
2AI
PM-D
+
ET 200S Motor Starters
Safety Integrated SIGUARD System

1-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Product overview
You use the following fail-safe components:
The ET 200S consists of You will need information from

the following components: the following manuals:
IM 151-1 HF
PM-E
F DO
F DO
Fail-Safe Modules
F DI
F DI
IM 151-1 HF
+
PM-E
PM-E
F DO
2DO
F DI
2DI
Fail-Safe Modules
PM-D F PROFIsafe
IM 151-1 HF
F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x ET 200S Distributed I/O System

PM-E
F DO
F DO
Fail-Safe Modules
F DI
F DI
+
Safety integrated SIGUARD system

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 1-21
Product overview
Where do you find information?

The following table is designed to help you quickly find the information you
need. It tells you which manual you need to refer to and which chapter deals
with the topic you are interested in.
Manual chapter/appendix
Configuration and Programming


IM 151/CPU Interface Module
Process-Related Functions
Safety Engineering in S7
Serial Interface Module
S7 Distributed Safety
System Description
Fail-Safe Modules
Positioning
ET 200S
ET 200S
ET 200S
Subject
Components of ET 200S 1 1 1 2 2 2
Configuration options 1 3 4 3 3
Communication 4
Configuration 3 7 3
Addressing 2 5
Installation 2 4 5
Electrical layout and wiring of the 5 6
ET 200S
Programming 8 5
Commissioning and diagnostics 3 6 7
Functions 5
General technical specifications 4 7 8
Technical specifications 6 2-5 2 2, 3
Terminal modules 5, 9
9-11
Power modules 6, 9 10
11
Direct and soft starters 7
ET 200S with safety-integrated 9
SIGUARD system
Interface modules 8
Electronic modules 11-15
Positioning modules 3-6
Fail-safe modules 11 9
Monitoring, cycle, and response times 7 12 9
Order numbers A A 11
Dimensioned drawings B B 10
Applications C
Glossary Gl Gl Gl 13 10 9

1-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation 2
2.1 Slot rules 2-2
2.2 Installation rules 2-3
2.3 Installation measurements and clearances 2-4
2.4 Derating 2-5
2.5 Installing terminal modules 2-12
2.6 Inserting power modules 2-15
2.7 Installing and removing motor starters 2-17
2.7.1 Standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm 2-17
2.7.2 High feature/fail-safe motor starter with an installation width of 65 2-23

or 130 mm
2.8 Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps 2-30

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-1
Installation
2.1 Slot rules

Compliance with the following slot rules is essential in order to ensure correct
and reliable operation of an ET 200S system.
Rule Module
The slot immediately to the right of an • PM-E • PM-E F PROFIsafe
IM 151 module is always occupied by a... • PM-D • PM-D F X1
• PM-D F1 to 4 1) • PM-D F PROFIsafe
The slot immediately to the left of a PM-X • Motor starter DS • PM-D
module is always occupied by a... DS-x • PM-D F1 to 5
DS1-x • xB1 to 4
DS1e-x
RS...
The slot immediately to the left of an xB1 • DS-x 2) • RS-x 2)
to xB4 module is always occupied by a ... • DS1-x • RS1-x
• DS1e-x • RS1e-x
• DSS1e-x 3) • F-RS1e-x 4)
• F-DS1e-x 4)
Between a PM-D F1 to F5 and a PM-X • DSS1e-x
module there must never be a... • F-DS1e-x
• F-RS1e-x
The slot immediately to the left of a PM- • Motor starter DS... • PM-D F1 to 5
D F5 module is always occupied by a... RS... • xB1 to 4
The slot immediately to the right of a PM- • F-CM • PM-D F X1
D F X1 module is always occupied by a... • F-DS1e-x
• F-RS1e-x
The slot immediately to the left of an F- • PM-D F X1 • xB1 to 4
CM module is always occupied by a... • PM-D F PROFIsafe • F-CM
• F-DS1e-x
• F-RS1e-x
1
) Precondition for PM-D F3, 4 is that another row of the same
EMERGENCY STOP group must include a PM-D F1, 2 basic unit
2
) The inputs of xB3, 4 have no function
3
) See Section 10.3
4
) Depends on the category with xB3 and xB4, see Sections 7.3, 8.3
Table 2-1:Slot rules

2-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
2.2 Installation rules

Easy installation
The ET 200S distributed I/O device is designed for easy installation.
To install an ET 200S with power modules, first snap on the terminal modules
and then insert the power modules and motor starters into them.
Installation rules for an ET 200S with motor starters

To install an ET 200S, comply with the following rules (see also the figures in
Section 1.2, ET 200S configuration options):
• The components are arranged in a single line in groups.
• Each line begins on the left with an IM 151 interface module.
• A power module comes after the interface module or at the beginning of
each potential group.
• Groups with motor starters require special power modules with connections
for contactor supply voltage.
• The ET 200S distributed I/O device ends with the terminating module, motor
starters additionally with a terminating cover and with caps for the power
bus.
• The maximum configuration of the distributed I/O device is 64 modules
(including the interface and power modules).
• The maximum number of motor starters that can be connected to an ET 200S
station is 20. The maximum station width of an ET 200S rail is 1 m.
Installation position
Permitted installation position: vertical and horizontal on standard mounting
rails.
Derating (see Section 2.4) must be taken into account if necessary.
Rail
The ET 200S distributed I/O device is installed on rails complying with EN 50022
(35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm). To install an ET 200S with motor starters, you
need two rails installed with center-to-center spacing of 100 mm.
Important
We recommend screwing the rails to the fixing surface at intervals of 200 mm.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-3
Installation
2.3 Installation measurements and clearances
Measure-
Module mm
ments
Installation Terminal module for

width • Power module PM-D 15
• DM-V15 spacing module 15
• PM-X connection module (safety integrated SIGUARD system) 15
• PM-D power module F1 to F5 (safety integrated SIGUARD system) 30
• PM-D F PROFIsafe power module 30
• PM-D F X1 power module 30
• Standard DS, DS-x, DS1-x direct starters 45
• High feature DS1e-x direct starter 65
• High feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter 65
• Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter 65
• Standard RS, RS-x, RS1-x reversing starters 90
• High feature RS1e-x reversing starter 130
• Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter 130
Installation Terminal module for standard direct and reversing starters with 45 or
height 90 mm installation width
• With 3-pin power bus (L1, L2, L3) 264
• With 5-pin power bus (incl. PE/N) 306
Terminal module for high feature or fail-safe direct and reversing starters
with a 65 or 130 mm installation width
• With 3-pin power bus (L1, L2, L3) 290
• With 5-pin power bus (incl. PE/N) 332
Installation ET 200S on rail with 7.5 mm depth:

depth • ET 200S 75
• ET 200S with standard motor starters with an installation width of 45 127
or 90 mm
• ET 200S with standard motor starters with an installation width of 45 152
or 90 mm and safety integrated SIGUARD system
• ET 200S with high feature or fail-safe motor starters with an installation 157
width of 65 or 130 mm
• ET 200S with high feature or fail-safe motor starters with an installation 180
width of 65 or 130 mm and 2DI/-2DI COM control module
• ET 200S with high feature or fail-safe motor starters with an installation
width of 65 or 130 mm and 2DI COM control module with LOGO! PC 220
cable
Minimum • Above and below the terminal module 35

spacing • To the left of the IM 151 interface module 20
for installa- • To the right of the ET 200S terminating module 20
tion and • Under the installed shield bus 15
wiring
Table 2-2:Installation measurements and clearances

2-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
2.4 Derating
2.4.1 What is derating?
Derating refers to the use of devices in difficult operating conditions by selec-

tively limiting their performance. In the case of motor starters, this generally
involves operating at high ambient
temperatures.
2.4.2 Derating factors
The following applies exclusively to the following motor starters, which are
installed side by side in a row.
• Standard motor starters:
- DS
- DS-x
- DS1-x
• Fail-safe motor starters:
- F-DS1e-x
- F-RS1e-x
In the case of the ET 200S motor starters, the following factors must be taken
into account in difficult environmental conditions:
• Ambient temperature Tu:
Ambient temperature Tu is the temperature around the housing of the motor
starter.
The lower the maximum ambient temperature Tu, the higher the current load
in the motor starters can be.
• Absolute current load:
The lower the current through a motor starter, the lower the heat loss in the
device. If the device does not generate much heat, the ambient temperature
Tu can be higher.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-5
Installation
2.4.3 DM-V15 spacing module
If operating conditions are difficult and render derating necessary, a DM-V15

spacing module is inserted between the corresponding motor starters.
The DM-V15 spacing module is suitable for all motor starter series. It is entirely
passive and requires no configuration. The bus and all the other connections are
looped through for the following modules.
The elements of the spacing module are illustrated below.
Ventilation grid
Support
Bus
Supply voltage
U1 for the electronic components
AUX1
RF1/2 or SG1/2
Supply voltage
U2 for contactors or SG3/4
AUX2/3 or SG5/6
Figure 2-1: DM-V15 spacing module
Note
No special measures are required for the following motor starters:
- Standard reversing starters RS, RS-x, RS1-x

- High feature DS1e-x direct starter
- High feature DSS1e-x soft starter
- High feature RS1e-x reversing starter

2-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
2.4.4 Criteria for configurations with/without DM-V15 spacing modules
The criteria and configurations in which spacing modules for DS, DS-x, DS1-x,
F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x are recommended are illustrated below.
Criteria for DS, DS-x, DS1-x

Vertical installation on horizontal rails
Tu
≤50 °C for xB1 to 4

60 °C
PM-D|S|S|S
PM-D F1-4|S|S|S
PM-D|DSx|xB1-4|DSx|xB1-4|DSx|xB1-4
40 °C
PM-D|DM-V15|DS|DM-V15|DS|DM-V15|S
PM-D F1-4|DM-V15|DS|DM-V15|DS|DM-V15|S
PM-D|DM-V15|DSx|xB1-4|DM-V15|DSx|xB1-4|DM-V15|DSx|xB1-4
PM-D|S|S|S
PM-D F1-4|S|S|S
Ie
Circuit breaker ≤6.3 A Circuit breaker >6.3 A
= without DM-V15, motor current 90% of Ie or

with DM-V15, motor current 100% of Ie
= without DM-V15
= with DM-V15
Ie = max. current setting of circuit breaker

Figure 2-2: Criteria for vertical installation on horizontal rails with DS, DS-x, DS1-x

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-7
Installation
Horizontal installation on vertical rails
Tu
40 °C
PM-D|S|S|S
PM-D F1-4|S|S|S
30 °C
PM-D|S|S|S
PM-D F1-4|S|S|S
Ie
Circuit breaker ≤6.3 A Circuit breaker >6.3 A
= without DM-V15
= without DM-V15, motor current 90% of Ie

Figure 2-3: Criteria for horizontal installation on vertical rails with DS, DS-x, DS1-x

2-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
Criteria for F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x

Vertical installation on horizontal rails
Tu
60 °C
Ie
50 °C 3 A without DM-V15 1)
8 A without DM-V15 1)
40 °C 8 A without DM-V15 1)
16 A with DM-V15 2)
8 A with DM-V15 2)
30 °C 16 A not permissible
Ie
25% 50% 75% 100%
Motor current as % of the maximum current setting Ie
Tu = ambient temperature
1
) without DM-V15:
A DM-V15 is not necessary between the motor starters
2) With DM-V15:
- A DM-V15 must be placed on the left and right in the case of a F-DS1e-x (with or without
brake control module).
- A DM-V15 must be placed on the right in the case of a F-RS1e-x (with or without brake con-
trol module). The left half of an F-RS1e-x counts as a DM-V15 for the purpose of derating.
Figure 2-4: Criteria for vertical installation on horizontal rails with F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
Important
You must insert a DM-V15 between a PM-D F PROFIsafe and a F-DS1e-x as of
an ambient temperature of Tu ≥50 °C.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-9
Installation
Example:
The following example of a configuration shows you when a DM-V15 spacing

module is recommended.
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10
Terminating module
PM-D F F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x
DM-V15
DM-V15
DM-V15
PROFI 0.3 ... 3 A 2.4 ... 16 A 2.4 ... 16 A 2.4 ... 8 A
xB3
safe Ie = 100% Ie = 75% Ie = 75% Ie = 90%
IM
151-1
HF
Terminating cover
Jumper module
Figure 2-5: Configuration example for derating
The following criteria were taken into consideration in this example:

• The ambient temperature Tu is 55 °C.
• A3 is necessary because Tu > 50 °C and A4 is a F-DS1e-x on the right of a
PM-D F PROFIsafe.
• A4 is loaded with 3 A (100%) and therefore a DM-V15 is not necessary.
• A5 is loaded with 12 A (75%) and therefore a DM-V15 (A7) is required next to
the brake control module.
• A8 is loaded with 12 A (75%) and therefore a DM-V15 is required on the right
(A9) and left (A7).
• A10 is loaded with 7.2 A (90%) and therefore a DM-V15 is required on the left
(A9). The DM-V15 to the right of A10 is not necessary because the ET 200S
station is finished at this point.
The following diagram shows you when a DM-V15 is necessary.

Tu
60 °C
A5 A8 A10 A4
55 °C
50 °C
Ie
50 % 75 % 90 % 100 %
Motor current as % of the maximum current setting Ie
Figure 2-6: Determining the derating for a configuration example

2-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
Horizontal installation on vertical rails
Horizontal installation is permissible for an ambient temperature up to

Tu = 40 °C.
Derating and therefore a DM-V15 is not required for fail-safe motor starters
installed horizontally up to a temperature of Tu = 40 °C.
Other configurations
The configurations shown above can also be combined, in which case the derat-
ing factors specified above change. In such cases, please get in touch with your
Siemens contact or the Siemens low-voltage engineering technical support
department (fax: +49 (0) 9131/7-42899).

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-11
Installation
2.5 Installing terminal modules

Features
• Terminal modules replace the control wiring in the switch cabinet and are
mechanical carriers for the function modules (e.g. the power modules and
the motor starters).
• With the terminal modules it is possible to completely prewire the switch
cabinet without the power modules and motor starters being fitted.
Requirements
• Two rails are installed (center-to-center spacing 100 mm).
• Space is left for the IM 151 interface module.
Mechanical coding of the modules

When the module is first inserted, the terminal module is mechanically coded to
ensure that, in the event of a fault, it can only be replaced by a module with
identical functions.
Note the configured structure when installing, and identify the terminal modules
with the labeling strips (see Section 2.2).
Installing terminal modules for motor starters

The example below illustrates the installation of terminal modules with an
installation width of 45 mm for standard direct starter.
Drawing Procedure
1 Hang the terminal module on the upper rail.
Table 2-3: Installing terminal modules - standard direct starter: example

2-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
Drawing Procedure
2 Tilt the terminal module backwards into the

lower rail until you hear it engage.
3 Push the terminal to the left with both hands

towards the module you have already installed,
keeping it straight, until you can hear it engage
with the adjacent module.
Table 2-3: (cont.)Installing terminal modules - standard direct starter: example

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-13
Installation
Removing terminal modules for motor starters
Warning
Switch off all the connected supply voltage!
You can only remove a terminal module if there are no modules connected on
the right. If necessary, you must remove all the modules on the right or move
them to the side.
The example below illustrates the removal of terminal modules with an installa-
tion width of 45 mm for standard direct starter.
Drawing Procedure
1 Use a screwdriver (5 mm) to push down the

locking mechanism of the module on the left.
2 With the locking mechanism of the neighbor-

ing module open, pull the module to be
removed to the right parallel to the rails.
Table 2-4: Removing terminal modules - standard direct starter: example

2-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
Drawing Procedure
3 Unlock the module by inserting the screw-

driver in the opening of the locking mechanism
and pushing the locking mechanism down-
ward. This unlocks both the upper and lower
rail.
4 With the locking mechanism depressed, tilt the

module so that it comes off the lower rail.
You can then remove the module from the
upper rail.
Table 2-4: (cont.)Removing terminal modules - standard direct starter: example
2.6 Inserting power modules

Requirements
Before inserting power modules, the following requirements must be met:
• Both rails must be installed.
• The terminal module for the power module must be installed.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-15
Installation
Mechanical coding
When the modules are inserted, the corresponding terminal module is mechan-
ically coded (two coding elements) to ensure that, in the event of a fault, it can
only be replaced by a module with identical functions.
You must therefore bear the config-
ured layout in mind when you insert
the modules.
The illustration on the right shows the
Power module
coding of a PM-D power module by
way of example.
Incorrectly inserted code elements
can be removed from the terminal
module using a 3 mm screwdriver. Code elements
Note Terminal module

If a brand-new module is plugged into
a terminal module that is already
coded, the part of the code element
for the terminal module must be
removed from the module before-
hand.
Figure 2-7: Mechanical coding of terminal

modules
Inserting power modules

Insert the power module onto the installed and prewired terminal module as
shown in the drawing. Power modules can only be connected to the correct ter-
minal modules regardless of the code element.
PM-D
or
PM-D F1 to 4
TM-P15 S27-01
or
TM-PF30 S45
Figure 2-8: Inserting power modules

2-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
2.7 Installing and removing motor starters

2.7.1 Standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm
Requirements
• All the terminal modules for the power modules and motor starters must be
installed.
Mechanical coding
When the motor starters are installed, the terminal modules are mechanically
coded to ensure that, in the event of a fault, they can only be replaced by mod-
ules with identical functions.
You must therefore bear the configured layout in mind when you insert the
modules.
Installing standard motor starters

• The motor starters are inserted in the installed terminal modules. There are
two latched positions here. Depending on the position, electrical connections
are made or broken at removal. The locking spring prevents you removing the
motor starters under load.
• The following table takes the example of a standard direct starter to describe
how motor starters are installed.
Drawing Procedure/Description
1 Hold the standard motor starter

at a slight angle (see drawing)
Latch piece
and push it into the terminal mod-
ule from the front.
Push firmly on the lower part

until contact is established with
the power bus.
• The standard motor starter is

still slightly tilted and the
latch piece is not engaged.
• The locking spring is not yet

engaged.
The standard motor starter is

mechanically insecure in this
position and connected only to
the power bus.
1
Locking
spring
Table 2-5: Installing a standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-17
Installation
2 Press the latch piece and move
2 3 the motor starter further towards
the rail until the latch piece
engages.
2 The standard motor starter is
now in its parked position.
Parked position
3 • The connection to the back-
plane bus is not yet estab-
lished.
• There is no supply to the elec-
tronic components.
• The connection to the power
bus is established. The con-
tactors cannot respond, how-
ever, because there is no con-
nection to the backplane bus
and the electronic compo-
nents and switching com-
mands thus remain ineffec-
tive.
4 Press the latch piece again and

4 5 move the motor starter further
towards the DIN rail until the
latch piece engages again.
The standard motor starter is
4 now in its operating position.
Operating position
plane bus is established. The
electronic components and
contactors are supplied with
power.
• The locking spring is
engaged.
The locking spring prevents the

motor starter from being
removed when live.
Locking
spring
Table 2-5: (cont.) Installing a standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm

2-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
Removing standard motor starters

A motor starter can be removed from the terminal module during operation. The
feeder must be dead, e.g. circuit breaker switched off. Before you can remove
the module, the latch piece must be taken beyond both latched positions, thus
interrupting the electrical connections. The locking spring prevents you remov-
ing the load feeders under load.
Important
If you remove more than one module from the ET 200S, the station switches to
STOP mode.
Danger
In version 1 of the IM 151, no modules can be removed during operation. Mod-
ule replacement is only permitted when the supply of the IM 151 is switched
off.
The following table takes the example of a standard reversing starter to

describe how motor starters are removed.
Ensure that the motor starter is

switched off.
1 1 • Press both latches down.
1 2
1 • Move the latch piece beyond
the first latched position. The
2 connection to the bus and the
supply voltages is inter-
rupted. The motor starter is
now in its parked position, i.e.
2 the connection to the back-
plane bus has been inter-
rupted and the module is
(still) in a mechanically secure
position (see also Table 2-4)
• Once you move the latch

piece beyond the second
latched position, the motor
starter is released, the lock-
ing spring is disengaged and
the motor starter is no longer
mechanically secure.
Locking spring
Table 2-6: Removing a standard motor starter with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-19
Installation
3 Take hold of the load feeder in

both hands using the upper and
lower grip recesses, and pull the
motor starter out.
Pull the module from the bottom

in a continuous movement
(approx. 30 N tensile force) at an
angle out of the plug-in connec-
tion.
Locking spring
Table 2-6: (cont.) Removing a standard motor starter with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm
Note
It is advisable to inform maintenance and service personnel in detail about cor-
rect handling of the motor starters before the system is handed over to ensure
that the advantages of ET 200S will be available immediately in the event of
replacement.

2-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
Electrical connections during installation and removal

The drawings below illustrate the various installation and removal positions of a
standard motor starter and the resulting electrical connections.
Drawing Description
Insertion or release position

The standard motor starter is electri-
cally connected only to the power bus
in this position.
The locking spring is in the release

position, and the load feeder is
mechanically insecure in this position.
Parked position
The standard motor starter is electri-
cally connected only to the power bus
in this position.
The connection to the backplane bus

is not established.
The supply to the contactors is estab-

lished but remains ineffective
because there is no connection to the
ET 200S backplane bus.
In this position the feeder is mechani-

cally secured against falling out.
Table 2-7: Electrical connections during installation/removal of the standard motor starter
(45 or 90 mm)

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-21
Installation
Drawing Description
Operating position
The connections to the backplane bus
and the supply to the electronic com-
ponents and to the contactors have
been established.
The locking spring is engaged, which

means the motor starter cannot be
removed.
Table 2-7: (cont.) Electrical connections during installation/removal of the standard motor starter
(45 or 90 mm)

2-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
2.7.2 High feature/fail-safe motor starters with an installation width of 65 or

130 mm
Requirements
• All the terminal modules for the power modules and motor starters must be
installed.
• The safety group (SG) must be specified in the terminal modules of the fail-
safe motor starters before the fail-safe motor starters are installed.
Specifying the safety group

Only relevant for fail-safe motor starters.
One of the six safety groups can be coded for each terminal module. The termi-
nal modules can be arranged in any order.
The terminal modules are supplied coded for the SG1 safety group.
Use the light gray coding connector to set the safety group. The indentation
indicates the connection to which the contact of the coding connector applies.
The two dark gray coding connectors do not have any contacts.
To change the coding to another safety group, proceed as follows
• To change the coding to the SG2 safety group:
Remove the light gray coding connector (see the figure below) from the ter-
minal module, rotate it 180° and reinsert it.
• To change the coding to the safety groups SG3 to SG6:
First remove the dark gray coding connector for the safety group SG3/4 or
SG5/6. Then insert the light gray coding connector in the corresponding posi-
tion. Insert the dark gray coding connector in the free position.
State on delivery Example for SG2 Example for SG5

Figure 2-9: Specifying the safety group
Safety note
Only one safety group may be selected for each terminal module.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-23
Installation
Mechanical coding
When the motor starters are installed, the terminal modules are mechanically
coded to ensure that, in the event of a fault, they can only be replaced by power
modules with identical functions.
You must therefore bear the configured layout in mind when you insert the
modules.
Installing high feature/fail-safe motor starters

• The motor starters are inserted in the installed terminal modules. There are
two latched positions here. Depending on the position, electrical connections
are made or broken at removal. The locking hook prevents you removing the
motor starters under load.
• The following table takes the example of a high feature direct starter to
describe how motor starters are installed.
1 Hold the high feature motor

starter at a slight angle (see
drawing) and push it into the ter-
minal module from the front.
Latch piece
Push firmly on the lower part
until contact is established with
the power bus.
• The high feature motor

starter is still slightly tilted
and the latch piece is not
engaged.
• The locking hook is not yet

1 engaged.
The high feature motor starter is

1 mechanically insecure in this
position and connected only to
the power bus.
Table 2-8: Installing a high feature/fail-safe motor starter with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm

2-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
2 Press the latch piece and

towards the rail until the latch
piece engages.
2 now in its parked position.
Parked position

plane bus is not yet estab-
lished.
• There is no supply to the elec-
tronic components.
• The connection to the power
bus is established. The con-
tactors cannot respond, how-
ever, because there is no con-
nection to the backplane bus
and the electronic compo-
nents and switching com-
mands thus remain ineffec-
tive.
4 Press the latch piece again and

towards the DIN rail until the
latch piece engages again.
4 now in its operating position.
Operating position
plane bus is established. The
electronic components and
contactors are supplied with
power.
• The locking hook is engaged.
The locking hook prevents the

motor starter from being
removed when live.
“A”
“A”
Locking hook
Table 2-8: (cont.) Installing a high feature/fail-safe motor starter with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-25
Installation
Deinstalling high feature/fail-safe motor starters

A motor starter can be removed from the terminal module during operation. The
feeder must be dead, e.g. circuit breaker switched off. Before you can remove
the module, the latch piece must be taken beyond both latched positions, thus
interrupting the electrical connections. The locking hook prevents you removing
the load feeders under load.
Important
If you remove more than one module from the ET 200S, the station switches to
STOP mode.
Danger
In version 1 of the IM 151, no modules can be removed during operation. Mod-
ule replacement is only permitted when the supply of the IM 151 is switched
off.
The following table takes the example of a high feature reversing starter to
describe how motor starters are removed.
Ensure that the motor starter is

switched off.
1 • Press both latches down.

1 2
• Move the latch piece beyond
the first latched position. The
2
1 connection to the bus and the
supply voltages is inter-
1 rupted. The motor starter is
now in its parked position, i.e.
the connection to the back-
plane bus has been inter-
rupted and the module is
(still) in a mechanically secure
2 position (see also Table 2-4)
• Once you move the latch

piece beyond the second
latched position, the motor
starter is released, the lock-
ing hook is disengaged and
the motor starter is no longer
mechanically secure.
Table 2-9: Deinstalling a high feature/fail-safe motor starter with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm

2-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
3 Take hold of the load feeder in

both hands using the upper and
lower grip recesses, and pull the
motor starter out.
Pull the module from the bottom

in a continuous movement
(approx. 30 N tensile force) at an
angle out of the plug-in connec-
tion.
“A”
“A”
Locking hook
Table 2-9: (cont.) Deinstalling a high feature/fail-safe motor starter with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm
Note
It is advisable to inform maintenance and service personnel in detail about cor-
rect handling of the motor starters before the system is handed over to ensure
that the advantages of ET 200S will be available immediately in the event of
replacement.
Caution
Test the F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x after it has been replaced
(see Sections 7.3, 8.3).

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-27
Installation
Electrical connections during installation and removal

The drawings below illustrate the various installation and removal positions of a
high feature/fail-safe motor starter and the resulting electrical connections.
Drawing Description
Insertion or release position

The high feature motor starter is elec-
trically connected only to the power
bus in this position.
The locking hook is in the release

position, and the load feeder is
mechanically insecure in this position.
Parked position
The high feature motor starter is elec-
trically connected only to the power
bus in this position.
The connection to the backplane bus

is not established.
The supply to the contactors is estab-

lished but remains ineffective
because there is no connection to the
ET 200S backplane bus.
In this position the feeder is mechani-

cally secured against falling out.
Table 2-10: Electrical connections during installation/removal of a high feature/fail-safe

motor starter (65 mm or 130 mm)

2-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
Drawing Description
Operating position
The connections to the backplane bus
and the supply to the electronic com-
ponents and to the contactors have
been established.
The locking hook is engaged, which

means the motor starter cannot be
removed.
Table 2-10: (cont.) Electrical connections during installation/removal of a high feature/fail-safe

motor starter (65 mm or 130 mm)

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-29
Installation
2.8 Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover

and caps
Terminating module
The last module to be installed in the ET 200S distributed I/O device is the ter-
minating module. The ET 200S is only ready for operation when the terminating
module is inserted. The terminating module is supplied with the IM 151 inter-
face module. For more information see the SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O
System manual.
Terminating cover
In a configuration with motor starters, a terminating cover has to be fitted to the
last terminal module of a potential group if it is followed by a PM-E or a terminal
module, in order to ensure that open contacts are protected against dirt and that
the ET 200S is "finger-proof".
The terminating cover is supplied with the TM-P15 S27-01, TM-PF30 S47-B1/
C1/F1 and TM-PFX30 S47-G1 terminal modules for the power modules.
Caps
Warning
In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the
open contacts must be sealed with caps so that they are safe from touching
(push the caps on firmly) before the power bus is commissioned (L1, L2, L3, N,
PE). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an
electric shock (400 VAC).
When you add to the ET 200S station, you must remove the caps. Use a 1 mm
screwdriver to do this. Then replace the caps on the power bus of the new last
motor starter.
The caps are included in the delivery package of the terminal module for motor
starters with power bus infeed and of the terminal block with PE/N infeed.

2-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installation
Concluding the line of an ET 200S configuration

You can conclude the installation of the ET 200S distributed I/O device with
motor starters by inserting the following components:
Terminating module
Terminating cover*
Caps to cover the

power buses L1, L2, L3 and PE/N
Figure 2-10: Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps
Installing the terminating module

1. Hang the terminating module on the upper rail.
2. Tilt the terminating module backwards onto the rail until you hear it engage.
3. Move the terminating module to the left until you hear it engage with the last
terminal module.
Removing the terminating module

1. Use a screwdriver (5 mm) to push the locking mechanism on the last termi-
nal module to the stop, and move the terminating module to the right.
2. Tilt the terminating module so that it comes off the rail.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 2-31
Installation

2-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Commissioning and diagnostics 3
3.1 Commissioning 3-2
3.2 Control kit 3-6
3.3 Control unit 3-7
3.4 2DI control module 3-8
3.5 2DI COM control module 3-11
3.6 Configuration 3-12
3.7 Diagnostics 3-18
3.8 LED indicators 3-22
3.9 Process image 3-35
3.10 Switch ES motor starter 3-40

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-1
Commissioning and diagnostics
3.1 Commissioning
Important
It is essential that you comply with the voltage tolerance for the U2 contactor
supply up to 60 °C: 20.4 V to 28.8 V (does not apply to F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x).
Current setting
• Standard motor starters with 45/90 mm installation width (see Figure 3-1):
Use a screwdriver to adjust the set current for overload tripping on the scale
of the circuit breaker before you put the motor starter into operation. Note
the two possible setting marks:
- Dash marking:
Setting mark for the circuit breaker with reversing starters or
spacing modules
- Triangle marking:
Setting mark for the circuit breaker in side-by-side installation.
Ie
360° ok
Figure 3-1: Current setting
Warning
The adjusting knob can be rotated 360° clockwise. You can only turn it back
within the setting range.
• In the case of high feature/fail-safe motor starters with an installation width

of 65/130 mm:
Parameterize the set current by means of the software.

3-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
External short-circuit protection
Safety note
External short-circuit protection
If the short-circuit current at the installation position of the motor starter can
exceed the rated short-circuit breaking capacity (50 kA) of the circuit breaker or
starter protection switch, you must provide additional external short-circuit pro-
tection (fuse or circuit breaker).
Overload tripping test

Only standard motor starters with 45/90 mm installation width
You can test overload tripping. To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Switch the toggle switch from 0 to 1.
2. Put a screwdriver in the test opening and push it to the left. Overload tripping
works when the toggle switch moves from 1 to 0.
Scale for
current setting Toggle switch of the
circuit breaker
Test opening
45/90 mm installation width

Figure 3-2: Overload tripping test

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-3
After overload or short-circuit tripping

• Standard motor starters with 45/90 mm installation width:
After overload or short-circuit tripping during operation, you must reset the
circuit breaker.
1. Switch the toggle switch from 0 to 1.
2. Check that the contactor is working.
• In the case of high feature/fail-safe motor starters with an installation width

of 65/130 mm:
– After short-circuit tripping (knob switch of the starter protection switch is
between 0 and 1), you must turn the knob switch all the way to 0 (reset function)
and then back to 1.
– After overload tripping (starter protection switch not tripped), there are two ways
of resetting overload tripping:
a) Using the knob switch on the motor starter in situ:
Turn the knob switch from 1 to 0 and then back from 0 to 1 within 2 seconds.
b) Using remote reset:
By means of a rising edge at the output DO 0.3.
Disconnecting a load from the power supply

By switching the toggle switch on the circuit breaker or the knob switch on the
starter protection switch from 1 to 0 you can electrically isolate a connected
load from the mains.
Wiring of the contactors with diodes not permitted

The contactors of the motor starters must not be wired with diodes, because
Zener diodes are already integrated as surge suppression and additional diodes
would thus prolong the switch-off times.
Reversing starters
Use the user program to ensure before a change of direction that the drive is
switched to "STOP" mode and remains in stop until the motor has stopped turn-
ing.

3-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Preventing unauthorized persons from switching on

You can prevent the motor starter from being switched on without authorization
by attaching a padlock (with a bow diameter of 3.5 to 4.5 mm) at position 0
• of the toggle switch of the circuit breaker in standard motor starters
• of the pulled-out lug of the knob of the starter protection switch in high fea-
ture/fail-safe motor starters
Ø 3.5 mm to 4.5 mm
Standard motor starter Motor starter (high feature/

fail-safe)
Figure 3-3: Preventing unauthorized persons from switching on
This protection loses its effect if a locked motor starter is replaced by an

unlocked motor starter. To ensure isolation, we therefore recommend that you
remove the motor starter and affix a padlock to the terminal module.
Opening for padlock
to prevent installation of
motor starters
Terminal module 45 mm Terminal module 65 mm

Installation width Installation width
Figure 3-4: Lock in the terminal module preventing unauthorized persons from switching on

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-5
3.2 Control kit

The control kit is intended only for standard motor starters with installation
widths of 45 and 90 mm.
The control kit is for the manual operation of the contactors

for initial operation and for troubleshooting.
Note
Before connecting the control kit to the contactor or remov-
ing it again, always deenergize the motor starter in order to
avoid unnecessary wear on the contacts of the contactor.
The load can be switched on and off only by means of the

power circuit breaker.
Warning
Do not use the control kit in conjunction with safety-oriented applications
(SIGUARD with power module PM-D F1 to 5) or motor starters with brake con-
trol modules xB1 to xB4.

3-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
3.3 Control unit

The control unit is intended only for standard motor starters with installation
widths of 45 and 90 mm.
The control unit is for direct drive of the contactor

coils of ET 200S devices (manual control) for com-
missioning, servicing, and troubleshooting pur-
poses.
Installation
Set the control unit cable end up on the open coil
auxiliary connections of the ET 200S contactor and
press it in until seated.
Warning
Do not use the control unit in conjunction with safety-oriented applications
(SIGUARD with power module PM-D F1 to 5) or motor starters with brake con-
trol modules xB1 to xB4.
Wiring
Use non-overlapping switching elements for the "manual/automatic" selector
switch.
The cable of the control unit is 1 m in length.
Wire the control unit in accordance with the wiring diagram below.
A1+
Autom. / Manual
to other motor starters
Manual ON Manual ON
Control unit
U2 24 VDC
ET 200S bus
AUX2
4/11
Terminal module Motor starters

TM-P15 S27-01 DS... / RS...
PM-D
K1 K2
A2- AUX3
5/12
Figure 3-5: Wiring diagram for control unit

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-7
3.4 2DI control module

The 2DI control module is intended only for high feature/fail-safe motor starters
with installation widths of 65 and 130 mm.
Note
The 2DI control module can only be used with high feature motor starters with
version *E04* and above.
Description
The control module 2DI has two inputs for con-
trol-cabinet signals; these inputs can be parame-
terized by means of the motor starter on which
the module is mounted. Each input has a green 2 3
LED which indicates the status.
The signal states of the inputs are as follows:
LED IN3, 4 Status 1 2 3 4

M L+
Off Low signal 24 VDC
Green High signal Input 3 Input 4
Table 3-1: Signal states, control module 2DI
NO or NC switching elements or 2-wire or 3-wire sensors (PNP) can be con-

nected to the inputs.
Warning
The inputs are not floating and do not have a diagnostic message for faults such
as: wire break, overload and short-circuit. If any of these faults occur, simulta-
neous detection and execution of the input function are not possible.
Consequently, the use of these elements in safety-relevant parts of the system
is not permitted.
Safety note
The 2DI control module can only be used in conjunction with the F-DS1e-x and
F-RS1e-x (see Sections 7.3, 8.3).

3-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Parameter assignment
The inputs can be parameterized independently of each other for different
actions. Parameterization is described in:
• 7.3.4 for high feature/fail-safe direct starters
• 7.4.5 for high feature direct soft starters
• 8.3.4 for high feature/fail-safe reversing starters
Installation - removal
In order to install the 2DI control module, push down the transparent cover on
the front of the high feature/fail-safe motor starter. Clip the 2DI control module
onto the motor starter.
Remove the 2DI control module by pressing the recessed grips on each side
toward each other and pulling the module off the high feature/fail-safe motor
starter. After removal, push the transparent cover up to protect the connec-
tions.
Supply voltage
The 2DI control module is supplied from the U1 voltage. This applies both to
connected sensors and contact elements.
Wiring
Wire the inputs in accordance with the wiring diagram below.
2-wire 3-wire
U1 4 L+
3 IN4
DI 0.7
2 IN3
DI 0.6
1 M
Figure 3-6: Sketched wiring diagram, 2DI control module

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-9
Technical specifications, 2DI control module
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
(installed) 23.8 x 45 x 23.3
Weight (g) approx. 15
Module-specific data
Ambient temperature operation 0 to 60 °C

storage -40 to 80 °C
Degree of protection IP 20, IEC 60529
Inputs IN3 and IN4 (terminals 2 and 3)
Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131 Type 1
Low input current I in <1.5 mA
High input current I in >5 mA
Max. input current max. 8 to 10 mA
Input delay t in approx. 10 ms
Supply from U1 (terminals 1 and 4) short circuit-proof and overload-proof
Operating voltage range

(referenced to U1-) 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Current limitation for short-circuit

to U1- ca. 100 mA
Assignment of the inputs
Control module 2DI High feature motor starter

IN3 Input 3 (DI 0.6)
IN4 Input 4 (DI 0.7)
Connection cross-sections
Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947
Single-wire or finely stranded (mm2) 2 x (0.14 to 1)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947
(mm 2)
AWG cables,
single- or multi-core 1 x (18 to 22)
Wiring
Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7

Table 3-2: Technical specifications, 2DI control module

3-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
3.5 2DI COM control module

The 2DI COM control module has the same features as the 2DI control module
described in Section 3.4.
Only the additional PC interface is described in this section.
Description
The 2DI COM control module has an additional PC interface
PC interface to connect the parameterization and
diagnostic softwareSwitch ES Motor Starter (as
of version 2.0).
There is a short description of the software in 3
Section 3.10. 2
The 2DI COM control module is intended for

motor starters with installation widths of 65 mm
and 130 mm: 1 2 3 4
• High feature with order M L+

24 VDC
numbers ending in ...AA3
• Fail-safe motor starters: Input 3 Input 4
The ’LOGO! PC cable' (order no. 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0) is used as a connec-

tion cable between the 2DI COM control module and the PC.
Open the dust cap on the 2DI COM control module on the corresponding motor
starter to insert the cable for the connection to the PC. Insert the other end of
the cable in your PC in the port for the serial interface.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-11
3.6 Configuration
Configuring means configuring and parameterizing the ET 200S.
You can find additional information in Section 6.1 of the SIMATIC ET 200S Dis-
tributed I/O System manual
The STEP7 versions as of which the individual modules are included are listed in
the table below.
STEP7_
Product label MLFB Product brief
version
DS 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA0 Direct starter; electromechanical; 5.0 SP3

unfused
DS-x 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA1 Direct starter; electromechanical; 5.0 SP3

unfused; expandable
RS 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA0 Reversing starter; electromechanical; 5.0 SP3

unfused
RS-x 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA1 Reversing starter; electromechanical; 5.0 SP3

unfused; expandable
PM-D DC24V 3RK1903-0BA00 Power module; PM-D; 2 x DC 24 V 5.0 SP3
PM-D F1 3RK1903-1BA00 Power module; emergency stop; 5.0 SP3

SIGUARD monitored start; 2 channels
PM-D F2 3RK1903-1BB00 Power module; protective door; auto- 5.0 SP3

SIGUARD matic start; 2 channels
PM-D F4 3RK1903-1BC00 Power module; expansion board of 5.0 SP3

SIGUARD F1/2 for another potential group
PM-D F3 3RK1903-1BD00 Power module; expansion board of 5.0 SP3

SIGUARD F1/2 for another potential group;
time-delayed
PM-X 3RK1903-1CB00 Connection module for incoming- 5.0 SP3

SIGUARD feeder contactor; external safety cir-
cuits
Table 3-3: Configuring motor starters

3-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
STEP7_
version
RS1-x 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 Reversing starter; electromechanical; 5.1

unfused; expandable
(brake, local control)
xB3 DC24V/4A 3RK1903-0CE00 Brake control module DC 24 V/4 A, 5.1

DI 2 x DC 24 V local control
xB4 DC500V/0.7A 3RK1903-0CF00 Brake control module DC 500 V/ 5.1

0.7 A, DI 2 x DC 24 V local control
DS1-x 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 Direct starter; electromechanical; 5.1 SP1

unfused; expandable (brake, local
control)
PM-D F5 3RK1903-1BE00 Power module; expansion board of 5.1 SP1

SIGUARD F1 to 4;
contact replicator
DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A 3RK1301-0AB10-0AA2 High feature direct starters: mechani- 5.1 SP2
high feature cal switching; electronic overload
protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/
400 V; 0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
Brake control modules xB1 to xB4
Control modules 2DI, 2DI COM
DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A 3RK1301-0BB10-0AA2 High feature direct starters: mechani- 5.1 SP2
protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/
400 V; 2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A 3RK1301-0CB10-0AA2 High feature direct starters: mechani- 5.1 SP2
400 V; 2.4 A up to 16 A
Option:
Table 3-3: (cont.)Configuring motor starters

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-13
STEP7_
version
DSS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A 3RK1301-0AB20-0AA2 High feature direct soft starter: elec- 5.1 SP2
high feature tronic switching; electronic overload
400 V; 0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
DSS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A 3RK1301-0BB20-0AA2 High feature direct soft starter: elec- 5.1 SP2
400 V; 2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
DSS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A 3RK1301-0CB20-0AA2 High feature direct soft starter: elec- 5.1 SP2
400 V; 2.4 A up to 16 A
Option:
Brake control modules xB1 to 4
RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A 3RK1301-0AB10-1AA2 High feature reversing starter: 5.1 SP2

high feature mechanical switching; electronic
overload protection; unfused; up to
1.1 kW/400 V; 0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
RS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A 3RK1301-0BB10-1AA2 High feature reversing starter: 5.1 SP2

3 kW/400 V; 2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A 3RK1301-0CB10-1AA2 High feature reversing starter: 5.1 SP2

7.5 kW/400 V; 2.4 A up to 16 A
Option:

3-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
STEP7_
version
F-DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A 3RK1301-0AB13-0AA2 Safe direct starter: mechanical 5.1 SP4

high feature switching; electronic overload pro-
tection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400 V;
0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
F-DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A 3RK1301-0BB13-0AA2 Safe direct starter: mechanical 5.1 SP4

tection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400 V;
2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
F-DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A 3RK1301-0CB13-0AA2 Safe direct starter: mechanical 5.1 SP4

2.4 A to 16 A
Option:
F-RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A 3RK1301-0AB13-1AA2 Safe reversing starter: mechanical 5.1 SP4

0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
F-RS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A 3RK1301-0BB13-1AA2 Safe reversing starter: mechanical 5.1 SP4

tection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400 V;
2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
F-RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A 3RK1301-0CB13-1AA2 Safe reversing starter: mechanical 5.1 SP4

2.4 A to 16 A
Option:
Control module 2DI, 2DI COM
F-CM 3RK1903-3CA00 Fail-safe contact replicator 5.1 SP4
PM-D F X1 3RK1903-3DA00 Fail-safe power/expansion module 5.1 SP4

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-15
STEP7_
version
DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A 3RK1301-0AB10-0AA3 High feature direct starters: mechani- 5.2

high feature1) cal switching; electronic overload
400 V; 0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A 3RK1301-0BB10-0AA3 High feature direct starter: mechani- 5.2

400 V; 2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A 3RK1301-0CB10-0AA3 High feature direct starter: mechani- 5.2

400 V; 2.4 A up to 16 A
Option:
DSS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A 3RK1301-0AB20-0AA3 High feature direct soft starter: elec- 5.2
high feature1) tronic switching; electronic overload
400 V; 0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
DSS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A 3RK1301-0BB20-0AA3 High feature direct soft starter: elec- 5.2
400 V; 2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
DSS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A 3RK1301-0CB20-0AA3 High feature direct soft starter: elec- 5.2
400 V; 2.4 A up to 16 A
Option:
1)
Communication option using the 2DI COM control module and the Switch ES Motor Starter software
via the device interface on the front of the device

3-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
STEP7_
version
RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A 3RK1301-0AB10-1AA3 High feature reversing starter 5.2

high feature1) mechanical switching; electronic
1.1 kW/400 V; 0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
RS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A 3RK1301-0BB10-1AA3 High feature reversing starter: 5.2

3 kW/400 V; 2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A 3RK1301-0CB10-1AA3 High feature reversing starter: 5.2

7.5 kW/400 V; 2.4 A up to 16 A
Option:
xB1
xB2 Not configurable, so not included in GSD/HW Config.
DM-V15
1
) Communication option using the 2DI COM control module and the Switch ES Motor Starter software
via the device interface on the front of the device

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-17
3.7 Diagnostics
3.7.1 Diagnostics and monitoring through the user program
Diagnostics and monitoring for ET 200S motor starters take place via the user
program and/or the diagnostic channel of the PROFIBUS-DP bus system.
You will find details of diagnostic analysis and demo programs using STEP 5 and
STEP 7 in the SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System manual, Section 6.6.
The S7 blocks FB125 and FC125 are available for diagnostic analysis in the user
program. The S7 blocks and the accompanying descriptions are available as free
downloads from:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/de/387257
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/de/5362473
Power module fault types
Power
Fault type Meaning Remedy
modules
PM-D 01001: Module fault Replace the module

PM-D F2 1
) Fault has occurred
1)
PM-D F3
PM-D F4 1)
1
PM-D F5 )
F-CM 1)
PM-D F1 1) Check whether EMERGENCY STOP

was unlatched with ON circuit
jumpered
PM-D 10001: U1 or U2 not measur- Correct the process wiring. Check

PM-D F1 1) No supply voltage able or too low the voltage supply
PM-D F2 1)
PM-D F3 1)
PM-D F4 1)
PM-D F5 1)
F-CM 1)
PM-D F X1
PM-D F1 1) 11000: Safety relay OFF Press ON button to acknowledge

PM-D F2 1) Actuator shut-
1)
PM-D F3 down
1)
PM-D F4
PM-D F5 1)
PM-D F1 1) 11001: EMERGENCY STOP Rectify the cause of the shutdown

PM-D F2 1) Safety-oriented actuated or cross- e. g. reset EMERGENCY STOP, rec-
shutdown connection has tify cross-connection.
occurred between
the lines of the
EMERGENCY STOP
1)
Fault type is represented correctly only as of release status 5 of the IM 151.
Table 3-4: Power module fault types

3-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Expansion module fault types
Expansion
Fault type Meaning Remedy
modules
Brake control 00100: • Brake overload Rectify overload

• xB3 Fault
• xB4
Table 3-5: Expansion module fault types
Motor starter fault types

The table below is applicable for the standard motor starters, up to 5.5 kW.
Motor starters Fault type Meaning Remedy

Direct starters 01001: • Contactor jammed Replace the module.
• DS Fault or welded Check the contactor
• DS-x 11000: • Circuit breaker Rectify the cause of the shut-
• DS-x1 Actuator shut- tripped down and reset.
down Check the components
Reversing
starters
• RS
• RS-x
• RS-x1
Table 3-6: Fault types for motor starters up to 5.5 kW

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-19
The table below is applicable to high feature/fail-safe motor starters up to

7.5 kW.
Motor starters Fault type Meaning/cause Remedy
Direct starters 00001: • Starter protection Rectify short-circuit.

• DS1e-x, Short-circuit switch tripped
• DSS1e-x (F1)
• F-DS1e-x
00100: • Thermal motor model • Allow the motor to cool down
Overload overload • Check the motor's current con-
Reversing
(F4) sumption
starters
• Check the set current limits
• RS1e-x 00111: • Ie upper current limit
• F-RS1e-x Upper limit vio- violated
lated
(F7)
01000: • Ie lower current limit
Lower limit vio- violated
lated
(F8)
01001: • Internal failure/device Switch supply voltage U1 off and
Fault fault on; replace the motor starter if the
(F9) • Switching element fault persists.
defective
10000: • Invalid parameter Check parameter values.
Parameterization value
error
(F16)
11000: • Asymmetry Check phases L1 to L3.
Actuator shut- • Motor blocked Clear stalled rotor.
down • Residual current Check main phases L1 to L3 for
(F24) detected interruption.
• or in conjunction with
another type of fault
in this table
11001: • EMERGENCY STOP Remove the cause of the emer-
Safety-oriented gency stop
tripping
(F25) 1)
1) Only applies to F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
Table 3-7: Fault types for motor starters up to 7.5 kW

3-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Motor starters Fault type Meaning/cause Remedy

Direct starters 11010: • Input tripping • Eliminate the external fault
• DS1e-x, External fault • Input tripping limit (withdraw from limit position, for
• DSS1e-x (F26) position example)
• F-DS1e-x • Process image error • Start in opposite direction of
(RS1e-x only: simulta- rotation
Reversing neous actuation of • Actuate in only one direction of
starters motor clockwise and rotation.
• RS1e-x motor counterclock-
• F-RS1e-x wise).
00101 • Thermal motor model Check system configuration
Overload is at >178 % load.
switching element Shutdown as device
(F5) protection if "Ther-
mal motor model"
parameter setting
= warning.
• DSS1e-x
startup current over- Increase starting time
shoot I>5xIe Reduce starting voltage.
Table 3-7: (cont.)Fault types for motor starters up to 7.5 kW
Note
The group error bit is deleted when the cause of tripping has been eliminated
and the signal acknowledged with "Trip Reset" (DO 0.3 or by turning the knob on
the starter protection switch from 1 to 0 and back to 1).
Exception - device fault:

This can only be acknowledged by switching the supply voltage off/on (module
replacement is recommended).
Note
(Only for F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x).
An emergency stop always generates an error of the type F24 and F25. An
emergency stop does not have to be acknowledged on the motor starter with a
’Trip Reset’.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-21
3.7.2 Diagnosis by LEDs
The LEDs on the power modules and on the direct and reversing starters dis-
play the status of the relevant modules.
Note
If a power module (PM-D, PM-D F1 to 5, PM-D F X1, F-CM) returns a diagnostic
message of the type "Error" or "Sensor or load voltage missing", the diagnostic
messages of the modules downstream from the power module as far as the
next power module are suppressed.
3.8 LED indicators

3.8.1 Diagnosis of the PM-D power module
SF Group error Red
PWR Power U1 Green
CON Contactor U2 Green
LEDs Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) PWR CON
Off Green Green Normal operation
Red Green Green Group error
Red Off Green No supply voltage U1 for electronic components
Red Green Off No supply voltage U2 for contactors
Red Off Off No supply voltages U1 and U2

1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated
Table 3-8: LED status and error displays on the PM-D power module

3-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
3.8.2 Diagnosis of the PM-D F1 power module
SF Group error Red
PWR Power (electronics supply U1) Green
CON Contactor (contactor supply U2) Green
STAT Status indicator for safety relay Red/green
LEDs Safety EMER- ON Status/Cause/Remedy

relay GENCY button
SF 1) PWR CON STAT STOP
switch
Off Green Green Green On Not Once Normal operation

actuated actuated
Red Green Green Green On 2) 2) Bus fault
Red Green Green Off Off Not Not Safety relay switched off.
actuated actuated Press the ON button to
start.
2)
Red Green Green Red Off actuated Switch-on not possible:
Reset EMERGENCY STOP.
If the status LED goes red
again there is a cross-cir-
cuit in the EMERGENCY
STOP system (rectify the
external fault) or the
power module is defec-
tive. (Replace the device).
2)
Red Green Green Red Off Not EMERGENCY STOP
actuated unlatched and ON circuit
closed
or power module defec-
tive:
replace the device.
2) 2)
Red Off Green Red Off No supply voltage U1 for
electronics.
2) 2) 2) 2)
Red Green Off No supply voltage U2 for
motor starter.
2) 2)
Red Off Off Red Off No supply voltages U1, U2
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is activated
2) Not relevant
Table 3-9: LED status and error displays on the SIGUARD PM-D F1 power module

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-23
SF Group error Red
LEDs Safety Protec- ON Status/Cause/Remedy

relay tive door button
SF 1) PWR CON STAT switch
Off Green Green Green On Closed Once Normal operation

actuated
(jumpe-
red)
Red Green Green Green On 2) 2) Bus fault
Red Green Green Off Off Closed Not actu- Safety relay switched off.
ated Press the ON button to
start.
2)
Red Green Green Red Off Open Switch-on not possible:
close protective doors. If
the status LED goes red
again there is a cross-circuit
in the sensor system (rec-
tify the external fault) or the
power module is defective.
(Replace the device).
2)
Red Green Green Red Off Closed Power module defective:
replace the device.
2) 2)
electronics.
2) 2) 2) 2)
Red Green Off No supply voltage U2 for
motor starter.
2) 2)
2) Not relevant

3-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
SF Group error Red
LEDs Safety relay Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) PWR CON STAT
Off Green Green Green On Normal operation
Red Green Green Green On Bus fault
Red Green Green Off On/off Timeout or safety relay

switched off.
Red Green Green Red Off Power module defective:

replace the device.

electronics.
Red Green Off 2) 2)

No supply voltage U2 for
motor starter.

2) Not relevant

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-25
SF Group error Red
SF 1) PWR CON STAT
Off Green Green Green On Normal operation
Red Green Green Green On Bus fault
Red Green Green Off Off Safety relay switched off.
Red Green Green Red Off Power module defective:

replace the device.

electronics.
2 2
Red Green Off ) ) No supply voltage U2 for
motor starter.

1
) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is activated
2
) Not relevant

3-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
SF Group error Red
SF 1) PWR STAT
Off Green Green On Normal operation
Red Green Green On Bus fault
Red Green Off Off Safety relay switched off.
Red Green Red Off Power module defective:

replace the device.
Red Off Red Off No supply voltage U1 for electron-

ics.
3.8.7 Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module
LED SF Status
Off Normal operation
Red Group error

Table 3-14: Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-27
3.8.8 Diagnosis of the PM-D F X1 fail-safe power/expansion module
SF Group error Red
SGx Status display for SG1 to SG6 Green
SF 1) PWR SGx
Off Green Normal operation
Red Green Bus fault
Red Off No supply voltage U1 for electronic components.
Green Emergency stop not activated

Normal operation
Off Emergency stop on SGx bus

Bus not wired (unused)
Wire break at SGx input
1
) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is activated
PM-D F X1 power/expansion module

3-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
3.8.9 Diagnosis of the fail-safe F-CM contact replicator
SF Group error Red
SF 1) PWR STAT
Off Green Green On Normal operation
Red Green Green On Bus fault
Red Green Off Off Safety relay switched off.
Red Green Red Off Power module defective:

replace the device.
Red Off Red Off No supply voltage U1 for electronic

components.
F-CM contact replicator

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-29
3.8.10 Diagnosis of the standard DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x and RS1-x motor
starters
SF Group error Red
C-STAT Contactor Red/green/

status yellow
LEDs
Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) C-STAT
Operating status
Off Yellow Motor on (clockwise or counterclockwise in the case

of the RS, RS-x, and RS1-x)
Off Off Motor off
Device fault
Red Green Contactor jammed or coil defective (cannot be

switched on)
In the case of a DS1-x and RS1-x, the limit switch

might be actuated in conjunction with xB3 or xB4
Red Red Contactor welded
Red Off Contactor defective
System fault
Red Off Circuit breaker tripped, contactor opened
Red Yellow Circuit breaker tripped, contactor closed
General fault via bus
Red Off/yellow Header module sets group error

Table 3-17: LED status and error displays on the standard motor starters (5.5 kW)

3-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
3.8.11 Diagnosis of the high feature DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters
Fail-safe F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x motor starters
Red Group error SF DEVICE Device sta- Red/

tus green/
yellow
Red/ Contactor C-STAT

green/ status
yellow
Green Safety group SGx (Only with F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x)
LEDs
Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) C-STAT Device
Operating status
Control by bus
Off Yellow Green Motor on

(clockwise or counterclockwise in the case of the
RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x)
Off Off Green Motor off
Manual operation local

Control using the 2DI or
2DI COM control module
Off Flicker- Green Motor on

ing yel- (clockwise or counterclockwise in the case of the
low3) RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x)
Off Flicker- Green Motor off

ing
green3)
Soft starting/coasting down

(only with DSS1e-x)
Off Flashing Green Motor is in soft start

yellow2)
2) Flash frequency: 0.5 Hz
3) Flicker frequency: 8 to 10 Hz
Table 3-18: LED status and error displays for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x,
F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-31
SF 1) C-STAT Device Group error
Category: Device fault
Red Red Red Current flow without switch-on command

(e.g. contactor welded, connection through thyr-
istor)
Safety shutdown due to faults in the fail-safe
area
Red Off Red Electronics defective, self-test fault

(e.g. contactor control defective)
Fault in the fail-safe area
(defective electronic component)
Category: System fault
Red Green Yellow No current flow despite switch-on command

(residual current detected)
(e.g. contactor jammed, coil defective, no 400 V
incoming supply, no load connected)
Red Off Yellow Starter protection switch tripped

Overload, thermal motor model
Overload, switch element
Motor blocked
Asymmetry
Current limit violated
Shutdown on account of input action
(e.g.: limit position shutdown by xB3, xB4 or 2DI,
2DI COM control module)
Process image error
Faulty parameter assignment
Safety shutdown (SGx/U2 is missing)
General warning
Category: System fault
Off Yellow Flashing No power flow despite on command

yellow 2) (residual current detected)
(e.g. contactor stuck, defective coil, 400 V incom-
ing supply missing, no load connected)
Overload of thermal motor model
Asymmetry
Current limit violated
General warning on input action
(e.g. by the 2DI or
2) Flash frequency: 0.5 Hz
3) Flicker frequency: 8 to 10 Hz
Table 3-18: (cont.)LED status and error displays for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x,
F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x

3-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Only for F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
LEDs
Status/Cause/Remedy
SGx
Off Not parameterized and

Emergency stop on mechanically selected bus
Flashing No emergency stop and not configured or

green 1) emergency stop and configured
Green No emergency stop and configured

1
) Flash frequency: 0.5 Hz
Table 3-19: LED status and error displays for F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
Note
If two different SGx LEDs are flashing, the configuration does not correspond to
the mechanically selected SG bus. Check the mechanical selection or the con-
figuration.
Running light on all SGx LEDs:

Fault in the decoder for the SG bus.
Remedy: replace the motor starter

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-33
3.8.12 Diagnosis of xB3, xB4 brake control modules
SF Group error Red
2 Input limit switch, clockwise rota- Green

tion
6 Input limit switch, counterclock- Green

wise rotation
STAT Circuit state of brake Yellow
SF 1) 2 6 STAT
Off Green Green Off Limit switch 4) not activated

Brake is active,
motor braked
Off Green Green Yel- Limit switch 4) not activated

low Brake released
Off Off Green Off Limit switch 4) for clockwise rota-

tion operated, brake active
motor braked
Off Green Off Off Limit switch 4) for counterclock-

wise rotation operated, brake
active
motor braked
Red x 2) x 2) Yel- Brake overload

low motor braked
Red x 2) x 2) 3) Bus fault

1
) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is
activated
2
) Circuit state is irrelevant
3
) Depends on parameterization in motor starter
(response to CPU/master STOP, see Sections 7.2.2, 7.3.4, 7.4.5,
8.2.2, 8.3.4)
4) With normally closed contact function
Table 3-20: LED status and fault displays for xB3, xB4
Note
Brake control modules xB1 and xB2 are not active modules and therefore can-
not issue diagnostic information.

3-34 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
3.9 Process image

3.9.1 Process image of the standard DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x, and RS1-x
motor starters
Input signals
DI 0.0 Readiness for operation DI 0.1 Return message from con-
tactor
0 Contactor jammed or 0 Off
welded (device fault)
1 Ready for operation, no prob- 1 On
lems (clockwise/counterclockwise
rotation in the case of
RS, RS-x, RS1-x)
DI 0.2 Circuit breaker DI 0.3 Not set
0 Switched on (ON)
1 Tripped (OFF)
Output signals for DS, RS

DO 0.0 Signal to contactor DO 0.1 Signal to contactor (RS only)
0 Motor off 0 Counterclockwise rotation off
Clockwise rotation off (in (RS only)
the case of RS)
1 Motor on 1 Counterclockwise rotation on
Clockwise rotation on (in the (RS only)
case of RS)
DO 0.2 Not set DO 0.3 Not set
Output signals in the case of DS-x, DS1-x, RS-x, RS1-x

DO 0.0 Signal to contactor DO 0.1 Signal to contactor
(RS-x, RS1-x only)
0 Motor off 0 Counterclockwise rotation off
Clockwise rotation off (RS-x, RS1-x only)
(in the case of RS-x, RS1-x)
1 Motor on 1 Counterclockwise rotation on
Clockwise rotation on (RS-x, RS1-x only)
(in the case of RS-x, RS1-x)
DO 0.2 Drive for DO 0.3 Not set
expansion module
(e.g. brake control)
0 No drive
(e.g. brake control
- brake active
- motor braked)
1 Drive
(e.g. brake control
- brake released
- motor unbraked)

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-35
3.9.2 Process image of the high feature DS1e-x, RS1e-x, and DSS1e-x motor
starters
Fail-safe F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x motor starters
Input signals
DI 0.0 Ready (automatic) DI 1.0 Motor current Iact 5)
0 Starter cannot be operated by Bit 0
host/PLC
1 Starter can be operated by
host
DI 0.1 Motor on 1) DI 1.1 Motor current Iact5)
0 Off Bit 1
1 On (clockwise/counterclock-
wise rotation)
DI 0.2 Group error DI 1.2 Motor current Iact 5)
(If one or more faults Bit 2
described in Table 3-7 occur,
"Group error" is reported irre-
spective of whether the
"Group diagnosis" parameter
(see Sections 7.3.4, 7.4.5,
8.3.4) is set to "Disable" or
"Enable").
0 No faults
1 Fault
DI 0.3 General warning DI 1.3 Motor current Iact 5)
0 No warning Bit 3
1 Warning
DI 0.4 Input 1 2) DI 1.4 Motor current Iact 5)
0 4) Bit 4
1
DI 0.5 Input 2 2) DI 1.5 Motor current Iact 5)
0 4 Bit 5
)
1
DI 0.6 Input 3 3) DI 1.6 Manual operation local
0 4) 0 No manual operation local
1 1 Manual operation local
DI 0.7 Input 4 3) DI 1.7 Ramp operation
(for soft starter)
0 4) 0 Not active
1 1 Active
1
) Signal is 1 if the motor current is >18.75% of the set rated current
2
) From the expansion module, e.g. brake control xB3,4 (optional)
3
) From the 2DI/-2DI COM control module (optional)
4
) See the following section on input behavior
5
) See Section 7.5.2
See Section 7.5 for description of parameters

3-36 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Input behavior
Inputs 1 to 4 of the fail-safe F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x motor starters behave in
accordance with the motor starter profile of the PNO (PROFIBUS User Organi-
sation).
Inputs 1 to 4 of the high feature DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, and RS1e-x motor starters
with order numbers ending in ...AA2 to version E03 behave differently to those
with order numbers ending in ...AA2 as of version E04 and order numbers end-
ing in ...AA3 when you parameterize the normally closed contact function in the
process input image (PII).
There is no variation in behavior for the parameterization of the inputs for the
normally open contact function.
The table below presents an overview of the differences:
Input parameterized for Order numbers ending in ...AA2

Order numbers ending in ...AA2 and as of version E04
and up to version E03 or order numbers ending in
...AA3
NO Not active Active
LED
1
PII 0
NC Not active Active Not active Active
LED
1 1
PII 0 0
Table 3-21: Input behavior
Important
If you replace a motor starter with a version up to E03 and an order number
ending in ...AA2 with a motor starter with version E04 or above and an order
number ending in ...AA2 or ...AA3, make sure you note the differences in input
behavior in the user program of the PLC when you parameterize the normally
closed contact function.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-37
Output signals
DO 0.0 Motor cw DO 1.0 Not used

0 Motor off
1 Motor on
DO 0.1 Motor ccw DO 1.1 Not used
(for RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x)
0 Motor off
1 Motor on
DO 0.2 Drive for DO 1.2 Not used
expansion module
(e.g. brake control)
0 No drive
(e.g. brake control
- brake active
- motor braked)
1 Drive
(e.g. brake control
- brake released
- motor unbraked)
DO 0.3 Trip Reset (edge 0 > 1) DO 1.3 Not used
0 Trip Reset inactive
1 Trip Reset active
DO 0.4 Emergency start DO 1.4 Not used
0 Not active
1 Active
DO 0.5 Self-test (edge 0 > 1) DO 1.5 Not used
(F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x only)
0 Not active
1 Active
DO 0.6 Not supported DO 1.6 Not used
DO 0.7 Not used DO 1.7 Not used

3-38 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
3.9.3 Process image of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules
Input signals
DI 0.0 Input 1 DI 0.1 Input 2
0 No current flow 0 No current flow
1 Current flow present 1 Current flow present
Output signals
DO 0.0 Reserved DO 0.1 Reserved
0 - 0 -
1 - 1 -

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 3-39
3.10 Switch ES Motor Starter

Features
The diagnostics and commissioning tool Switch ES Motor Starter (version 2.0
and above) offers:
• Structured and tool-supported configuration of low-voltage switching devices
• Quick diagnosis
Local commissioning and monitoring on site such as:

• Parameter assignment during operation of the programmable controller and
control system
• Observation
• Diagnostics and testing
• Factory setting
• Read out current as direct value
• Residual current detection
• A parameterization block can be set
• Integrated online help
Application
The diagnostic and commissioning tool Switch ES Motor Starter is suitable for
the following motor starters:
• High feature motor starters with order numbers ending in ...AA3
• Fail-safe motor starters
The connection between the PC or programming device and the motor starter is
set up using a LOGO! PC cable and 2DI COM control module (see Section 3.5
for a description) that is installed on the corresponding motor starter.
You can find additional information on the software in the online help.
Order numbers
You will require the following order numbers:
• LOGO! PC cable: 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0
• Diagnostics and commissioning tool Switch ES Motor Starter:
3ZS1 310-0CC20-0YA0
• 2DI COM control module: 3RK1 903-0CH10

3-40 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
General technical specifications 4
4.1 Shipping and storage conditions 4-1
4.2 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions 4-2
4.1 Shipping and storage conditions

Shipping and storage conditions
The shipping and storage conditions for motor starters meet the requirements
of IEC 61131, part 2. The following information is for modules shipped and
stored in their original packaging.
Type of condition Permissible range
Free fall 0.35 m
Temperature from -40 °C to +70 °C
Temperature variation 20 K/h
Air pressure from 1080 to 660 hPa

(corresponds to an altitude of -1000 to 3500 m)
Relative humidity from 5 to 95 %, without condensation
Insulation resistance
Circuits with rated voltage

Test voltage
Ue against other circuits or
in accordance with IEC 61131, part 2
ground
0 V < Ue < 50 V 500 VDC
300 V < Ue < 600 V 2.6 kVDC to ground

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 4-1
General technical specifications
4.2 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions

Installation position
The preferred installation position is horizontal on a vertical wall. Note also the
information in Section 2.4 on derating.
Mechanical environmental conditions
Oscillations tested in accordance with IEC 60068, part 2-6 (sine)
• Oscillation type: frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave a

minute
- 10 Hz < f < 58 Hz constant amplitude: 0.15 mm
- 58 Hz < f < 150 Hz constant acceleration: 2 g
• Oscillation time: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the 3 axes

arranged vertically in relation to each other
Shock tested in accordance with IEC 60068, part 2-27 (right angle)
• Type of shock: half sine

• Intensity of shock: 5 g peak value, 11 ms duration
• Direction of shock: 3 shocks in the +/– directions in each of the 3 axes
arranged vertically in relation to each other
Climatic environmental conditions
Temperature
Temperature variation See installation rules in Section 2.2 ff.

Permissible rated current
Relative humidity from 5 to 95 %
Air pressure from 1080 to 795 hPa corresponds to an alti-

tude of -1000 to
2000 m
Contaminant concentration SO2 : < 0.5 ppm test:

rel. humidity < 60 %, 10 ppm; 4 days
no condensation
H2S: < 0.1 ppm 1 ppm; 4 days

rel. humidity < 60 %,
no condensation

4-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Terminal modules 5
5.1 Assignment of the terminal modules 5-2
5.2 TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-D power module 5-4
5.3 Terminal modules for motor starters 5-6
5.4 Power bus 5-14

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 5-1
Terminal modules
5.1 Assignment of the terminal modules

The following tables show which power modules, motor starters, expansion
modules, and fail-safe modules you can use with the various terminal modules.
You can find information on the terminal modules in the following chapters:
• Chapter 9 for the safety integrated SIGUARD system
• Chapter 10 for expansion modules such as the brake control module
• Chapter 11 for fail-safe modules
Power modules Terminal modules
TM-P15 TM-PF30 S47 TM-X15

S27-01 S27-01
... -B0 ... -B1 ... -C0 ... -C1 ... -D0
3RK1903 -0AA00 -1AA10 -1AA00 -1AC10 -1AC00 -1AD10 -1AB00
PM-D X
SIGUARD PM-D F1 X X
SIGUARD PM-D F2 X X
SIGUARD PM-D F3 X X
SIGUARD PM-D F4 X X
SIGUARD PM-D F5 X
SIGUARD PM-X X
Table 5-1: Assignment of the terminal modules for power modules

5-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Terminal modules
Motor starters Terminal modules
TM-DS45 TM-RS90 TM-DS65 TM-RS130

-S32 -S32 -S32 -S32
TM-DS45 TM-RS90 TM-DS65 TM-RS130

-S31 -S31 -S31 -S31
3RK1903 -0AB00 -0AC00 -0AK00 -0AL00

-0AB10 -0AC10 -0AK10 -0AL10
Standard DS, DS-x, and DS1-x

X
direct starters
High feature DS1e-x

X
direct starter
High feature DSS1e-x

X
direct soft starter
Standard RS, RS-x, RS1-x

X
reversing starters
High feature RS1e-x

X
reversing starter
Table 5-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for motor starters
Fail-safe modules Terminal modules
TM-FDS65 TM-FRS130 TM-PFX30 TM-FCM30

-S32 -S32 S47-G1 -S47
TM-FDS65 TM-FRS130 TM-PFX30

-S31 -S31 S47-G0
3RK1903 -3AC00 -3AD00 -3AE00 -3AB10

-3AC10 -3AD10 -3AE10
Fail-safe F-DS1e-x
X
direct starter
Fail-safe F-RS1e-x
X
reversing starter
PM-D F X1
X
power/expansion module
F-CM
X
contact replicator
PM-D F PROFIsafe power module

see the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules manual
Table 5-3: Assignment of the terminal modules for fail-safe modules

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 5-3
Terminal modules
5.2 TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-D power

module
Features
• The terminal module consists of a Terminal block
support and a terminal block.
• TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-
D power module
• Connection by screw-type terminal
• Prewiring of the terminal module
• AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
Support
Color coding labels

1. You can apply the color coding labels in the
opening provided next to the terminal directly from the strip.
2. Push the color coding labels onto the terminal module with your finger.
Looping the potentials through

Terminals 1/8, 2/9, 4/11, 5/12, 6/13 and 7/14 are bridged in the terminal module
and can be used to loop the potentials through.
Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the
TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module:
View Termi- Meaning

nal
1/8 L+ U1: Power supply for electronic compo-

nents
1 8 2/9 M URATED = 24 VDC
2 9 4/11 A1+ U2: Power supply for contactor

URATED = 24 VDC
5/12 A2-
6/13 AUX2 for SIGUARD (see Section 9.6.6)

1
4 1
7/14 AUX3 for SIGUARD (see Section 9.6.6)
1
5 2
- AUX1 Fed through without terminals
1
6 3
1
7 4
Table 5-4: Terminal assignment of the TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for the PM-D power module

5-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Terminal modules
Technical specifications - TM-P15 S27-01
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 15 x 196.5 x 102
Depth with power module (mm) 117.5
Insulation voltages and rated currents
Insulation voltage 500 V
Rated operating voltage 24 VDC
Rated operating current 10 A

1 x 2.5
(mm 2)
AWG cables,
Wiring

Table 5-5: Technical specifications - TM-P15 S27-01

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 5-5
Terminal modules
5.3 Terminal modules for motor starters

5.3.1 TM-DS45 terminal modules for standard DS, DS-x and DS1-x direct
starters
Features
• TM-DS45... terminal modules for standard DS, DS-x and DS1-x direct starters
– with TM-DS45-S32 power bus infeed
– with TM-DS45-S31 power bus throughfeed
• Connection by screw-type terminals
• Prewiring possible
• Expansion possible with PE/N terminal block
TM-DS45 terminal modules
To load
max. 5.5 kW / 12 A 32
-S
Infeed
max. 40 A 31
-S
Supply voltage
L2 U1 for electr. components
AUX1
L3 Supply voltage
U2 for contactors
L1 Coding
N
Terminal block for power bus
Terminal blocks
PE
PE/N
Warning
(push the caps on firmly) before the power bus is commissioned (L1, L2, L3,
N, PE). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of
an electric shock (400 VAC).
Figure 5-1: TM-DS45 terminal modules for standard DS, DS-x and DS1-x direct starters
Important
Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for
motor starters.

5-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Terminal modules
5.3.2 TM-DS65 terminal modules for the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and
the high feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter
Features
• TM-DS65... terminal modules for the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and
the high feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter
– with TM-DS65-S32 power bus infeed
– with TM-DS65-S31 power bus throughfeed
• Fail-safe-kit functionality is integrated
TM-DS65 terminal modules
Supply voltage
U1 for electr. components
To load 32
-S
max. 7.5 kW / 16 A
Infeed
31
max. 50 A -S
AUX1
RF1, 2
L2
Supply voltage
U2 for contactors
AUX2, 3
L3
Coding
L1
N Terminal block for power bus

Terminal blocks
PE/N PE
Warning
Figure 5-2: TM-DS65 terminal modules for DS1e-x high feature direct starter and DSS1e-x soft starter
Important
motor starters.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 5-7
Terminal modules
5.3.3 TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters
Features
• TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters
– with TM-FDS65 S32 power bus infeed
– with TM-FDS65 S31 power bus throughfeed
• Coding connector for SG1 to SG6
• The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
TM-FDS65 terminal modules

Coding connector for SG1 to SG6
Supply voltage
U1 for electronic components
To load 32
-S
max. 7.5 kW / 16 A
Infeed
31
max. 50 A -S
AUX1
SG1/2
L2
SG3/4
SG5/6
L3
Coding
L1
N Terminal block for power bus

Terminal blocks
PE/N PE
Warning
Figure 5-3: TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters
Important
motor starters.

5-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Terminal modules
5.3.4 Technical specifications, TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65
Dimensions and weight TM-DS45 TM-DS65/TM-FDS65
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 45 x 264 x 100 65 x 290 x 100
Height with PE/N terminal block (mm) 306 332
Depth with motor starter (mm) 127 150
Depth with motor starter and fail-safe kit

(safety integrated SIGUARD system) 152 -
(mm)
Depth with motor starter and control

module 2DI (mm) - 173
Weight (g) approx. 305 approx. 400
Rated voltages, currents and frequencies for the power bus
Rated insulation voltage Ui 690 V
Rated operating voltage Ue 500 VAC
Rated impulse strength Uimp

6 kV
Rated operating current Ie 40 A 50 A
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
Single-core (mm2) 2 x (1 to 2.5) or

2 x (2.5 to 6)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule 1 x 10 or

(mm2) 2 x (1 to 2.5 ) or
2 x (2.5 to 6)
in acc. with IEC 60947
AWG cables, single- or multi-core 2 x (14 to 10)
With 3-phase feed-in terminal, if neces-

sary
Single-core or multi-core (mm2) 1 x 2.5 to 25
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule
(mm2) 1 x 2.5 to 25
AWG cables, single- or multi-core 1 x 12 to 4
Wiring

and Pozidriv 2

Table 5-6: Technical specifications - TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 5-9
Terminal modules
5.3.5 TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters
Features
• TM-RS90... terminal modules for RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters
– with TM-RS90-S32 power bus infeed
– with TM-RS90-S31 power bus throughfeed
• Expansion possible with two PE/N terminal blocks
TM-RS90 terminal modules

To load
max. 5.5 kW / 12 A
32
-S
3 1
-S
Infeed
max. 40 A Supply voltage
L2
U1 for electr. modules
Terminal blocks AUX1

L3
PE/N Supply voltage
U2 for contactors
L1
Coding
N
Terminal block for
PE power bus
Warning
Figure 5-4: TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters
Important
motor starters.

5-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Terminal modules
5.3.6 TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x high feature reversing starter
Features
• TM-RS130... terminal modules for RS1e-x high feature reversing starter
– with TM-RS130-S32 power bus infeed
– with TM-RS130-S31 power bus throughfeed
• Fail-safe-kit functionality is integrated
TM-RS130 terminal modules

To load
max. 7.5 kW / 16 A
3 2 Supply voltage
-S U1 for electronic modules
31
-S
AUX1
Infeed L2 RF1, 2
max. 50 A
Supply voltage
U2 for contactors
L3
AUX2, 3
L1
Coding
Terminal blocks N Terminal block for

PE/N power bus
PE
Warning
Figure 5-5: TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x high feature reversing starter
Important
motor starters.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 5-11
Terminal modules
5.3.7 TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters
Features
• TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters
– with TM-FRS130 S32 power bus infeed
– with TM-FRS130-S31 power bus throughfeed
• Coding connector for SG1 to SG6
TM-FRS130 terminal modules

Coding connector for SG1 to SG6
To load
max. 7.5 kW / 16 A
32 Supply voltage
-S U1 for electronic modules
31
-S
AUX1
Infeed
L2 SG1/2
max. 50 A
SG3/4
SG5/6
L3
L1
Coding
Terminal blocks N Terminal block for

PE/N power bus
PE
Warning
Figure 5-6: TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters
Important
motor starters.

5-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Terminal modules
5.3.8 Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130
Dimensions and weight TM-RS90 TM-RS130/TM-FRS130
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 90 x 264 x 100 130 x 290 x 100
Height with PE/N (mm) 306 332
Depth with motor starter (mm) 127 150
Depth with motor starter and fail-safe kit

(safety integrated SIGUARD system) 152 -
(mm)
Depth with motor starter and control

module 2DI (mm) - 173
Weight (g) approx. 600 approx. 800
Rated voltages, currents and frequencies for the power bus
Rated insulation voltage Ui 690 V
Rated operating voltage Ue 500 VAC
Rated impulse strength Uimp

6 kV
Rated operating current Ie 40 A 50 A
Single-core (mm2) 2 x (1 to 2.5) or

2 x (2.5 to 6)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule 1 x 10 or

(mm2) 2 x (1 to 2.5 ) or
2 x (2.5 to 6)
in acc. with IEC 60947
AWG cables, 2 x (14 to 10)

single- or multi-core
With 3-phase feed-in terminal, if neces-

sary
Single-core or multi-core (mm2) 1 x 2.5 to 25
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule
(mm2) 1 x 2.5 to 25
AWG cables, single- or multi-core 1 x 12 to 4
Wiring

and Pozidriv 2

Table 5-7: Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 5-13
Terminal modules
5.4 Power bus

Features
• The power bus consists of components that have fixed links to the terminal
modules for the motor starters.
• The power bus distributes the power in a load group.
• The maximum current-carrying capacity at 60 °C is:
– 40 A for standard motor starters in terminal modules with an installation width of
45 mm or 90 mm
– 50 A for high feature/fail-safe motor starters in terminal modules with an
installation width of 65 mm or 130 mm
• The wiring is done automatically when the terminal module is installed.
• Terminal blocks with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm and 65 or 130 mm
– with power bus infeed (for a load group) and motor connection
– with power bus throughfeed and motor connection
• Power bus: 3 pins (L1, L2, L3), expandable to 5 pins with PE/N terminal block.
View
Terminal module
Opening for padlock

to prevent installation of
Motor starters
Motor connection
PE/N terminal block (not in
Power bus delivery package)
Infeed
Figure 5-7: TM-DS45 terminal block - example for DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters
Warning

5-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Terminal modules
PE/N terminal block accessories

A PE/N terminal block can be added to the power bus. Terminal blocks with
installation widths of 45 and 65 mm are available as follows:
• with infeed at the beginning of a new load group (i.e. contacts on the right
only). This terminal block is supplied with caps for N and PE
• with throughfeed (i.e. with contacts on the right and left)
PE PE
N N
PE N PE
N Installation width 45 mm
for standard motor starters
PE PE
PE PE
N N
PE PE
N
N
Installation width 65 mm
for high feature motor starters
PE PE
with infeed with throughfeed

Figure 5-8: PE/N terminal block
Warning
Important
motor starters.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 5-15
Terminal modules
Load group
All the motor starters supplied via a single power bus infeed are referred to as
a load group. A load group does not have to be identical to a potential group.
Within a group of motor starters supplied by the same power module, an addi-
tional power bus infeed may be required to ensure that the rated operating cur-
rent (aggregate current) of the terminal modules is not exceeded.
The aggregate current of the power bus is:
• 40 A for terminal modules with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm
(for standard motor starters)
• 50 A for terminal modules with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm
(for high feature/fail-safe motor starters)
Current flow via the power bus

The following diagram illustrates the current flow via the power bus:
To load
max. 12 A 1)
or 16 A 2)
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
L2 L2 L2
L1 L2 L3
L3 L3 L3
L1 L1 L1
Infeed
1)
max. 40 A 1) For installation width 45/90 mm Standard motor starter
2)
or 50 A 2) For installation width 65/130 mm High feature/fail-safe motor starter
Figure 5-9: Current flow in the power bus

5-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
PM-D power module 6
6.1 PM-D power module for motor starter 6-2
6.1.1 Parameters 6-3
6.1.2 Technical specifications - PM-D 6-4

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 6-1
PM-D power module
6.1 PM-D power module for motor starter

Features
• A new potential group begins with the power module - together with the
associated terminal module. The motor starters of a potential group are con-
nected to the right of the power module.
• The power module conducts the voltages for supplying the electronic compo-
nents to the voltage buses of the terminal modules. It does this for all the
motor starters in a potential group.
• The PM-D monitors the voltages U1 (PWR) voltage supply for electronics and
U2 (CON) voltage supply for contactor. Voltage failures are displayed and
reported.
Caution
Power modules can be neither inserted nor removed during operation.
View
LEDs:
SF Group error
PWR (power) (U1)

CON (contactor) (U2)
Figure 6-1: Power module PM-D

6-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
PM-D power module
6.1.1 Parameters
The following table indicates the parameter that can be set for the
PM-D power module.
Parameters Action, Factory setting Applicability

value range
Group diagnosis • Disable Disable Module

• Enable
Tabelle 6-1: Parameters for the PM-D power module
Group diagnosis:
This parameter enables diagnostic messages
(error types are listed in Section 3.7).
Note
The "disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the LEDs for faults.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 6-3
PM-D power module
6.1.2 Technical specifications - PM-D
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm)

(incl. terminal module) 15 x 196.5 x 117.5
Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated control supply voltage Us 20.4 to 28.8 VDC up to 60 °C
Rated operating current Ie 10 A
Recommended upstream
short-circuit protection:
• Fuse gL/gG 10 A
• Circuit breaker 10 A, trip characteristic B
Insulation between U1 and U2 tested 500 V

with
Supply of:
• Motor starters yes
• Motor starters for no
safety integrated SIGUARD system
• Electronic modules no
• Ex[i] modules no
Power draw from the backplane bus ≤10 mA
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions: yes

• Group error/device fault red SF LED
• Monitoring of supply voltage for elec-
tronic components U1 (PWR) green PWR LED
• Monitoring of supply voltage for con-
tactors U2 (CON) green CON LED
• Diagnostic information readable yes
Tabelle 6-2: Technical specifications - PM-D

6-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Direct starters and soft starters 7
7.1 Overview 7-2
7.2 Standard direct starters DS, DS-x, DS1-x 7-4
7.2.1 Features 7-4
7.2.3 Technical specifications 7-8
7.3 High feature DS1e-x direct starter 7-11

Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
7.3.1 Features 7-11
7.3.2 Additional features of the F-DS1e-x 7-14
7.3.3 Module replacement 7-19
7.4 High feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x 7-26
7.4.1 Physical principles 7-26
7.4.2 Application and use 7-31
7.4.3 Features 7-32
7.4.4 Notes on configuration 7-39
7.5 Description of the fixed values and parameters 7-46
7.5.1 Permanently set values 7-46
7.5.2 Actual motor current 7-48
7.5.3 User-definable parameters 7-49
7.5.4 Emergency start 7-56
7.5.5 Trip Reset 7-56
7.6 Factory setting 7-57

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-1
Direct starters and soft starters
7.1 Overview
Three versions of the ET 200S motor starters are available:
• Standard series (code: DS1-x)
• High feature series, characterized by properties that boost system availability
and improve diagnosis
(code for direct starters: DS1e-x, for direct soft starters: DSS1e-x).
A distinction is made between the following:
– If there is no communication interface at the front, the order number ends in:
...AA2
– If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: ...AA3
and the 2DI COM control module is used for the Switch ES Motor Starter software
(version 2.0 and above)
• Fail-safe series that ensures safe shutdown of the motor starter after an
emergency stop instruction by means of the mechanically selected SG bus
(code: F-DS1e-x).
This series has a communication port at the front for the 2DI COM control
module using the Switch ES Motor Starter software (version 2.0 and above).
All motor starters have full protection against short-circuit and overload.
The high feature/fail-safe motor starter has integrated electronic overload pro-
tection, which means that only two device versions are needed to cover the cur-
rent range up to 16 A. They also have more extensive diagnosis and additional
parameters for system control and monitoring.
The high feature motor starter series with installation widths of 45 mm and
90 mm and 65 mm and 130 mm can only be used in conjunction with the
ET 200S SIGUARD components for safety applications up to category 4.
The fail-safe motor starter series (F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x) is suitable for use in
safety applications in conjunction with fail-safe power modules (PM-D
PROFIsafe and PM-D F X1) up to SIL3/category 4.
Warning
If the circuit breaker or starter protection switch is switched on again after being
tripped by an overload or a short circuit, and there is a pending ON signal for the
contactor, the motor starts up.

7-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
The table below presents an overview of the properties of the direct and soft
starters.
DS1-x DS1e-x DSS1e-x

Feature
F-DS1e-x
Installation width [mm] 45 65
for power rating up to [kW] 5.5 7.5
Integrated switching devices for SIRIUS components of the S00 S0
size
Short-circuit protection with 3RV circuit breaker with instan-
X
taneous overcurrent release
Short-circuit protection with 3RV starter protection switch
X
with instantaneous overcurrent release
Overload protection with thermal overload release inte-
X
grated into circuit breaker
Programmable electronic overload protection X
Switching function mechanical electronic
Rated operating current 0.14 - 12 A 0.3 - 16 A
Rated operating voltage 500 V 480 V
Parameterizable no yes
Tripping class CLASS 10 10, 20 10A, 10
Asymmetry recognition yes
Residual current detection no yes
Parameterizable current limits no yes
Anti-blocking function with rapid shutdown no yes
Type of coordination (2 at 400 V) 2 (up to 2 1
1.6 A)
Use with SIGUARD up to safety category 4 1) 1
2
Use up to SIL (IEC 61 508) 3 )
Tripping class (DIN V 19 250) 5, 6 2)
Up to category (EN 954-1) 4
Extra safety auxiliary switch with fail- integral
safe kit 1
Compatible expansion modules (brake control modules) xB1 to 4 xB1, 3
Free inputs through control module 2DI no yes
Can the 2DI COM control module be used? no Yes 3)
Can Switch ES Motor Starter software be used? no Yes 3)
2)
Derating necessary at top end of performance range? yes Yes no
Diagnosis, fault types see Section 3.7
1) Does not apply to F-DS1e-x
2) Only applies to F-DS1e-x
3) As of order numbers ending in ...AA3 and with F-DS1e-x
Table 7-1: Overview of direct starters and soft starters

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-3
7.2 Standard direct starters DS, DS-x, DS1-x

7.2.1 Features
ET 200S standard direct starters DS ...

• Are motor starters for a single direction of rotation that can be can be used in
the ET 200S distributed I/O device.
• Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 5.5 kW at
400 and 500 VAC
• Are available with setting ranges of 0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A
• Are equipped with electromechanical SIRIUS switchgear.
• The contactor coils are controlled directly via integrated outputs.
• The switching states of circuit breaker and contactor are indicated via inte-
grated inputs.
• Available diagnostic information of the direct starter:
– overload or short-circuit tripping/disconnection of the motor starter
– fault at the motor starter
• The circuit state and status are displayed via LEDs.
• Integrated disconnection functions via circuit breaker
• Upgradable with fail-safe kit 1 for safety system applications
Important
A suppressor circuit for the contactor coils is already integrated in the motor
starter. Additional suppressor circuits connected to the contactor are not per-
missible.

7-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
ET 200S standard direct starters DS-x ... (see Figure 7-2)

• Have the same features as the DS standard direct starters
• Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) for driving an additional module (e.g.
brake control module xB1 to xB4)
In the case of the xB3 and xB4 only the brake function is supported; the
inputs have no effect.
ET 200S standard direct starters DS1-x ... (see Figure 7-2)

• Have the same features as the DS-x standard direct starters
• The inputs of brake control module xB3 or xB4 (e.g. limit-position switches)
act directly on the contactor and brake drive circuit (see Section 10.3.3 for sig-
nal response).
Notes
Input 1 (limit switch, clockwise rotation) acts directly on the contactor of the
DS1-x and on the drive circuit of the brake control module.
Input 2 (limit switch, counterclockwise rotation) acts only on the drive circuit of
the brake control module.
The series DS and DS-x standard direct starters have been discontinued.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-5
View
Scale for set current

Toggle switch
Opening for test Circuit breaker
overload tripping
SF Group error
C-STAT contactor status LEDs
Channel for
connecting lead to
auxiliary switch block Relevant to
safety integrated
Caution SIGUARD system
Aperture only for
single pin aux. switch block
Important
Additional suppres-
sor circuits are not
permissible.
For control unit only
(see Section 3.3)
Figure 7-1: Standard DS, DS-x and DS1-x direct starters
Sketched circuit diagram

Power unit Switching logic
DS-x DS1-x
1L1 Input 1
3L2
5L3
DO0 DO0
(e.g. xB3 and xB4 brake control
Logic Logic
limit switch, cw rotation)
K1 K1
DI2 Input 2
Fault
(e. g. xB3 and xB4 brake control
DI0
DO0
limit switch, ccw rotation)
DO2 DO2
Logic Logic
Output
DI1 (e.g. brake contr. mod. xB1 to
xB4 drive for brake)
2T1
6T3
4T2
Figure 7-2: Sketched circuit diagram - DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters

7-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
7.2.2 Parameters
The following table indicates the parameters that can be set for the direct
starter.
Action,
Parameters Factory setting Applicability
value range

• Enable
Behavior at CPU/ • Disconnect Disconnect Module

Master STOP • Keep circuit
state
Table 7-2: Parameters for the DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters
Group diagnosis:
Note

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-7
7.2.3 Technical specifications

• Reversing starter incl. terminal module 45 x 264 x 120
• Height with PE/N block 306
• Depth with fail-safe kit (safety integrated 144.5
SIGUARD system)
Weight
• Reversing starter incl. terminal module 1.0 kg
• Direct starter incl. PE/N terminal block 1.1 kg
Assignment type Type 1 to Ie < 12 A, IEC 60947-4-1,
DIN VDE 0660, Part 102
Type 2 to Ie < 1.6 A
Pollution severity
• At 400 V 3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131)
• At 500 V 2, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131)
Safety class I, IEC 60536 (VDE 0106, Part 1)
Shock protection protected against touching by fingers
Heat loss Pv 1) at Ie < 1.25 A approx. 9 W
1.6 to 6.3 A approx. 10 W
8 to 12 A approx. 11 W
Control circuit
Rated operating voltage for electronic compo- 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC)
nents: U1
Reverse polarity protection yes
Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC)
Power input
• From electronic component supply: U1 approx. 20 mA
• From contactor supply: U2 approx. 100 mA
• From the backplane bus ≤10 mA
Main circuit
Rated operating voltage Ue
• In accordance with DIN VDE 0106, Part 1014
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 500 VAC
• Protective separation between main and
auxiliary circuits 400 V
UL, CSA 600 VAC
Rated insulation voltage Ui 500 VAC
Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV
1
) for motor starter and terminal module depending on the rated operating current I e
(upper setting range).
Table 7-3: Technical specifications - DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters

7-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Technical specifications - circuit breaker, contactor
Circuit breaker
Tripping class Class 10
max. rated operating current 12 A
Adjustment ranges
• Thermal overload release 0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A
• Instantaneous overcurrent release fixed setting at 12 x Ie
Minimum tripping current in the event of 0.85 x I e
phase failure (= 100 % current asymme-
try)
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to
Ie = 12 A 50 kA at 400 V
Mechanical life > 100,000 operating cycles
Electrical life 100,000
Contactor
Rated operating current Ie at 60 °C
• AC-1 12 A
• AC-2, AC-3
- At 400 V 12 A
- At 500 V 9A
• AC-4 at 400 V 4.1 A
Max. permissible output of the three-
phase induction motors at 500 VAC 5.5 kW
Positively driven operation - auxiliary con- yes
tacts, contactor
Mechanical life
• Contactor 30 million operating cycles
• Contactor with safety functionality 10 million operating cycles
Electrical life see graphic
Surge suppression Zener diodes integrated
Operating times in the case of DC opera-

tion
(total break time =
contact parting delay + arcing time)
• At 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
- Closing time 25 to 100 ms
- Contact parting time 20 to 50 ms
• Arcing time 10 to 15 ms
• At 1.0 x Us
- Closing time typ. 25 ms
- Contact parting time typ. 20 ms
Table 7-4: Technical specifications DS... - circuit breaker, contactor, auxiliary switch block

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-9
Electrical service life
107
8
6
4
2
Operating cycles at 400 V
106
8
6
4
2
105
8
6
4
2
104 Ia = Breaking current

8
6
4
Ie = Rated
2
operating current
103 PN = Rated power
2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 !a(A) 400
9 12 !e(A) of three-phase motors
4 5,5 PN (kW) At 400 V

7-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
7.3 High feature DS1e-x direct starter

Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
7.3.1 Features
ET 200S high feature DS1e-x direct starter

ET 200S fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
400 and 500 VAC
• Are available in 3 setting ranges with 0.3 - 3 A, 2.4 - 8 A, 2.4 - 16 A
• Are equipped with electromechanical SIRIUS switchgear (starter protection
switch, contactor)
• Have parameterizable electronic overload protection
• Upper and lower current limits can be defined and monitored for system and
process supervision
• The motor starter can be parameterized for warning or shutdown as the
response to an overload event or if a current limit is violated
• The integral protective mechanism recognizes a blocked motor and triggers a
rapid shutdown
• Integrated residual current detection
• Integrated asymmetry detection
• The as-is current is measured and the information transmitted to analyzers
• The switching status of the starter protection switch is registered by means
of an auxiliary switch
• Detection of the circuit state of the contactor on the basis of current flow
evaluation
Detection of the circuit state in the case of the F-DS1e-x using an auxiliary
switch block as well
• Available diagnostic information on the direct starter (see Table 3-7)
• Circuit state and motor-starter status are indicated by LEDs
• Integrated disconnection function by means of starter protection switch
• In DS1e-x:
Auxiliary switch block for the ET 200S SIGUARD (F kit) already integrated
In the case of the F-DS1e-x:
Fail-safe selective shutdown integrated
• The motor starters can be expanded using front-mounted standard SIRIUS
accessories (e.g. auxiliary switch block, time relay) for contactor size S0
• Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) at the side for driving an expansion
module (e.g. brake control module xB1 to 4)

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-11
• The 2 parameterizable inputs (DI 0.4 and DI 0.5, e.g. limit-position switches)
of the expansion interface (expansion module, e.g. brake control module xB3
and xB4) act directly on contactor and brake drive
• The 2DI/-2DI COM control modules, which are connected to the front, pro-
vide another 2 parameterizable inputs (DI 0.6 and DI 0.7)
• Factory setting possible using the rotary switch of the starter protection
switch (see Section 7.6)
• Communication interface at the front for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x with order
numbers ending in: ...AA3 and in the case of the F-DS1e-x, via the 2DI COM
control module for the Switch ES Motor Starter software (version 2.0 and
above)
View of the high feature DS1e-x direct starter
Rotary switch Starter protection switch
SF group error
DEVICE device status LEDs
C-STAT contactor status
Slot for
2DI and 2DI COM control modules
with transparent cover
sealable
Aperture for SIRIUS
standard accessories
Latch indicator
Figure 7-3: High feature DS1e-x direct starter

7-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Sketched circuit diagram of the high feature DS1e-x direct starter
1L1
3L2
5L3
DI0.0 Ready from host/PLC
DI 0.1 Motor ON/current flow
DI0.2 Group error
DI0.3 General warning
Input 1 expansion module
DI0.4
DI0.5
Logic Input 3 control module 2DI/-2DI COM (IN 3)
DI0.6
Input 4 control module 2DI/-2DI COM (IN 4)
DI0.7
DI 1.0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact
DI 1.6 Manual operation local
DO0.0 Motor cw
DO0.2 Brake
DO0.3 Trip Reset
DO0.4 Emergency start

K1 Output to expansion module
(e.g. brake control modules
xB1 to xB4 drive for brake)
Auxiliary switch for

K1 return circuit in
2T1
4T2
6T3
Figure 7-4: Sketched circuit diagram of high feature DS1e-x direct starter
More detailed descriptions:

• Input signals, in Section 3.9
• Output signals, in Section 3.9
• Motor current Iact, in Section 7.5.2
• Inputs/actions, in Section 7.5.3
• Emergency start, in Section 7.5.4
• Trip Reset, in Section 7.5.5

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-13
7.3.2 Additional features of the F-DS1e-x
Additional features that only apply to the F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starters are:
• 6 safety groups (SG1 to SG6) can be set using coding connectors in the termi-
nal module
• The safety groups are supplied via a fail-safe power module with overvoltage
protection (PM-D F PROFIsafe, PM-D F X1)
• 2 processors that monitor one another and that control the safety function
Safe shutdown after an emergency stop by means of the mechanically
selected SG bus
• The motor starter is safely shut down if the two processors produce varying
results
• A shunt release for the starter protection switch is integrated to ensure a safe
shutdown in the event of one of the contactors being welded. This feature is
also useful in non-fail-safe mode to ensure shutdown is still possible when a
contactor is welded (fault-tolerant mode, see note)
• It is possible to test the shunt release/starter protection switch via the bus
(DO 0.5)
• Backup of the U1 operating voltage using a capacitor to ensure a safe shut-
down in the event of U1 failure
• Monitoring of the functioning of the capacitor for storing U1
• Redundant configuration of the fail-safe components in the motor starter
Note
A fail-safe motor starter can also be used in non-fail-safe mode with a PM-D
power module. To do this, the coding for the safety group in the terminal mod-
ule of the fail-safe motor starter must be set to SG3 and the U1 and U2 supply
voltages must have the same potential.
Safety note
When you use expansion modules (brake modules xB1 to xB4, 2DI and 2DI
COM control modules), you must ensure that these modules are not fail-safe
modules with fail-safe technology.

7-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Safety note
Expansion module Operating mode
Non-fail-safe SIL1/ SIL2/ SIL3/

mode cat. 1, 2 cat. 3 cat. 4
xB1 X X X X
xB2 X X X X
xB3 X X X 1)
xB4 X X X 1)
2DI control module

X X X 1)
1
) The fail-safe technology must not receive disturbance from the inputs. Cross circuits on
the sensor cables must be prevented (cross-proof cable laying)
Safety note
The F-DS1e-x can only be operated in the potential group of a PM-D F
PROFIsafe or PM-D F X1 that safely limits the voltage to within the SIMATIC
range.
Safety note
Cyclic test of the F-DS1e-x
- Shunt release/starter protection switch
Request self-test (DO 0.5)
Starter protection switch must be in "Trip" position
Turn starter protection switch to "0"
Starter protection switch must remain in "0" position by itself
- Contactor
Execute on/off cycle with the emergency stop command using the
mechanically selected SG bus(DO 0.0 - motor clockwise rotation must
be on "1")
The tests must be carried out at commissioning and cyclically every 3 to 6

months at the latest (intermittent operation).

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-15
Safety note
Only one SG bus can be selected in the terminal module for each motor starter.
Safety note
You must only use the F-DS1e-x motor starter to control motors that do not con-
stitute a danger to persons or to the environment if they suddenly shut down.
Important
After U1 has been applied, the F-DS1e-x requires approximately 30 s until the
internal self-test is completed. DI 0.0 ready is then set in the process image via
the host/PLC. Once the internal self-test is completed, the selected SG bus is
monitored.

7-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
View of the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
SF group error
DEVICE device status
C-STAT switching status
contactor
LEDs
Safety group
SG1 to SG6
Slot for
sealable
Aperture for SIRIUS

Latch indicator
Figure 7-5: Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-17
Sketched circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
1L1
3L2
5L3
Mechanical selection
SG1 to 6
of the safety group
DI0.2 Group error
DI0.4
DI0.5
DI0.6
DI0.7
DO0.0 Motor cw
DO0.2 Brake
DO0.3 Trip Reset
DO 0.5 Self-test
K1 Output to expansion module (e.g.
brake control modules xB1 to 4
drive for brake)

K1 circuit state monitoring
2T1
4T2
6T3
Figure 7-6: Sketched circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter


7-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
7.3.3 Module replacement
If a module has to be replaced, an acceptance test is not necessary. With the

F-DS1e-x, however, it is necessary to repeat the safety function test (see cyclic
test).
Warning
If there is a pending On signal for the contactor, the motor starts up indepen-
dently.
This applies to a F-DS1e-x motor starter after the self-test if there is not an
emergency stop on the selected SG bus.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-19
7.3.4 Parameters
The parameters are described in detail in Section 7.5.

The table below lists the actions and value ranges that can be set with the vari-
ous parameters for the DS1e-x and F-DS1e-x direct starters.
Action,
value range
Rated operating current Increment 10 mA GSD/device Module
• Range 1
• 0.3 to 3 A • 0.3/3 A
• Range 2 (0.05 to 1.1 kW)
• 2.4 to 8 A • 2.4/8 A
• Range 3 (1.1 to 3 kW)
• 2.4 to 16 A • 2.4/16 A
(1.1 to 7.5 kW)
Response to overload - • Shutdown without Shutdown without Module
thermal motor model restart restart
• Shutdown with restart
• Warning
Tripping class • CLASS 10 CLASS 10 Module
• CLASS 20
Idle time Increment 1 s 0 Module
Cancellation of the ther- 0 to 255 s
mal overload module for 0 = deactivated
operational switching
Response to current limit • Warning Warning Module
violation • Disconnect
Lower current limit Increment 3.125 % 18.75 % Module
18.75 to 100 % 1)
Upper current limit Increment 3.125 % 112.5 % Module
50 to 150 % 1)
Response to residual cur- • Warning Disconnect Module
rent detection • Disconnect 2)
Response to asymmetry • Warning Disconnect Module
• Disconnect
Behavior at CPU/Master • Use dummy value Use dummy value Module
STOP • Keep last value = disconnect
• Enable
1) Of the rated operational current
2) Possible in the case of the DS1e-x direct starter with an order number ending in ...AA3 and in the case
of the F-DS1e-x
Table 7-5: Parameters for the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter

7-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Action,
value range
Input 1, 2 - signal level • NC NO Module
(x interface, expansion • NO
module)
Input 3, 4 - signal level

(2DI control module,
(See Section 7.5)

Input 1 to 4 - action • No action No action Module
• Shutdown without
restart
• Shutdown at limit
position, clockwise
rotation
position, counterclock-
wise rotation
• General warning 3)
• Manual
operation local 3)
NO only • Emergency start 3)
NO only • Motor cw 3)
NO only • Motor ccw 3)
Safety group 4) • Not assigned Not assigned Module
• SG1 to SG6
3
) Also possible with inputs 1 and 2 with DS1e-x direct starters with order numbers ending in ...AA3,
as well as with F-DS1e-x
4
) Only with F-DS1e-x
Table 7-5: (cont.)Parameters for the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
Group diagnosis:
Note

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-21
Direct starters DS1e-x F-DS1e-x

• Depth with brake control module 2DI 173
Weight
Assignment type Type 2
(up to Ie < 16 A at 400 V)
Pollution severity
• At 400 V 3, IEC 60664
(IEC 61131)
• At 500 V 2, IEC 60664
(IEC 61131)
Safety class I, IEC 60536
(VDE 0106,
Part 1)
Shock protection protected against
touching by fingers
Heat loss Pv 1) at Ie 0.3 to 3 A approx. 9 W
2.4 to 8 A approx. 10 W
Maximum attainable safety classes:
• IEC 61508 SIL 3
• DIN V 19250 tripping class 5, 6
• EN 954-1 category 4 2) 4
Safety parameters:
• Low demand PFDAVG (10a)
Test interval 3 months 3.5*10-5
• High demand/continuous mode
PFH
Test interval 3 months 1/hr 8.1*10-10
Test interval 6 months 1/hr 1.8*10 -9
• Proof test interval years 10
1
) for motor starter and terminal module as a function of rated operating
current Ie (upper setting range).
2) With the safety integrated SIGUARD system (see Chapter 9)
Table 7-6: Technical specifications of the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and
the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter

7-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-07

Control circuit
Rated operating voltage for electronic com- 24 VDC
ponents: U1 (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) (21.6 to 26.4 VDC)
Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2
24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC)
Power input
• From electronic component supply: U1 approx. 40 mA approx. 100 mA
• From contactor supply: U2
Pick-up: (for 80 ms) 1.7 A
Hold-in: max. 350 mA
• From SG1 to SG6
Pick-up: (for 200 ms) approx. 250 mA
Hold-in: approx. 55 mA
• Test function of the shunt release/
starter protection switch (50 ms) from
U1 approx. 1.5 A
• From the backplane bus approx. 20 mA
Main circuit
• In accordance with DIN VDE 0106,
Part 1014
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 500 VAC
• Protective separation between main and
auxiliary circuits 400 V
UL, CSA 600 VAC
Table 7-6: (cont.)Technical specifications of the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and
the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-23
Technical specifications - starter protection switch, contactor

Starter protection switch
Rated operating current 3/8/16 A
Instantaneous overcurrent release Fixed setting at 13 x Ie max
Ie = 16 A (motor starter) 50 kA at 400 V
Electrical life 100,000 operating cycles
Contactor
• AC-1 16 A
• AC-2, AC-3
- At 400 V 16 A
- At 500 V 11 A
• AC-4 at 400 V 9A
tacts, contactor
Mechanical life
Contactor 10 million operating cycles
Switching frequency 80/hr
tion
(total break time =
contact parting delay + arcing time)
• At 0.85 to 1.1 x U s
- Closing time (ms) 25 to 100 50 to 170
- Contact parting time (ms) 20 to 50 40 to 100
• Arcing time (ms) 10 to 15 10 to 15
• At 1.0 x Us
- Closing time (ms) typ. 25 typ. 50
- Contact parting time (ms) typ. 20 typ. 40
Table 7-7: Technical specifications of the DS1e-x and F-DS1e-x - starter protection switch and
contactor

7-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
107
8
6
4
2
106
8
6
4
2
105
6
4
Ie = Rated
2
operating current
104
8
6 PN = Rated power
4
of three-phase motors
2
At 400 V
103
1 2 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 !a(A) 400
3 8 12 16 !e(A)
1,1 3 7,5 PN (kW)

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-25
7.4 High feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x

The electrical properties of the DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starter are
exactly the same as those of the SIRIUS soft starter 3RW30. The same power
electronics are used.
7.4.1 Physical principles
Starting current
Three-phase current asynchronous motors have a high inrush current I(starting).
This inrush current can be between three and fifteen times as high as the rated
operating current, depending on the type of motor. A figure between seven and
eight times the rated operating current can be postulated as typical.
I
IStartup
Irated
I0 (idle)
nrated nsyn n
Mpull-out
M
Mmotor
Mstartup
Mload
Mdip
Maccel
Mrated
Mmotor
Mload
nrated nsyn n
Figure 7-7: Typical current and torque curve of a three-phase asynchronous motor

7-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Reducing the starting current

There are various ways of reducing the starting current:
• by star delta starter
• by frequency converter
• by soft starter
Star delta starter

After a certain delay, the motor windings are switched from a star to a delta con-
figuration. Motor current for star starting is only about 1/3 of that required for
delta starting (motor torque, too, is reduced to approximately 1/3 of the delta
torque).
Disadvantages:
• 6 motor cables are necessary
• Occurrence of switching surges (in the current and torque transients)
• Startup cannot be matched to the system environment
• Installation is relatively complicated and time-consuming
• Contactor switching calls for an extra time relay or PLC programming
• More space needed in the control cabinet
I Starting current in d M
IAd
MAd Mmotor atd
Mload
Starting current
for */d start
IA*=
1/3 IA d Mmotor at*
=1/3 MAd MA*
n n
n nsyn n nsyn
*nrated *nrated
Figure 7-8: Current and torque curves for star-delta starting

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-27
Frequency converter
A frequency converter converts the AC voltage from the grid into a direct volt-
age, which can then be converted to any voltage and frequency.
The illustration below shows how a frequency converter works:
4*
6"
Figure 7-9: Method of operation of a frequency converter
Disadvantages:
• Relatively complicated wiring needed in order to meet radio interference sup-
pression requirements; filters are often essential
• Line capacities limit the lengths of motor feeder cables; it may be necessary
to use chokes, sinus filters or even dV/dt filters.
• Expensive
• System startup is complex and time-consuming on account of the multiplicity
of operating parameters
• It might be necessary to use shielded motor feeder cables
Advantages:
• Motor speed is variable, speed can be accurately pegged at constant levels.
The U/f ratio remains virtually constant. It is therefore possible to achieve high
torques at relatively low currents.

7-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Soft starter
With a soft starter, motor voltage is increased from a selectable starting voltage
to the rated voltage by phase firing within a defined starting time. Motor current
is proportional to the motor voltage, so the starting current is reduced by the
factor of the defined starting voltage.
The illustration below shows how the DSS1e-x soft starter works:
UL1- L3
α α
α α ϕ
L2
UL2- L3
M L1
3~
L3
G1
Figure 7-10: Phase firing of the supply voltage by semiconductor elements in the DSS1e-x soft
starter
Example:
Starting voltage 50 % of Ue => starting current equals 50 % of the motor start-
ing current for direct-on-line starting.
A soft starter also reduces motor torque. This is the reason why a soft-started
motor does not jerk into action.
The relationship is as follows: motor torque is proportional to the square of
motor voltage.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-29
Example:
Starting voltage 50 % of Ue => starting torque 25 % of the starting torque for
direct-on-line starting.
Advantages:
• Less space needed in the control cabinet
• No protective circuitry (e.g. filter elements) needed for compliance with radio
interference suppression requirements
• Lower installation costs
• Straightforward system startup
• Only 3 motor feeder cables, half as many as are needed for a star delta
starter
• Local adjustments make the unit easy to configure in accordance with system
requirements.
Disadvantages:
• Long-term speed settings not possible.
• Lower torque at reduced voltage
I M
100 % Usystem
Istartup 100 % Usystem
Istartup 70 % Usystem Mstartup
x 0.7
Istartup 50 % Usystem 70 % Usystem
x 0.5
Mstartup
x 0.49 50 % Usystem
Mstartup
0.25 x
nsyn n nsyn n
Figure 7-11: Current and torque curves for a soft starter

7-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
7.4.2 Application and use
Areas of application and criteria for selection

The ET 200S DSS1e-x soft starters are an alternative to star delta starters and
frequency converters (comparison and advantages, see Section 7.4.1).
The most important advantages are soft starting and soft rundown, interruption-
free switching without current spikes that could interfere with the supply sys-
tem, and the compact size.
Many drives that needed frequency converters in the past, can be changed to
soft-start operation with the DSS1e-x, if the applications do not call for varia-
tions in speed.
Applications
Typical applications include, for example:
Conveyor belts, conveyor systems:
• smooth starting
• smooth slowing,
Rotary pumps, piston-type pumps
• avoidance of pressure surges
• service life of the piping system is extended
Agitators, mixers:
• reduced starting current
Fans:
• less strain on gearing and drive belts
Drive for a motor with electromechanical brake

An electromechanical brake with infeed from the main voltage (L1/L2/L3) should
not be connected directly to the output of the soft starter. An internally powered
electromechanical brake should be supplied via a separate contactor.
Important
Do not use a soft starter to supply an internally powered brake (xB2, 4).

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-31
7.4.3 Features
ET 200S high feature direct soft starters DSS1e-x

400 VAC
switch) to monitor short circuits and for line protection
• The 2-phase power electronics from the SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starter are inte-
grated
• When the motor starts the power thyristors of the soft starter are jumpered
by integrated relays in the current ranges 2.4 - 8 A and 2.4 - 16 A
process supervision
rapid shutdown
• The soft starter is controlled directly via integrated outputs
• The switching status of the soft starter is registered by means of current flow
analysis
• Local adjustments by potentiometers for
– starting time
– starting voltage
– coasting down time
• Available diagnostic information of the soft starter (see Table 3-7)
• Integrated disconnection functions by means of starter protection switch
module (e.g. brake control module xB1, 3)
of the expansion interface (expansion module, e.g. brake control module xB3
and xB4) act directly on soft-starter and brake drive
• The control module 2DI (connectable at front) provides another 2 parameteriz-
able inputs (DI 0.6 and DI 0.7)

7-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
View
SF group error
DEVICE device status
LEDs
C-STAT switching status
soft starter
Slot for
sealable
Coasting down time
Starting voltage
Starting time
Latch indicator
Figure 7-12: High feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-33

1L1
3L2
5L3
DI0.2 Group error
DI0.4

DI0.5
DI0.6
DI0.7
DI1.7 Ramp operation
DO0.0 Motor cw
DO0.2 Brake
DO0.3 Trip Reset

Output to expansion module
Drive (e.g. brake control modules
xB1 to 4 drive for brake)
only on version
2.4 - 8 A
2.4 - 16 A
2T1
4T2
6T3
Figure 7-13: Sketched circuit diagram - high feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x

Caution
Phase L1 is not looped through the semiconductors in the DSS1e-x. Always
switch off the starter protection switch before commencing work on the output.

7-34 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Settings
The devices can be set locally as follows (see Figure 7-10):
By means of 3 potentiometers for setting:
• Starting time in the range from 0 to 20 sec.
• Starting voltage in the range from approx. 30 to 100 % of rated voltage for
motor
• Coasting down time in the range from 0 to 20 sec.
Soft starting function

Torque-reduced start for three-phase asynchronous motors:
Triggering is two-phase, which means that the current is kept low throughout
the run-up phase. Current peaks such as those that occur in a star-delta start at
the changeover from star to delta are prevented by continuous voltage manage-
ment.
Transient current peaks (inrush peaks) are automatically avoided in each switch-
on procedure by a special control function of the power semiconductors.
Soft rundown function

The integrated soft rundown function prevents the drive coming to an abrupt
halt when the motor is switched off.
Warning
The soft coasting down time set locally on the soft starter is also effective in
controlling the brake or shutdown function via one of the parameterizable inputs
(for example, the 2DI control module or the xB1 or xB4 brake control module)
for an additional 1 to 2 seconds. Following a shutdown function without a motor
brake, therefore, the immediate standstill of the motor is delayed.
Following a shutdown function with a motor brake, the soft coasting down and
time delay work against the halted motor.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-35
Time ramp
The illustration below shows the time ramp of the DSS1e-x for parameterized
ramp operation (DI 1.7 = 1):
U
UN
Us
t
tR on tR off
DSS1e-x: time ramp
Figure 7-14: Time ramp/timing diagram, DSS1e-x
Changing settings
The potentiometer settings are scanned before each switching operation ("ON"
or "OFF").
If, for example, the setting of the potentiometer for starting time is changed
while the motor is running up, the change does not come into effect until the
next start.
Starting voltage
The starting voltage should be set to a value at which the motor starts rapidly.
Ramp time (Start time)

The ramp time should be set such that the motor can run up within the time
defined in this way.
If the star time for star-delta starting is known, the ramp time can be set to this
value.
Coasting down time (Stop time)

The "Stop time" potentiometer is for setting the duration of the voltage ramp for
coasting down. This parameter can be used to make motor run-down longer
than it would be if the motor were merely to coast to a stop.
The motor coasts to a stop on its own if this potentiometer is set to a value of 0.

7-36 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Cyclic duration factor CD

The cyclic duration factor CD in % is the ratio between load duration and free-
wheeling duration for loads that are switched frequently on and off.
This factor can be calculated with the aid of the formula below:
ts + tb
ED = ------------------------
t s + t b + tp
In this formula:
• CD cyclic duration factor [%]
• ts starting time [s]
• tb operating time [s]
• tp idle time [s]
The illustration below shows the procedure.

Ie
t
ts tb tp
Figure 7-15: Cyclic duration factor CD

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-37
Switching frequency
It is essential to comply with the maximum permissible switching frequency in
order to avoid exposing the devices to thermal overload. The "response to over-
load - thermal motor model" parameter has to be deactivated (shutdown without
restart). It is also necessary to deactivate the idle time for cooling in the thermal
motor module by selecting the default = 0 = deactivated (see Section 7.5.3, Idle
time).
The table below presents an overview of switching frequencies per hour in
accordance with the influencing factors.
3RK1301-0AB20-0AA2 (0.3 to 3 A)
CLASS 10A
Device orientation vertical horizontal
Ambient temperature 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C
Ie = 3 A, CD = 30%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 240 200 160 160
Ie = 3 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 180 150 120 120
CLASS 10
Ie = 3 A, CD = 30%, start 3 x Ie/4 s 120 100 80 80
Ie = 3 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/4 s 80 70 60 60
3RK1301-0BB20-0AA2 (2.4 to 8 A)
CLASS 10A
Ie = 8 A, CD = 30%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 80 70 60 60
Ie = 8 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 60 50 40 40
3RK1301-0CB20-0AA2 (2.4 to 16 A)
CLASS 10A
Ie = 3 A, CD = 30%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 240 200 160 160
Ie = 3 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 180 150 120 120
Ie = 8 A, CD = 30%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 80 70 60 60
Ie = 8 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 60 50 40 40
Ie = 16 A, CD = 30%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 35 25 12 12
Ie = 16 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 25 14 6 6
Table 7-8: Switching frequency for DSS1e-x soft starter

7-38 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
7.4.4 Notes on configuration
In order for a motor to reach its rated speed, motor torque at any given time dur-
ing run-up must be greater than the torque needed by the load, as otherwise a
stable operating point would be reached before the motor achieved its rated
speed (the motor would "drag to a stop"). The difference between motor torque
and load torque is the accelerating torque that is responsible for the increase in
the speed of the drive. The lower the accelerating torque, the longer is the time
the motor needs to run up to its operating speed.
Starting torque
Reducing the terminal voltage of a three-phase asynchronous motor reduces
the motor's starting current and the starting torque.
Current is directly proportional to voltage, whereas voltage is proportional to the
square root of motor torque.
Example:
Motor = 5.5 kW, rated current = 11.4 A, starting current = 6.3 x rated current,
motor torque = 36 Nm, starting torque = 2.4 x rated torque
Settings for the soft starter: starting voltage 50% of rated voltage for motor
The reductions are thus as follows:
• Starting current is reduced to half the starting current for a direct start: 50 %
of (6.3 x 11.4 A) = 36 A
• Starting torque is reduced to 0.5 x 0.5 = 25 % of the starting torque for a
direct start: 25 % of 2.4 x 36 Nm = 21.6 Nm
Notes
On account of the ratio between starting voltage and torque, it is important to
ensure that starting voltage is not too low. This applies particularly for a pro-
nounced saddle torque, the lowest motor torque that occurs during run-up to
rated speed.
Disconnection is immediate if the current through the soft starter exceeds five
times the current setting. This can happen during the starting and rundown
phases in particular. If this happens you should increase the starting time or the
coasting down time, as applicable, and also reduce the starting voltage, if nec-
essary.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-39
Mmotor
M
Mstartup
Mmotor with Mload

SIRIUS soft starter
MB
MB = accelerating torque
of the motor
Mstartup
with
SIRIUS
soft starter n
Ue
US
tR t
Figure 7-16: Load and motor torques and motor terminal voltage for operation with soft starter
Criteria for selection
Note
In the case of the ET 200S DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starters, the soft
starter has to be selected on the basis of the rated current for motor (rated cur-
rent of the soft starter must be ≥ rated current for motor).
The 3 potentiometers on the starter are for setting the starting voltage, the
starting time and the coasting down time.
The soft starter is correctly set when the motor starts smoothly and runs up rap-
idly to its rated speed.
The ramp time can be set to any value up to 20 seconds.

7-40 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Starting time
In order to obtain optimum operating conditions for the DSS1e-x soft starter, the
setting for the starting time should be approx. 1 s longer than the resultant
motor run-up time, in order to ensure that the internal jumpering contacts do
not have to carry the starting current. This protects the internal jumpering con-
tacts and increases their service life. Longer starting times increase the thermal
load on the devices and the motor unnecessarily and lead to a reduction in the
permissible switching frequency.
Site altitude
If site altitude is above 1000 m, the following are necessary:
• A reduction in the rated current for thermal reasons
• A reduction in rated voltage on account of the diminished dielectric strength
The diagram below plots the reductions in rated current and rated operating
voltage as a function of site altitude:
105
100 Ue reduction
95 Ie reduction
90
85
80
75
70
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000
Site altitude in m
Figure 7-17: Reductions as a function of site altitude

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-41
7.4.5 Parameters
Parameter assignment
Define the parameters for the IM 151 interface module with the STEP 7 param-
eterization software or COM PROFIBUS. To do this, you need the
"SIEM806A.GSD" or "SIEM806B.GSD" device master file (see Section 6.1 in the
’SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System’ manual).
Parameters
ous parameters for the DSS1e-x soft starter.
Action,
value range
• Range 1 • 0.3 to 3 A • 0.3/3 A
(0.05 to 1.1 kW)
• Range 2 • 2.4 to 8 A • 2.4/8 A
(1.1 to 3 kW)
• Range 3 • 2.4 to 16 A • 2.4/16 A
(1.1 to 7.5 kW)
• Warning
Tripping class • CLASS 10A CLASS 10A Module
• CLASS 10
only for 0.3 - 3 A
18.75 to 100 % 1)
50 to 150 % 1)
• Disconnect
• Enable
2) Possible in the DSS1e-x direct soft starter with an order number ending in ...AA3
Table 7-9: Parameters for DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starter

7-42 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Action,
value range
module)

(2DI control module)
(See Section 7.5)

restart
position, clockwise
rotation
wise rotation
• Manual
operation local 3)
3
) Also possible at input 1 and 2 for DSS1e-x direct soft starters with order numbers ending in ...AA3
Table 7-9: (cont.)Parameters for DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starter
Group diagnosis:
Note

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-43

Weight
• Reversing starter incl. terminal module 1 kg
Pollution degree at 400 V 3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131)
Site altitude see Figure 7-15
Control circuit
nents U1
Rated operating voltage for contactor U2 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC)
Power input
• From electronic component supply U1 approx. 40 mA
• From soft-starter supply U2 approx. 30 mA
Main circuit
In accordance with DIN VDE 0106, Part 1014
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 480 VAC
UL, CSA 480 VAC
1
) for motor starter and terminal module depending on the rated operating current I e
Table 7-10: Technical specifications - DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starter

7-44 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Technical specifications - starter protection switch, soft starter

Instantaneous overcurrent release Fixed setting at 13 x I e max
Electrical life 100,000 operating cycles
Soft starter
• AC-53a 3A
• AC-53b 8/16 A
Table 7-11: Technical specifications DSS1e-x - starter protection switch, soft starter

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-45
7.5 Description of fixed values and parameters

All the parameters of the high feature/fail-safe motor starters are described in
this section. A distinction is drawn between the permanently set values (fixed
values) and the parameters that can be changed by the user.
7.5.1 Permanently set values
Recovery time
Recovery time is the time defined for cooling after which a reset is possible fol-
lowing an overload trip.
Losses of voltage occurring before this time expires prolong the recovery time
accordingly.
The recovery time is set to 90 s and cannot be changed.
Trip Reset signals received during the recovery time (DO 0.3) have no effect.
Starting current protection

The DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starters have integrated starting current
protection of 5 times Ie. This protects the semiconductors against overload. If
the starting current protection limit is exceeded it is advisable to change the
parameterization, for example a lower starting voltage and a longer starting
ramp time.
Short-circuit protection
The instantaneous overcurrent release of the starter protection switch is set to
13 x Ie max of the applicable current range; this setting cannot be changed.

7-46 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Principle of anti-blocking function

The principle on which anti-blocking protection is based (the interaction of block-
ing current and blocking time, in other words) is illustrated below:
Case 1: Motor continues to operate
I Stalled rotor
Blocking Stalled rotor
current released within blocking time
Motor continues to operate

Motor
current
t
Blocking time
Case 2: Motor is shut down
I Stalled rotor
Blocking Stalled rotor
current
when blocking time elapses
persists
Motor Motor is shut down

current
t
Blocking time
Figure 7-18: Principle of anti-blocking function
Blocking current
The motor starter detects a blockage if the blocking current is exceeded. This
starts the blockage monitoring time, the duration of which depends on the
blocking time. The motor starter shuts down if the blockage is still present after
the blocking time expires.
The blocking current is a percentage of the rated operational current.
The blocking current is set to 800 % of the rated operational current and cannot
be changed.
Blocking time
Time for which a blockage can persist without initiating a shutdown. The motor
starter shuts down if the blockage is still present after the blocking time expires.
The blocking time is set to 1 second and cannot be changed.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-47
7.5.2 Actual motor current
The maximum current in the starter is returned for analysis by the process
image.
Current is measured for all 3 phases and the highest value is obtained.
The 6-bit value returned indicates the motor-current ratio Iact/Irated (Irated =
parameterized rated operating current).
The value is shown with one place to the left of the decimal point (DI 1.5) and
five places after the decimal point (DI 1.0 to DI 1.4). The maximum possible ratio
of Iact/Irated is therefore 1.96875 (approx. 197 %).
Resolution is 1/32 per bit (3.125 %).
DI 1.5 DI 1.4 DI 1.3 DI 1.2 DI 1.1 DI 1.0
20 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5
1 0.5 0.25 0.125 0.0625 0.03125 Total=1.96875
0 0 0 0 0 0 Iact = 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 Iact = Irated x 1
1 0 1 1 0 0 Iact = Irated x 1.375
1 1 1 1 1 1 Iact = Irated x 1.96875

Table 7-12: Actual motor current
Iact = rated operational current Irated x value (DI 1.0 to DI 1.5)

7-48 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
7.5.3 User-definable parameters
Rated operational current

This is the parameter for the rated operational current that the feeder (switch-
gear and motor) can carry without interruption (nominal current for motor). The
value that can be set depends on the current range (e.g. 0.3 to 3; 2.4 to 8; 2.4 to
16 A).
The current range itself depends on the device version can cannot be parame-
terized.
Default:
The motor starter's rated operational current is set ex-works to the maximum
value. This means that the motor can be tested without connection to the field
bus and the starter does not trip. Correct motor protection might not necessar-
ily be ensured under certain circumstances during this time.
In the GSD file the rated operational current is preset to the minimum value for
safety reasons. This value has to be parameterized as part of the configuration
procedure. If it is not parameterized the motor starter could trip on account of
an overload when the motor is started for the first time.
The increment within a range is 10 mA.
Response to overload - thermal motor model

The motor's winding temperature is mapped from the measured motor currents
and the device parameters "rated operational current" and "CLASS". The data
that indicates whether the motor is overloaded or working within its normal
operating range is derived from this temperature.
This device parameters is used to determine how the motor starter reacts to an
overload:
• Shutdown without restart
• Warning
After an overload, the shutdown command cannot be reset using a reset

command (Trip Reset, DO 0.3) until the recovery time (=90 s) has elapsed.
Danger
Shutdown with restart means that if a switch-on command is pending the motor
starter switches on automatically (auto-reset) when the recovery time (= 90 s)
elapses.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-49
Tripping class (electronic overload protection)

The tripping class (CLASS) defines the maximum time to disengagement within
which a protective device must trip from cold at 7.2 times the rated operational
current (motor protection to IEC 60947). The tripping characteristics plot time to
disengagement as a function of operating current.
Time to disengagement [s] 1000
100
20
10 CLASS 20
8
3 CLASS 10
CLASS 10A
1
1 7 10
Current * Ie [A]
Figure 7-19: Tripping class
Note
The options for the tripping classes depend on the starter and on the current
range:
Motor starters Current range CLASS
DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A
RS1e-x
2.4 to 8 A 10/20
F-DS1e-x
F-RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A
0.3 to 3 A 10A/10
DSS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A
10A
2.4 to 16 A

7-50 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Idle time
Idle time is a time defined for cooling of the motor model following operational
shutdown, in other words not after overload trips.
When this time elapses the "thermal motor model" of the motor starter
is set to 0 %.
This permits frequent motor starts (jogging). In the case of motor protection to
IEC 947, starts like this would result in a trip, depending on the CLASS setting.
Cooling with and without idle time is graphed below:
Motor
On
Off
t
Motor
heats
Tripping limit
Without υ
idle time
Overload tripping
With υ Tripping limit

idle time
No
overload tripping
t
Idle time Idle time
Figure 7-20: Idle time
The idle time can be set to a value in the range between 0 and 255 seconds.
Danger
If the idle time is changed (0 = deactivated), motor protection is no longer in
accordance with the requirements of IEC 947 (CLASS 10A, 10, 20). This means
that the corresponding degree of system protection might not be maintained
under certain circumstances. Parallel protective measures are recommended.
Note
The motor must be designed for jog-mode operation of this nature, as overload-
ing could otherwise cause permanent damage.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-51
Current limits
The motor current and the current limits can be used to derive information on a
number of system states:
System state Current value Protection by:
System becomes more inert, for exam- Current is higher Current limits
ple on account of damaged bearings or
System becomes freer, for example lower than usual
because the processing material in the
system has been used up.
System is blocked! Very high current Blocking protection

flowing
Upper/lower current limit

An upper and/or a lower current limit can be set.
• DS1e-x, RS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x:
The current limits are not active for startup bridging until the CLASS time has
elapsed (e.g. after 10 seconds in the case of CLASS 10).
• DSS1e-x:
The current limits are not active for start jumpering until the ramp time and
CLASS time have elapsed.
Range for lower current limit:

18.75 % to 100 % of the rated operational current
Range for upper current limit:
50 % to 150 % of the rated operational current
The motor starter can be parameterized for warning or shutdown as the

response to violation of the current limits.
Examples:
• "Substance for mixing too thick", i.e. current overshoots the upper current
limit.
• "No-load operation, because drive belt broken", i.e. current undershoots the
lower current limit.

7-52 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Response to residual current detection

Residual current is detected if the motor current is <18.75% of the set rated
operational current.
As of order numbers ending in ...AA3 for high feature motor starters and
the F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x, the following responses can be parameterized for
residual current detection:
• Warning
• Disconnect
Response to current limit violation

This device parameters is used to determine how the motor starter reacts to a
current limit violation:
• Warning
• Disconnect
Asymmetry
Higher asymmetric current consumption is the reaction of a three-phase asyn-
chronous motor to slight asymmetry in the supply voltage. This causes an
increase in temperature in the stator and rotor windings.
The asymmetry limit is a percentage by which motor current can vary in the indi-
vidual phases.
Asymmetry has occurred when the difference between the lowest and the high-
est phase currents is greater than 30 %.
The datum for evaluation is the maximum phase current in one of the three
phases.
Response to asymmetry
This device parameters is used to determine how the motor starter reacts to
asymmetry:
• Warning
• Disconnect

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-53
Inputs
Inputs is a device function that can be used to have the motor starter perform
various actions that can be parameterized. The signals at the digital inputs are
evaluated for this purpose.
Inputs 1 and 2 (DI 0.4, DI 0.5) are actuated via the expansion interface for
expansion modules (e.g. brake control module xB3 and xB4).
Inputs 3 and 4 (DI 0.6, DI 0.7) can be wired directly with switching elements or
sensors (PNP) through the 2DI or 2DI COM control module (description, see
Sections 3.4 and 3.5).
Input, n level
This device parameter is used to define the input logic.
Range: NC contact/NO contact:
• NC contact actuated = 0 signal active
• NO contact actuated = 1 signal active
Note
"Input n - action is emergency start, motor cw and motor ccw": input n level can
only be parameterized for NO contacts.

7-54 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Input n action
A variety of actions can be triggered by an input signal. The actions that can be
parameterized are as follows:
Input n action Description
No action No direct action at the motor starter. Evaluation and

processing by the process image are possible.
Shutdown • Results in the shutdown of motor and brake.

without restart • Acknowledgment necessary after the cause of the
shutdown has been rectified (input status).
Shutdown • Results in the shutdown of motor and brake.

with restart • Automatic acknowledgment after the cause of the
shutdown has been rectified (input status).
Shutdown at limit position, • Motor and brake output are shut down irrespective of
clockwise rotation the direction of rotation.
• The brake output can be switched on again after "brake
Shutdown at limit position, OFF" and motor OFF" have been set.
counterclockwise rotation • Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rotation Motor
switch-on is possible only with the counter-command
"motor ccw".
• Shutdown at limit position, counterclockwise rotation
Motor switch-on is possible only with the counter-com-
mand "motor cw".
General warning • The "General Warning" message is issued.

• The motor starter is not shut down.
Manual operation local Control is possible only by "input 3 or 4 - action: motor

cw and motor ccw".
Control by field bus (automatic operation) is not possi-
ble.
Automatic operation is not possible until the manual
operation local mode has been canceled and "Input 3 or
4 - action: motor cw or motor ccw" is no longer active.
Emergency start Description, see Section 7.5.4.
Motor cw • The motor starter must be in the "manual operation

local" mode for these actions.
• Motor cw: switches motor and brake output on and off
(clockwise rotation).
Motor ccw • Motor ccw: switches motor and brake output on and
off (counterclockwise rotation).
• Permissible only as NO contact.
Table 7-13: Description of actions

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-55
7.5.4 Emergency start
Emergency start (DO 0.4) enables a restart despite an internal shutdown com-
mand.
An emergency start is possible if the motor cw or motor ccw commands are
pending for the motor but there is no emergency stop 1). The motor is switched
on even if the reason for the shutdown persists. Note the control of the expan-
sion module if, for example, there is a brake.
Emergency start is not possible when

• There are no motor cw or motor ccw commands
• A device fault has occurred ("self-test error")
• The motor starter's self-protective function has tripped ("switching element
overload")
• U1/U 2 is missing
• The anti-blocking function has tripped
• A process image error has occurred
• There is an emergency stop 1)
The thermal motor model continues to function when there is an emergency

start.
1) Only in the case of F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x (open at emergency stop by means of the
mechanically selected SG bus or starter protection switch).
7.5.5 Trip Reset
Trip Reset acknowledges all the currently pending acknowledgable errors in the
starter. An error can be acknowledged if it has been eliminated or no longer
exists.
The Trip Reset can be triggered by:
• The user application via the DO 0.3 process image (see Section 3.9.2)
• The knob switch on the starter protection switch (see Section 3.1)
• By the local device interface using the Switch ES software
(only applies to high feature motor starters with order numbers ending in
...AA3 and to all fail-safe motor starters).

7-56 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
7.6 Factory setting

We recommend you use the factory setting (default setting) in the following
instances:
• Incorrect parameter assignment
• If ET 200S motor starters that have already been parameterized are to be
used in other systems.
Note
If you do not, in certain circumstances some operating mechanisms may start
up due to the existing parameter assignment.
You can reset parameterized motor starters to their factory setting without any
additional tools.
A parameter assignment block set by the Switch ES parameter assignment soft-
ware is removed in the process.
You can find the parameters for the factory setting in the sections below:
• In Section 7.3.4 for DS1e-x and F-DS1e-x
• In Section 7.4.5 for DSS1e-x
• In Section 8.3.4 for RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
Motor starter variants

The following motor starters can be reset:
• Variants of high feature motor starters
- DS1e-x
- DSS1e-x
- RS1e-x
with order numbers ending in ...AA3.
• Variants of fail-safe motor starters
- F-DS1e-x
- F-RS1e-x
Factory setting options

You can install the factory setting for a motor starter in the following instances:
• In an ET 200S system that is in operation
• Outside a system with an appropriate terminal module and a power module
for the voltage U1.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 7-57
Procedure
To reset the factory setting, proceed as follows:
1.
Warning
Connect the motor starter on an appropriate terminal module so that a con-
nected drive cannot start up as a result of the unknown parameter assignment
of the motor starter.
Do not use a terminal module that has an expansion module directly to the right
of it (brake module xB3 and xB4 with inputs).
You cannot install a 2DI control module on this motor starter.
Note the mechanical coding when you install the motor starter on the terminal
module.
2. For this procedure, apply the voltage U1 outside a system via a power mod-
ule. It is not necessary for the supply to come via the Profibus-DP and the
power bus.
3. Turn the knob of the starter protection switch within the specified time win-
dow of 2 to 4 seconds to ON and OFF, as illustrated in the timing diagram
below, and check the LEDs on the motor starter.
Initialization sequence Start sequence Starting the factory setting
LED indicators: Factory setting restored
SF Off
Rotary switch C-STAT Off
LED indicators: for 5 s
SF Off
DEVICE flashes red C-STAT Off
ON DEVICE flickers red
STOP
2 to 4s 2 to 4s 2 to 4s 2 to 4s 2 to 4s 2 to 4s 3s
Figure 7-21: Factory setting
The initialization sequence prevents the factory setting being reset inadvert-
ently.
The factory setting is initialized at the beginning of the start sequence. The
LEDs indicate the following behavior:
• SF off
• C-STAT off
• DEVICE flashes red
Once the factory setting has been restored, the LEDs respond as follows for 5
seconds:
• SF off
• C-STAT off
• DEVICE flickers red

7-58 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
8.1 Overview 8-2
8.2 Standard reversing starters RS, RS-x, RS1-x 8-4
8.2.1 Features 8-4
8.3 High feature RS1e-x reversing starter 8-11

Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter
8.3.1 Features 8-11
8.3.2 Additional features of the F-RS1e-x 8-14
8.3.3 Module replacement 8-19

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 8-1
Reversing starters
8.1 Overview
Three versions of the ET 200S motor starters are available:
• Standard series (code: RS1-x)
• High feature series, characterized by properties that boost system availability
and improve diagnosis (code: RS1e-x).
A distinction is made between the following:
– If there is no communication interface at the front, the order number ends in:
...AA2
– If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: ...AA3
and the 2DI COM control module is used for the Switch ES Motor Starter software
(version 2.0 and above)
• Fail-safe series that ensures safe shutdown of the motor starter after an
emergency stop instruction by means of the mechanically selected SG bus
(code: F-RS1e-x).
This series has a communication interface at the front via the 2DI COM con-
trol module for the Switch ES Motor Starter software (version 2.0 and above).
All motor starters have full protection against short-circuit and overload.
The high feature/fail-safe motor starter has integrated electronic overload pro-
tection, which means that only two device versions are needed to cover the cur-
rent range up to 16 A. They also have more extensive diagnostics and additional
parameters for system control and monitoring.
The high feature motor starter series with installation widths of 45 mm and
90 mm and 65 mm and 130 mm can only be used in conjunction with the
ET 200S SIGUARD components for safety applications up to category 4.
The fail-safe motor starter series (F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x) is suitable for use in
safety applications in conjunction with fail-safe power modules (PM-D
PROFIsafe and PM-D F X1) up to SIL3/category 4.
Warning
If the circuit breaker or starter protection switch is switched on again after
being tripped as a result of an overload or a short circuit, and there is a pending
On signal for the contactor, the motor starts up.

8-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Reversing starters
The table below presents an overview of the properties of the reversing start-
ers.
RS1-x RS1e-x
Feature
F-RS1e-x
Installation width [mm] 90 130
for power rating up to [kW] 5.5 7.5
Integrated switching devices for SIRIUS components of the size S00 S0
Short-circuit protection with 3RV circuit breaker with instantaneous over-
X
current release
Short-circuit protection with 3RV starter protection switch with instanta-
X
neous overcurrent release
Overload protection with thermal overload release integrated into circuit
X
breaker
Programmable electronic overload protection X
Switching function mechanical
Rated operating current 0.14 - 12 A 0.3 - 16 A
Rated operating voltage 500 V
Parameterizable no yes
Tripping class CLASS 10 10, 20
Asymmetry recognition yes
Residual current detection no yes
Parameterizable current limits no yes
Anti-blocking function with rapid shutdown no yes
Type of coordination (2 at 400 V) 2 (up 2
to 1.6 A)
Use with SIGUARD up to safety category 4 1)
Use up to SIL (IEC 61 508) 3 2)
Tripping class (DIN V 19 250) 5, 6 2)
Up to category (EN 954-1) 4
Extra safety auxiliary switch with fail- integral
safe kit 2
Compatible expansion modules (brake control modules) xB1 to 4
Free inputs through control module 2DI no yes
Can the 2DI COM control module be used? no Yes 3)
Can Switch ES Motor Starter software be used? no Yes 3)
Derating necessary at top end of performance range? yes Yes 2)
Diagnosis, fault types see Section 3.7
1
) Does not apply to F-RS1e-x
2
) Only applies to F-RS1e-x
3
) As of order numbers ending in ...AA3 and with F-RS1e-x
Table 8-1: Overview of reversing starters

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 8-3
Reversing starters
8.2 Standard reversing starters RS, RS-x, RS1-x

8.2.1 Features
ET 200S - RS ... standard reversing starters

• Are motor starters for two directions of rotation that can be can be used in
400 and 500 VAC
• Are available with setting ranges of 0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A
• Are equipped with electromechanical SIRIUS switchgear.
• The switching states of circuit breaker and contactor are indicated via inte-
grated inputs.
• Available diagnostic information of the reversing starter:
– overload or short-circuit tripping/disconnection of the motor starter
– fault at the motor starter
• The circuit state and status are displayed via LEDs.
• Mechanical locking of clockwise/counterclockwise rotation
• Integrated disconnection functions via circuit breaker
• Upgradable with fail-safe kit 2 for safety system applications
Important
A suppressor circuit for the contactor coils is already integrated in the motor
starter. Additional suppressor circuits connected to the contactor are not per-
missible.
Important
When switching over from clockwise rotation to counterclockwise rotation and
vice versa, a switch-over interval of >200 ms must be adhered to.
Please take into account this idle time in your user program.

8-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Reversing starters
ET 200S motor starters, RS-x ... standard reversing starters (see Figure 8-2)
• Have the same features as the RS standard reversing starters
• Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) for driving an additional module (e.g.
brake control module xB1 to 4)
In the case of the xB3 and xB4 only the brake function is supported; the
inputs have no effect.
ET 200S motor starters, RS1-x ... standard reversing starters (see Figure 8-2)
• Have the same features as the RS-x standard reversing starters
• The inputs of brake control module xB3 or xB4 (e.g. limit-position switches)
act directly on the contactor and brake drive circuit (see Section 10.3.4 for
signal response).
Notes
Input 1 (limit switch, clockwise rotation) acts directly on the contactor for clock-
wise rotation of the RS1-x and on the drive circuit of the brake control module.
Input 2 (limit switch, counterclockwise rotation) acts directly on the contactor
for counterclockwise rotation of the RS1-x and on the drive circuit of the brake
control module.
The series RS and RS-x standard reversing starters have been discontinued.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 8-5
Reversing starters
View
Scale for set current

Toggle switch
Opening for test Circuit breaker
overload tripping
SF Group error
C-STAT contactor status LEDs
Channel for
connecting lead to
auxiliary switch block Relevant to
safety integrated
Caution SIGUARD system
Apertures only for
single pin aux. switch block
Important
Additional suppres-
sor circuits are not
permissible.
For control unit only
(see Section 3.3)
Figure 8-1: RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters

Power unit
1L1
3L2
5L3
DI2
Fault
DI0
DO1 DO0
DI1
2T1
6T3
4T2
Switching logic
RS-x RS1-x
Input 1
DO0 DO0 (e. g. xB3,4 brake control module
Logic Logic limit switch, clockwise rotation)
K1 K1
DO1 DO1 Input 2

Logic Logic (e. g. xB3,4 brake control module
K2 K2 limit switch, counterclockwise rotation)
DO2 DO2
Logic Logic Output
(e.g. brake control modules xB1 to 4
drive for brake)
Figure 8-2: Sketched circuit diagram - RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters

8-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Reversing starters
8.2.2 Parameters
The following table indicates the parameters that can be set for the reversing
starter.
Action,
value range

• Enable
Behavior at CPU/ • Disconnect Disconnect Module

Master STOP • Keep circuit
state
Table 8-2: Parameters for the RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters
Group diagnosis:
Note

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 8-7
Reversing starters

• Depth with fail-safe kit (safety integrated 144.5
SIGUARD system)
Weight
• Reversing starter incl. PE/N terminal block 1.8 kg
Type 2 to Ie < 1.6 A
Pollution severity
• At 400 V 3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131)
• At 500 V 2, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131)
Heat loss Pv 1) at Ie < 1.25 A approx. 9 W
1.6 to 6.3 A approx. 10 W
8 to 12 A approx. 11 W
Control circuit
nents: U1
Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC)
Power input
• From electronic component supply: U1 approx. 20 mA
• From contactor supply: U2 approx. 100 mA
Main circuit
Part 1014 500 VAC
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1
• Protective separation between main and 400 V
auxiliary circuits
UL, CSA 600 VAC
1) for motor starter and terminal module as a function of rated operating current I
e
Table 8-3: Technical specifications - RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters

8-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Reversing starters
Technical specifications - circuit breaker, contactor
Circuit breaker
Tripping class Class 10
Max. rated operating current 12 A
Adjustment ranges
• Thermal overload release 0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A
• Instantaneous overcurrent release fixed setting at 12 x I e
Ie = 12 A 50 kA at 400 V
Mechanical life > 100 000 operating cycles
Electrical life 100 000
Contactor
• AC-1 12 A
• AC-2, AC-3
- At 400 V 12 A
- At 500 V 9A
• AC-4 at 400 V 4.1 A
tacts, contactor
Mechanical life
• Contactor 30 million operating cycles
• Contactor with safety functionality 10 million operating cycles

tion
(total break time =
contact parting time + arcing time)
• At 0.85 to 1.1 x U s
- Closing time 25 to 100 ms
- Contact parting time 20 to 50 ms
• Arcing time 10 to 15 ms
• At 1.0 x U s
- Closing time typ. 25 ms
- Contact parting time typ. 30 ms
Table 8-4: Technical specifications RS... - circuit breaker, contactor, auxiliary switch block

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 8-9
Reversing starters
107
8
6
4
2
106
8
6
4
2
105
8
6
4
2

8
6
4
Ie = Rated
2
operating current
103 PN = Rated power
2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 !a(A) 400
9 12 !e(A) of three-phase motors
4 5,5 PN (kW) At 400 V

8-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Reversing starters
8.3 High feature RS1e-x reversing starter

Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter
8.3.1 Features
ET 200S high feature RS1e-x reversing starter

ET 200S fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter
• Are motor starters for two directions of rotation that can be can be used in
400 and 500 VAC
switch, contactor)
process supervision
rapid shutdown
• Detection of the circuit state of the contactor on the basis of current flow
evaluation
Detection of the circuit state in the F-RS1e-x using an auxiliary switch block as
well
• Available diagnostic information of the direct starter (see Table 3-7)
• Mechanical locking of clockwise/counterclockwise rotation
• Integrated disconnection function by means of starter protection switch
• In the case of the RS1e-x:
Auxiliary switch block for the ET 200S SIGUARD (F kit) already integrated
In the case of the F-RS1e-x:
Fail-safe selective shutdown integrated
• The motor starters can be expanded with front-mounted standard SIRIUS
accessories (e.g. auxiliary switch, time relay) for contactor size S0
module (e.g. brake control module xB1 to 4)

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 8-11
Reversing starters
of the expansion interface (expansion module, e.g. brake control module xB3,
4) act directly on contactor and brake drive
• The 2DI/2DI COM control modules (connected to the front) provide another 2
parameterizable inputs (DI 0.6 and DI 0.7)
• Factory setting possible using the rotary switch of the starter protection
switch (see Section 7.6)
• Communication interface at the front for the RS1e-x with order numbers end-
ing in: ...AA3 and in the case of the F-RS1e-x, via the 2DI COM control mod-
ule for the Switch ES Motor Starter software (version 2.0 and above)
View of the high feature RS1e-x reversing starter
SF group error
DEVICE device status LEDs
Slot for
sealable
Aperture for SIRIUS

Latch indicator
Figure 8-3: High feature RS1e-x reversing starter

8-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Reversing starters
Sketched circuit diagram of the high feature RS1e-x reversing starter

1L1
3L2
5L3
DI0.2 Group error
DI0.4
DI0.5
DI0.6

DI0.7
DO0.0 Motor cw
DO0.1 Motor ccw
DO0.2 Brake
DO0.3 Trip Reset

K1 K2 Output to expansion module (e.g.
drive for brake)

K2 K1 return circuit in
2T1
6T3
4T2
Figure 8-4: Sketched circuit diagram - high feature RS1e-x reversing starter


GWA-4NEB950007202-07 8-13
Reversing starters
8.3.2 Additional features of the F-RS1e-x
Additional features that only apply to the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing

starters are:
• 6 safety groups (SG1 to SG6) can be set using coding connectors in the termi-
nal module
• The safety groups are supplied via a fail-safe power module with overvoltage
protection (PM-D F PROFIsafe, PM-D F X1)
• 2 processors that monitor one another and that control the safety function
Safe shutdown after an emergency stop by means of the mechanically
selected SG bus
• The motor starter is safely shut down if the two processors produce varying
results
• A shunt release for the starter protection switch is integrated to ensure a safe
shutdown in the event of one of the contactors being welded. This feature is
also useful in non-fail-safe mode to ensure a shutdown is still possible when a
contactor is welded (fault-tolerant mode, see note)
• It is possible to test the shunt release/starter protection switch via the bus
(DO 0.5)
• Storage of the U1 operating voltage using a capacitor to ensure a safe shut-
down in the event of U1 failure
• Monitoring of the functioning of the capacitor for the U1
• Redundant configuration of the fail-safe components in the motor starter
Note
A fail-safe motor starter can also be used in non-fail-safe mode with a PM-D
power module. To do this, the coding for the safety group in the terminal mod-
ule of the fail-safe motor starter must be set to SG3 and the U1 and U2 supply
voltages must have the same potential.
Safety note
When you use expansion modules (brake modules xB1 to xB4, 2DI and 2DI
COM control modules), you must ensure that these modules are not fail-safe
modules with fail-safe technology.

8-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Reversing starters
Safety note
Expansion module Operating mode
Non-fail-safe SIL1/ SIL2/ SIL3/

mode cat. 1, 2 cat. 3 cat. 4
xB1 X X X X
xB2 X X X X
xB3 X X X 1)
xB4 X X X 1)
2DI control module

X X X 1)
1
) There must not be any interference with the fail-safe technology from the inputs. Cross
circuits on the sensor cables must be prevented (cross-proof cable laying)
Safety note
Only applies to fail-safe mode (fail-safe technology)
The F-RS1e-x can only be operated in the potential group of a PM-D F PROFIsafe
or PM-D F X1 that safely limits the voltage to within the SIMATIC range.
Safety note
Cyclic test of the F-RS1e-x
- Shunt release/starter protection switch
Request self-test (DO 0.5)
Starter protection switch must be in "Trip" position
- Contactor
Execute ON/OFF cycle with the emergency stop command using the
mechanically selected SG bus. Execute the test for clockwise rotation
(DO 0.0 - motor cw - must be on "1"), then execute the test for
counterclockwise rotation (DO 0.1 - motor ccw must be on "1").
The tests must be executed at commissioning and cyclically at least every 3 to

6 months (intermittent operation).

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 8-15
Reversing starters
Safety note
Only one SG bus can be selected in the terminal module for each motor starter.
Safety note
You must only use the F-RS1e-x motor starter to control motors that do not con-
stitute a danger to persons or to the environment if they suddenly shut down.
Important
After U1 has been applied, the F-RS1e-x requires approximately 30 s until the
internal self-test is completed. DI 0.0 ready is then set in the process image via
the host/PLC. Once the internal self-test is completed, the selected SG bus is
monitored.

8-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Reversing starters
View of the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter
SF group error
DEVICE dvice status
LEDs
Safety group
SG1 to SG6
Slot for
salable
Aperture for SIRIUS
Latch indicator
Figure 8-5: Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 8-17
Reversing starters
Sketched circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter

1L1
3L2
5L3
Mechanical selection
SG1 to 6
of the safety group
DI0.2 Group error
DI0.4
DI0.5
DI0.6

DI0.7
DO0.0 Motor cw
DO0.1 Motor ccw
DO0.2 Brake
DO0.3 Trip Reset
DO 0.5 Self-test
K1 K2 Output to expansion module (e.g.
drive for brake)

K2 K1 circuit state monitoring
2T1
6T3
4T2
Figure 8-6: Sketched circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter


8-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Reversing starters
8.3.3 Module replacement
If a module has to be replaced, an acceptance test is not necessary. With the

F-RS1e-x, however, it is necessary to repeat the safety function test (see cyclic
test).
Warning
If there is a pending On signal for the contactor, the motor starts up automati-
cally.
This applies to a F-RS1e-x motor starter after the self-test if there is not an

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 8-19
Reversing starters
8.3.4 Parameters

ous parameters for the RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x reversing starters.
Action,
value range
• Range 1
• 0.3 to 3 A • 0.3/3 A
• Range 2 (0.05 to 1.1 kW)
• 2.4 to 8 A • 2.4/8 A
• Range 3 (1.1 to 3 kW)
• 2.4 to 16 A • 2.4/16 A
(1.1 to 7.5 kW)
• Warning
Tripping class • CLASS 10 CLASS 10 Module
• CLASS 20
18.75 to 100 % 1)
50 to 150 % 1)
• Disconnect
• Enable
2) Possible in the case of the RS1e-x reversing starter with an order number ending in ...AA3 and in the
case of the F-RS1e-x

Table 8-5: Parameters for the high feature RS1e-x reversing starter and the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter

8-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Reversing starters
Action,
value range
module)

(2DI control module,
(see Section 7.5)

restart
position, clockwise
rotation
wise rotation
• Manual
operation local 3)
Safety group 4) • Not assigned Not assigned Module
• SG1 to SG6
3
) Also possible with inputs 1 and 2 for RS1e-x reversing starters with order numbers ending in ...AA3,
as well as with F-RS1e-x
4
) Only with F-RS1e-x
Table 8-5: (cont.)Parameters for the high feature RS1e-x reversing starter and the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing
Group diagnosis:
Note

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 8-21
Reversing starters
Reversing starters RS1e-x F-RS1e-x

Weight
Assignment type Type 2
(up to Ie < 16 A at 400 V)
Pollution severity
• At 400 V 3, IEC 60664
(IEC 61131)
• At 500 V 2, IEC 60664
(IEC 61131)
Safety class I, IEC 60536
(VDE 0106,
Part 1)
Shock protection protected against
touching by fingers
Maximum attainable safety classes: 3)
• IEC 61508 SIL 3
• DIN V 19250 tripping class 5, 6
• EN 954-1 category 4 2) 4
Safety parameters:
PFH
1
) for motor starter and terminal module depending on the rated operating
current I e (upper setting range).
2) With the safety integrated SIGUARD system (see Chapter 9)
Table 8-6: Technical specifications - high feature RS1e-x reversing starter,

fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter

8-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Reversing starters

Control circuit
Rated operating voltage for electronic com- 24 VDC
ponents U1 (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) (21.6 to 26.4 VDC)
Rated operating voltage for contactor U2
24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC)
Power input
• From electronic component supply U1 approx. 40 mA approx. 100 mA
• From contactor supply U 2
Pick-up: (for 80 ms) 1.7 A
Hold-in: max. 350 mA
• From SG1 to SG6
Pick-up: (for 200 ms) approx. 250 mA
Hold-in: approx. 55 mA
• Test function of the shunt release/
starter protection switch (50 ms) from
U1 approx. 1.5 A
Main circuit
Part 1014 500 VAC
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1
• Protective separation between main and 400 V
auxiliary circuits
UL, CSA 600 VAC
Table 8-6: (cont.)Technical specifications - high feature RS1e-x reversing starter,
fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 8-23
Reversing starters
Technical specifications - starter protection switch, contactor

Instantaneous overcurrent release Fixed setting at 13 x Ie max
Mechanical life > 100 000 operating cycles
Electrical life 100 000 operating cycles
Contactor
• AC-1 16 A
• AC-2, AC-3
- At 400 V 16 A
- At 500 V 11 A
• AC-4 at 400 V 9A
tacts, contactor
Mechanical life
Contactor 10 million operating cycles
Switching frequency 80/hr
tion
(total break time =
contact parting time + arcing time)
• At 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
- Closing time (ms) 25 to 100 50 to 170
- Contact parting time (ms) 20 to 50 40 to 100
• Arcing time (ms) 10 to 15 10 to 15
• At 1.0 x Us
- Closing time (ms) typ. 25 typ. 50
- Contact parting time (ms) typ. 20 typ. 40
Table 8-7: Technical specifications of the RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x - starter protection switch and
contactor

8-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Reversing starters
107
8
6
4
2
106
8
6
4
2
105
8
4
2 Ie = Rated
104 operating current
8
6 PN = Rated power
4
2 of three-phase motors
103
at 400 V
1 2 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 !a(A) 400
3 8 12 16 !e(A)
1,1 3 7,5 PN (kW)

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 8-25
Reversing starters

8-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Safety integrated SIGUARD system 9
9.1 Features 9-2
9.2 Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47 and TM-X15 S27-01 9-4
9.3 Power modules PM-D F1 to 5 9-13
9.4 Connection module PM-X 9-20
9.5 ET 200S with safety integrated SIGUARD system 9-21
9.6 Safety integrated system configurations 9-25

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-1
9.1 Features
ET 200S SIGUARD integrates the following functions in contacting form:
• EMERGENCY STOP function for categories 2-4 (EN 954-1)
• Protective-door monitoring for categories 2-4 (EN 954-1)
• Integration into existing safety systems
• Standard motor starters with installation widths of 45/90 mm require a fail-
safe kit 1 or 2 for applications of safety category 2 or higher.
• High feature motor starters with installation widths of 65/90 mm incorporate
the fail-safe functionality
• High feature direct soft starters can be used up to safety category 1
• Fail-safe motor starters are suitable for SIGUARD up to category 1.
Layout of the ET 200S SIGUARD

The illustration below shows how an ET 200S SIGUARD application with moni-
tored start for EMERGENCY STOP with a contactor for category 4 to EN 954-1
has to be wired, the configuration illustrated here by way of example shows
standard motor starters with installation widths of 45/90 mm.
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
PM-X
PM-D DS DS RS
Termin. module
F1
Q1
Power
IM
Master
switch
151
PLC
Profibus-DP Terminating cover
F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 2
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
K1
Infeed
contactor
Figure 9-1: External wiring of the SIGUARD EMERGENCY STOP circuit (category 4) EN 954-1

9-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
L+ 1 A1 6 A5
OUT+
8 13 1 RF 121
U1
M 2 7 K1
OUT- 2
9 14
RF 222
22 13
23 ON
24 14
17
A1+ 4 27
AUX2
11 25 11 21 6 A1
U2
5 26 EM. STOP 7 K1
A2-
12 28 12 22 A2
AUX3
1L1 400V AC
1L2
1L3
Q1
21
K1
22
1L1
3L2
5L3
A2 A3 A4
E E E
Fault Fault Fault
E F kit 1 E F kit 1 E F kit 2
A A A A
E E E
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
N
N
PE
PE
N
N
PE
PE
M M M
3~ 3~ 3~
E = integrated input for programming

A = integrated output for programming
= line for external wiring
Figure 9-1: (cont.) External wiring of the SIGUARD EMERGENCY STOP circuit (category 4) EN 954-1

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-3
9.2 Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47 and TM-X15 S27-01

9.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules
Terminal modules are needed for wiring the PM-D F1 to 5 power modules
and the PM-X connection modules in the safety integrated SIGUARD system.
The following table shows which power modules you can use with the various
terminal modules.
• Chapter 5 for the PM-D power module and all motor starters
Power Terminal modules for safety integrated SIGUARD system

modules
TM-PF30 S47 TM-X15

S27-01
-B0 1) -B1 2) -C0 1) -C1 3) -D0
PM-D F1 X X
PM-D F2 X X
PM-D F3 X X
PM-D F4 X X
PM-D F5 X
PM-X X
1
) For suitable power module in subordinate, cascaded safety groups
(potential subgroup).
2
) For suitable power module in higher-order or standalone safety group
(potential group).
3
) For expansion with suitable power module in separate ET 200S stations
(potential subgroup).
Table 9-1: Assignment of the terminal modules for SIGUARD modules
Color coding labels

1. You can apply the color coding labels in the opening provided next to the ter-
minal directly from the strip.

Terminals 1/8, 2/9, 4/11, etc. are bridged in the terminal module and can be
used to loop the potentials through (through-connection terminals).

9-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
9.2.2 Features
The following features apply only for the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules
• TM-PF30 S47-B terminal modules for PM-D F1/F2 power modules
• TM-PF30 S47-C terminal modules for PM-D F3/F4 power modules
• TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal modules for PM-D F5 power modules
• The terminal module consists of a support and a terminal block.
• Start of a group of motor starters with safety integrated system
(see also Section 9.6)
9.2.3 Models
There are two TM-PF30 S47-B terminal-module models:
• TM-PF30 S47-B0 (can be used to the right of a B0, B1, C1)

Terminal module for potential subgroup,
sensor connection; for example, emergency stop, protective door
(see Sections 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.9).
• TM-PF30 S47-B1 (is required at the start of a potential group)
Terminal module for potential group,
with infeed U1, U2, sensor connection,
(see Sections 9.6.1 - 9.6.4, 9.6.7 - 9.6.16).
There are two TM-PF30 S47-C terminal module models:
• TM-PF30 S47-C0 (can be used to the right of a B0, B1, C1)

Terminal module for potential subgroup, U2 infeed
(function, see Section 9.6.11, 9.6.12).
• TM-PF30 S47-C1 (can be used to continue a potential group in a new row)
Terminal module for potential group, U1, U2 infeed,
(function, see Section 9.6.13).
The TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal module is suitable for:

• connecting up to 4 external floating safety circuits
(see Sections 9.6.14 and 9.6.15 for details).

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-5
9.2.4 View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules
-B0 -B1
-C0 -C1
-D0
Figure 9-2: View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules

9-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
9.2.5 Terminal assignments
TM-PF30 S47-B0
Termi- Meaning View Termi- Meaning

nal nal
1/8 - Not used 17/24 Throughfeed

terminal,
2
2 floating
2/9 - Not used 2 22 ON ON button

3
3/10 - Not used 1 2

23 ON
7 4
4/11 - Not used 25 Ch 1 Channel 1 for
2
5 EMERGENCY
5/12 - Not used 26 Ch 1 STOP or pro-
2 tective door
6
6/13 OUT+ Drive for other safety 1 2 27 Ch 2 Channel 2 for

6 3 7
integrated devices with EMERGENCY
7/14 OUT- 24 VDC / 50 mA 28 Ch 2 STOP or pro-
1 2
7 4 8 tective door
- AUX1 Fed through without ter-

minals
Table 9-2: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-B0 terminal module
TM-PF30 S47-B1

nal nal
1/8 L+ U1: Power supply for 17/24 Throughfeed

electronic components terminal,
2
URATED = 24 VDC 1 8 2 floating
2/9 M 2 9
2 22 ON ON button
3
3/10 - Not used 1 2

23 ON
7 4
4/11 A1+ U2: Contactor supply 25 Ch 1 Channel 1 for
1 2
URATED = 24 VDC 4 1 5 EMERGENCY
5/12 A2- 26 Ch 1 STOP or pro-
5
1
2
2
6
tective door
6/13 OUT+ Drive for other safety 1 2 27 Ch 2 Channel 2 for

6 3 7
integrated devices with EMERGENCY
7/14 OUT- 24 VDC / 50 mA 28 Ch 2 STOP or pro-
1 2
7 4 8 tective door

minals
Table 9-3: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-B1 terminal module

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-7
TM-PF30 S47-C0
Terminal Meaning View Terminal Meaning
1/8 - Not used 17/24 - Not used

2/9 - Not used 22 - Not used
3/10 - Not used 23 - Not used
4/11 A1+ U2: Contactor supply 25 - Not used
URATED = 24 VDC
5/12 A2- 26 -
6/13 OUT+ Drive for other safety 1 27 -
4 1
integrated devices with
7/14 OUT- 28 -
24 VDC / 50 mA 1
5 2
- AUX1 Fed through without
terminals 6
1
3
1
7 4
Table 9-4: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-C0 terminal module
TM-PF30 S47-C1
1/8 L+ U1: Power supply for 17/24 - Not used

electronic components
2/9 M 2 22 RF1 Feedback loop
URATED = 24 VDC 1 8 2
23 RF2
2
3/10 - Not used 2 9 3 25 - Not used
4/11 A1+ U2: Contactor supply 26 -
URATED = 24 VDC
5/12 A2- 27 IN+ Drive from
1
4 1 PM-D F1 to 4
OUT+
1
5 2
6/13 OUT+ Drive for other safety 28 IN- Drive from
integrated devices with 1 2
PM-D F1 to 4 OUT-
24 VDC / 50 mA 6 3 7
7/14 OUT-
1 2
- AUX1 Fed through without ter- 7 4 8
minals
Table 9-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-C1 terminal module

9-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
TM-PF30 S47-D0

4/11 OUT 1.1 18/25 OUT 3.1
Enabling circuit 1 Enabling circuit 3
5/12 OUT 1.2 19/26 OUT 3.2
6/13 OUT 2.1 11 2 20/27 OUT 4.1
4 18 5
Enabling circuit 2 Enabling circuit 4
7/14 OUT 2.2 21/28 OUT 4.2
11 2
5 29 6
- AUX1 Fed through with-
out terminals 12 2
6 30 7
12 2
7 41 8
Table 9-6: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal module
9.2.6 Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 30 x 102 x 196.5
Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5)
(mm 2)
AWG cables,
Wiring

Table 9-7: Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-9
9.2.7 TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module
Features
• TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-X connection module
• The terminal module consists of a support and a terminal block.
• Termination of a group of motor starters with safety integrated system for
connection of an external infeed contactor with auxiliary contact and
switched supply voltage (see also Section 9.6.1)
• Connection of a group of motor starters with safety integrated system to an
external safety combination; only in conjunction with TM-P15 S27-01
(see also Section 9.6.6)
Models
Both the above applications are covered by a single model.
View of TM-X15 S27-01
Figure 9-3: TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module

9-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-X15 S27-01
terminal module for the PM-X connection module.
View Terminal Meaning
1 RF 1 Connection of the auxiliary switch to

2 RF 2 infeed contactor for monitoring the switch
1
position (RF = feedback loop)
6 AUX2 Connect to A1+ of the infeed contactor
7 AUX3 Connect to A2- of the infeed contactor

6
- AUX1 Fed through without terminals
7
Table 9-8: Terminal assignment of the TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module for the PM-X connection
module
Color coding labels

Important
If there is no infeed contactor connected to the PM-X connection module,
jumper the feedback loop with terminals 1 and 2.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-11
Technical specifications - TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 15 x 102 x 196.5
Depth with connection module (mm) 117.5
Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5)
(mm 2)
AWG cables,
Wiring

Table 9-9: Technical specifications - TM-X15 S27-01

9-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
9.3 Power modules PM-D F1 to 5

Features
Feature PM-D F
1 2 3 4 5
Basic units are X X
Basic unit required for X X X
Suitable for applications up to safety category (EN 954-1). 4 4 3 4 4
(PM-D F3 to 5: max. is the category of the basic unit F1, F2).
Emergency stop circuit with monitored start. X
Protective-door circuit with automatic start. X
Expansion with delay from 0.5 to 30 s (steplessly variable). X
Cover for time setting takes a lead seal.
For integrating other ET 200S rails in an emergency stop circuit. X X
2-channel sensor polling. X X
All inputs cross-circuit-proof. X X
Two enabling circuits as normally-open contacts (for shutting down the motor X X X X
starters).
Four enabling circuits as normally-open contacts (floating, for any use). X
One output for driving plug-in devices (max. 50 mA). X X X X
Each time the emergency stop device runs an emergency stop cycle, the switch- X X X
ing elements of the motor starters are checked to ensure that they open and
close correctly.
Each time the protective door is actuated, the switching elements of the motor X
starters are checked to ensure that they open and close correctly.
A short-circuit in the sensor circuit triggers the internal electronic fuse. The X X
device is again fully operational as soon as the short-circuit has been rectified.
Welded contacts in any release circuits are detected and prevent the device from X X
restarting.
Welded contacts in any release circuits are detected and prevent the PM-D F1/ X X X
F2 basic device from restarting.
Two redundant internal safety relays protect the contactor supply U 2 (CON). X X X X
Plug-in for TM-PF30 S47-B0 and ...-B1. X X
Plug-in for TM-PF30 S47-C0 and ...-C1. X X
Plug-in for TM-PF30 S47-D0 X
The power module conducts the voltages for supplying the electronic compo- X X X X
nents to the voltage buses of the terminal modules. It does this for all the motor
starters in a potential group.
Monitoring of the U1 (PWR) and U2 (CON) voltages (U2 not in the case of PM- X X X X X
D F5). Voltage failures are displayed and reported.
Table 9-10: Features of the SIGUARD PM-D F1 to 5 power modules

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-13
Caution
Power modules can be neither inserted nor removed during operation.
Connect only floating contacts to:

- the ON circuit (terminals 22/23)
- the sensor circuits (terminals 25/26 and 27/28)
- the feedback circuit.
Views
LEDs: LEDs:
SF Group error SF Group error
PWR (power) (U1) PWR (power) (U1)

CON (contactor) (U2) CON (contactor) (U2)
STAT status indicator for STAT status indicator for
safety relay safety relay
Delay 0.5 to 30 s
PM-D F1, F2, F4 power modules PM-D F3 power module
LEDs:
SF Group error
PWR (power) (U1)
STAT status indicator for safety relay
PM-D F5 power module
Figure 9-4: Views of the SIGUARD PM-D F1 to 5 power modules

9-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Mechanical coding of the modules

When the module is first inserted, the terminal module is mechanically coded
(two coding elements) to ensure that, in the event of a fault, it can only be
replaced by a module with identical functions.
Note the configured structure when installing, and identify the terminal modules
with the labeling strips.
9.3.1 Parameters
The following table indicates the bus parameter that can be set for the PM-D F1
to 5 power modules.

value range

• Enable
Table 9-11: Parameters for SIGUARD PM-D F1 to 5 power modules
Group diagnosis:
Note
Process and diagnosis telegrams

None

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-15
9.3.2 Electrical configuration
Block circuit diagram for PM-D F1, F2

The illustration below is a basic circuit diagram of the SIGUARD power mod-
ules, using the
• PM-D F1, emergency stop with monitored start by way of example.
• PM-D F2, protective door with automatic start.
L+ ON ON CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 A1+
1/8 22 23 25 26 27 28 4/11
ϑ PTC PTC ϑ
fuse fuse
PSU Chnl.
1
Control logic
Chnl.
2
RF ET 200S VA2- VA2+ AUX2 AUX3

Bus
2/9 7/14 5/12 6/13
M OUT - A2- OUT +
Figure 9-5: Basic circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F1, F2 power modules with
TM-PF30 S47-B1
Explanation
OUT +/- is a safe output for driving other safety integrated devices
(e. g. PM-D F3, F4).
The procedure for commissioning is as follows:
• Connect the supply voltage U1 to the L+ and M terminals.
• Connect the supply voltage U2 to the A1+ and A2- terminals.
• PM-D F1: The emergency stop circuits connected to the CH1 and CH2
terminals must be closed.
PM-D F2: Terminals 22-23 (ON) must be jumpered for autostart mode.
The protective-door circuits connected to the CH1 and CH2
terminals must be closed.
The system starts up:

• PM-D F1: As soon as the ON button at the ON terminals is pressed.
The emergency stop circuits and the ON button are monitored
for cross-circuit during operation. Permanent jumpering of the
ON terminals is not permissible.
• PM-D F2: As soon as the ON terminals are closed.
The protective door circuits are monitored for cross-circuit
during operation.
If two or more safety integrated modules are cascaded, the total reaction time
of 200 ms must be borne in mind.

9-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Block circuit diagram for PM-D F3, F4

The illustration below is a basic circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F3, F4
power modules.
L+ 1) IN+ 1) IN- 1) A1+ OUT - RF 1)
1/8 27 28 4/11 7/14 22
RF
applicable only for ϑ
PTC
PM-D F3 fuse
PSU Ch.
1
Control logic
Ch.
2
ET 200S VA2- AUX3 VA2+ AUX2 RF RF

Bus
2/9 5/12 6/13 23
M 1) A2- OUT + RF 1)
with TM-PF30 in the case of the

1
) only present in the case of TM-PF30 S47-C1
S47-C1 S47-C0
Figure 9-6: Basic circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F3, F4 power modules with
TM-PF30 S47-C1 or C0
Explanation
IN +/- is the input for safe driving by an upline safety integrated device (e. g.
PM-D F1 to 4).
OUT +/- is a safe output for driving other safety integrated devices
(e. g. PM-D F3, F4).
• Connect the supply voltage U1 to the L+ and M terminals 1).
• Connect the supply voltage U2 to the A1+ and A2- terminals.
• The PM-D F3/F4 power module must be integrated via the RF1 and RF2 ter-
minals into the feedback circuit of the PM-D F1/F2 basic device 1).
• Connect the drive of the upline safety integrated device (e.g. PM-D F1 to 4)
to the IN+/- terminals 1).
1)
Applicable to TM-PF30 S47-C1 only.
PM-D F3 only:
• The PM-D F3 power module shuts down when the preset time has elapsed.
If two or more safety integrated modules are cascaded, the total reaction time
of 200 ms must be borne in mind.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-17
Block circuit diagram for PM-D F5

The illustration below is a basic circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F5 power
module.
.
OUT OUT OUT OUT
1.1 2.1 3.1 4.1
4/ 6/ 18/ 20/
11 13 25 27
A1+ A2- RF
PSU Ch.
L+ 1
Control logic
Ch.
M 2
RF
ET 200S 5/ 7/ 19/ 21/
Bus 12 14 26 28
OUT OUT OUT OUT

1.2 2.2 3.2 4.2
Figure 9-7: Block circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F5 power module
Explanation
The ET 200S expansion module PM-D F5 can be used only in conjunction with a
PM-D F1 to 4. The PM-D F5 can be installed at any position between a PM-D F1
to 4 and the associated PM-X.
• The U1 and U2 supply voltages are carried by the internal wiring.
• Connect the floating enabling circuits to the OUT 1.1 - OUT 4.2 terminals.
• The PM-D F5 power module is integrated via the internal wiring into the feed-
back circuit of the PM-D F1, F2 basic device.

9-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
9.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to 5

Mechanical life 10 x 106 switching cycles
Electrical life > 200 000 switching cycles at I e
Ambient temperature 0 to 60 °C
Degree of protection IP 20
Utilization category DC-13
Control times
• Minimum command duration, PM-
D F1, F2 200 ms
• Switch-on delay, PM-D F3 to 5 < 150 ms
• Recovery time
- PM-D F1, F2 <1s
- PM-D F3 to 5 < 50 ms
• Release time:
- PM-D F1, F2, F4 30 ms
- PM-D F5 15 ms
- PM-D F3 0.5 to 30 s (steplessly adjustable)
Setting precision ≤±15 % referenced to end of scale value
Control circuit U1 (PWR):
Power consumption 2.4 W
Recommended short-circuit protection (gG)gL 2 A
Loadability of OUT+/- 24 VDC / 50 mA (PTC fuse)
Switched auxiliary circuit U2 (CON), PM-D F1 to 4 or
floating enabling circuits, PM-D F5:
Rated operating current Ie
• 13 to 24 VDC 4A 3 A, PM-D F5
Thermal continuous current Ith 5A 3 A, PM-D F5

Recommended short-circuit protection Cartridge fuses:
for enabling circuits NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB
NEOZED type 5SE
Operating class (gG) gL 6 A
Supply of:
• Motor starters yes
Power input
From the backplane bus ≤10 mA
Connection
Cable length for
emergency stop and ON buttons max. 1000 m
Conductor cross-section 2 x 1.5 mm2
Standards, approvals
See the "SIGUARD and SIMATIC S5-95F
safety integrated systems" application
manual
BG yes
UL, CSA certification yes
SUVA certification planned
Table 9-12: Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to 5

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-19
9.4 Connection module PM-X

Features
• For connecting an external infeed contactor or other external actuators.
• For integrating into external safety circuits
View of PM-X
LED:
SF Group error
Figure 9-8: PM-X connection module
Technical specifications - PM-X connection module
Overall W x H x D (mm)
including terminal module 15 x 196.5 x 117.5
For information on the switched auxiliary circuit U2 at terminals 6 and 7

of the TM-X15 S27-01, see PM-D F1 to 5.
Power draw from the backplane bus ≤10 mA

Table 9-13: Technical specifications - PM-X
Important
If there is no infeed contactor connected to the PM-X connection module,
jumper the feedback loop with terminals 1 and 2.

9-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
9.5 ET 200S with safety integrated SIGUARD system

Monitoring motor starters
Operation of the motor starters is monitored in that the series-connected nor-
mally closed contacts of the feedback loop are connected by the terminal mod-
ules.
Power module 25
PM-D F1
26 EMERGENCY
27
L+ 1/8 28
STOP K0
U1 DS DS DS
M 2/9
22
U2
A1+ 4/11 23 ON
A2- 5/12 2 RF2
PM-X K0 Feedback
1 RF1
circuit Q1 Q2 Q3
K1 K2 K3 K1 K2 K3
PM-X F kits
AUX3 7 AUX2 6
K0 K1 K2 K3
Infeed Direct M M M
contactor starter
Figure 9-9: Circuit diagram for SIGUARD emergency stop circuit
An ET 200S is compatible with safety integration and can be converted (or

upgraded in the field) accordingly.
Fail-safe kits 1 and 2

For applications of safety category 2 (EN 954-1) and higher, the standard motor
starters with installation widths of 45/90 mm must be equipped with fail-safe
kits.
DS1e-x and RS1e-x high feature motor starters with installation widths of
65/130 mm incorporate the fail-safe functionality.
There are two fail-safe kits available and the components of both are listed
below:
• Fail-safe kit 1 for the DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters:
– An auxiliary switch block
– A contact holder with a connecting lead for the direct starter
– A contact carrier with two contacts for the terminal module (for infeed contactor)
– A contact carrier with three contacts for the terminal module (for feedback loop)
• Fail-safe kit 2 for the RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters:
– Two auxiliary switch blocks
– A contact holder with a connecting lead for the reversing starter
– Two contact carriers with two contacts for the terminal module (for infeed contac-
tor)
– Two contact carriers with three contacts for the terminal module (for feedback loop)
– A connecting lead

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-21
Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 1

The procedure for preparing the feedback loop for the emergency stop circuit in
the case of a DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starter is as follows:
1. Insert the contact carrier for the feedback loop (3 contacts) offset slightly to
the right into the top opening in the terminal module and then slide it to the
left.
2. Seat the contact carrier for the infeed contactor (2 contacts) in the bottom
opening of the terminal module.
3. Plug the contact holder with the connecting lead into the rear of the direct
starter.
4. Route the connecting lead to the front of the direct starter as shown in the
illustration.
5. Plug the auxiliary switch block into the appropriate opening in the direct
starter.
6. Connect the connecting lead to the auxiliary switch block.
3 6 1
4
2
Table 9-14: Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 1 - standard direct starters

9-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 2

The procedure for preparing the feedback loop for the emergency stop circuit in
the case of an RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starter is as follows:
Drawing Procedure
1 Starting at the left, insert the two contact

carriers with two contacts for the infeed
contactor into the two bottom openings
of the terminal module and make sure
they are correctly latched.
2 Insert a light gray contact carrier with

three contacts into the top left opening
2 and a dark gray contact carrier with
3 three contacts into the top right opening
of the terminal module and make sure
3 they are correctly latched.
1 1
4 Plug the contact holders with the con-

necting leads into the left opening in the
rear of the reversing starter.
Route the connecting leads through the

channel to the front of the reversing
starter.
Table 9-15: Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 2 - standard reversing starters

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-23
Drawing Procedure
5 Plug the two auxiliary switch blocks into

the appropriate openings in the reversing
starter.
6 Connect the connecting leads to the aux-

6 iliary switch blocks.
7 Connect the two auxiliary switch blocks

by means of the connecting lead.
Table 9-15: (cont.)Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 2 - standard reversing starters

9-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
9.6 Safety integrated system configurations

Standard motor starters with installation widths of 45/90 mm were used in the
following configurations. These examples can also be used for high feature
motor starters with installation widths of 65/130 mm.
High feature/fail-safe motor starters with installation widths of 65/130 mm
incorporate the F kit for SIGUARD.
Caution
Derating (see Section 2.4) is not taken into account in these configurations.
Safety note
The following applications are only some examples of typical circuits.
No liability is accepted for the reliability, certification or compatibility of the
examples. Use at your own risk.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-25
without SIGUARD with SIGUARD category 4
9-26
9.6.1
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9
DS DS RS PM-D DS DS RS
F1
PM-D
PM-X
Q1
Power
IM switch
Terminating module
151
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
K1
TM-PF30S47-B1
Infeed
Terminating cover
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-P15 S27-01
contactor
The components required to set up this example are as follows:
Category Order number Description
Figure 9-10: Safety circuit with integrated SIGUARD combination

1 2 3/4
11) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
without SIGUARD with SIGUARD category 4 1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
L+ 1 A1 6 L+ 1 A5 6 A9 12) 1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
AUX2 OUT+
8 13 8 13 1 RF 121 1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A
U1 U1
2 7 2 7 K1 1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
M AUX3 M OUT- 2
9 14 9 14 1 3RA1931-1A Connection module
RF 2 22
Safety circuit with integrated SIGUARD combination
22 13 1 3RV1031-4HA10 Circuit breaker, protection for

maximum configuration 40A
23 ON 2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating
24 14 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
17 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
A1+ 4 A1+ 4 27 EM. STOP
AUX2 1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with the current rating
11 11 25 11 21 6 A1
U2 U2 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed
5 5 26 7 K1 1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2
A2- A2- 1
12 12 28 12 22 A2 ) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-)
AUX3 2
) with jumper between terminals 1, 2

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
F kit 2
PE
N
E
6T3
3~
M

4T2

2T1
A
with SIGUARD category 4

Fault
A
E
A8
F kit 1
PE
N
E
6T3
3~
M
4T2
2T1
Fault
A
E
A7
F kit 1
PE
22
21
N
E
E
5L3 6T3
3~
M
3L2 4T2
1L1 2T1
Fault
A
E
A6
Q1
K1
6T3
3~
M
4T2
2T1
A
without SIGUARD
Fault
A
E
A4
E
E
6T3
3~
M
4T2
2T1
Fault
A
E
A3
5L3 6T3
3~
M
3L2 4T2
1L1 2T1
Fault
A
E
A2
1L1 400 VAC
1L3
1L2
PE
N
Figure 9-10: (cont.) Safety circuit with integrated SIGUARD combination
This configuration satisfies the requirements of all categories up to category 4

(EN 954-1) and employs an integral SIGUARD combination.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-27
Group 1 Group 2
9-28
9.6.2
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
PM-D DS DS PM-D DS DS
F1 F1
PM-X
PM-X
Q1 Q2
Power Power
IM switch switch
151
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 1
K1 K2
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
Infeed Infeed
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
contactor contactor
Group 1 Group 2 1 2 3/4
Figure 9-11: Two safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations

21) PM-D 3RK1903-0BA00
2 TM-P15 S27-01 3RK1903-0AA00
2 2 PM-D F1 3RK1903-1BA00
A1 A4 A5 A8 2 2 TM-PF30 S47-B1 3RK1903-1AA00
L+ 1 6 L+ 1 6
OUT+ OUT+ 2 2 PM-X 3RK1903-1CB00
8 13 1 RF 121 8 13 1 RF 121
U1 U1 22) 2 TM-X15 S27-01 3RK1903-1AB00
M 2 7 K1 M 2 7 K2
OUT- 2 OUT- 2 2 3RT1035-1BB40
Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A
9 14 9 14 RF 2 22
RF 2 22 2 3RH1921-1DA11
Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
22 13 22 13 2 3RA1931-1A
Connection module
ON ON 2 3RV1031-4HA10
Circuit breaker, protection for
23 23
14 14 maximum configuration 40A
24 24 4 4 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current
Two safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations
17 17 rating
4 27 EM. STOP 4 27 EM. STOP 2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
A1+ AUX2 A1+ AUX2
11 25 11 21 6 A1 11 25 11 21 6 A1 2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
U2 U2 4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
K1 7 K2 1
A2- 5 26 7 A2- 5 26 ) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-)
12 22 A2 12 22 A2 2
12 28 12 28 ) each with jumper between terminals 1, 2
AUX3 AUX3

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
F kit 1
PE
N
E
6T3
3~

M
4T2

2T1
Fault
A
E
Group 2
A7
F kit 1
PE

22
21
N
E
5L3 6T3
3~
M
3L2 4T2
1L1 2T1
Fault
A
E
A6
Q2
K2
F kit 1
E
E
6T3
3~
M
4T2
Group 1
2T1
Fault
A
E
A3
F kit 1
22
21
E
5L3 6T3
3~
M
3L2 4T2
1L1 2T1
Fault
A
E
A2
1L1 400V AC
Q1
K1
1L2
1L3
PE
N
Figure 9-11: (cont.) Two safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations
This configuration satisfies the requirements of all categories up to category 4

(EN 954-1) and employs two integral SIGUARD combinations.
The emergency stop circuits are mutually independent:

• Emergency stop circuit 1 switches only group 1.
• Emergency stop circuit 2 switches only group 2.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-29
Group 1
9-30
9.6.3
Group 1.1
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
F1 F1
PM-X
PM-X
Q1 Q2
Power Power
IM switch switch
151
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
K1 K2
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-B0
TM-X15 S27-01
Infeed Infeed
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
contactor contactor

Group 1
(potential group, potential subgroup)
Group 1.1 1 2 3/4

21) 3RK1903-0BA00
PM-D
2 3RK1903-0AA00
TM-P15 S27-01
2 2 3RK1903-1BA00
PM-D F1
L+ 1 A1 6 A4 A5 6 A8 1 1 3RK1903-1AA10
TM-PF30 S47-B0
OUT+ OUT+
Figure 9-12: Two cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations
8 13 1 RF 121 13 1 RF 1 21 1 1 3RK1903-1AA00
TM-PF30 S47-B1
U1
2 7 K1 7 K2 2 2 3RK1903-1CB00
PM-X
M OUT- 2 OUT- 2
9 14 14 22 22) 2 3RK1903-1AB00
TM-X15 S27-01
RF 1 22 RF 2
22 13 22 13 2 3RT1035-1BB40
2 3RH1921-1DA11
23 ON 23 ON
2 3RA1931-1A Connection module
24 14 24 14
2 3RV1031-4HA10
Circuit breaker, protection for maximum
17 17 configuration 40A
4 4 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating
A1+ 4 27 EM. STOP 27 EM. STOP
AUX2 AUX2 2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
11 25 11 21 6 A1 25 11 21 6 A1
U2 2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
5 26 7 K1 26 7 K2 4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
A2- 1
12 28 12 22 A2 28 12 22 A2 )Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-)
Two cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations
AUX3 AUX3 2
) each with jumper between terminals 1, 2

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
F kit 1
PE
N
E
6T3

3~
M
4T2

2T1
Fault
Group 1.1
A
E
A7
F kit 1
PE

22
21
N
E
5L3 6T3
3~
M
3L2 4T2
1L1 2T1
Fault
A
E
A6
Q2
K2
F kit 1
Group 1
E
6T3
3~
M
4T2
2T1
Fault
A
E
A3
F kit 1
22
21
E
5L3 6T3
3~
M
3L2 4T2
1L1 2T1
Fault
A
E
A2
1L1 400V AC
Q1
K1
1L3
1L2
PE
Figure 9-12: (cont.) Two cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations N
This configuration is identical with that in Section 9.6.2. Cascading is achieved

by plugging the second PM-D F1 power module into the
TM-PF30 S47-B0 terminal module.
The circuits have to be cascaded if you use two emergency stop circuits which
respond in the manner described below:
• Emergency stop circuit 1 (potential group) shuts down all of the motor start-
ers, i.e. those in group 1 and group 1.1, but the relays of the PM-D F1 do not
shut down group 1.1.
Note the following:
- OUT+ and OUT- remain energized in PM-D F1 group 1.1
- the ON command for restart is required only for PM-D F1 group 1.
• Emergency stop circuit 1.1 (potential subgroup) shuts down only some of the
motor starters, i.e. only those in group 1.1

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-31
Group 1
9-32
9.6.4
Group 1.1
Group 1.1.1
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10
PM-D DS PM-D DS PM-D DS DS
F1 F1 F1
PM-X
PM-X
PM-X
Q1 to 3
Power
switch
IM
151
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
K1 to 3
Infeed
contactor
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-B0
TM-PF30 S47-B0
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
Group 1 Category Order number Description

(potential group, potential subgroup)
Group 1.1 1 2 3/4

31) 3RK1903-0BA00
PM-D
Group 1.1.1 3 3RK1903-0AA00
TM-P15 S27-01
3 3 3RK1903-1BA00
PM-D F1
1 A1 6 A3 A4 6 A6 2 2 3RK1903-1AA10
TM-PF30 S47-B0
L+ OUT+ OUT+ A7, A10
8 13 1 RF 121 13 1 RF 121 1 1 3RK1903-1AA00
TM-PF30 S47-B1
Figure 9-13: Three cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations
U1 with K3 3 3 3RK1903-1CB00
PM-X
M 2 7 K1 7
OUT- 2 OUT- 2 K2 configuration
32) 3 3RK1903-1AB00
TM-X15 S27-01
9 14 14
RF 1 22 RF 2 22 same as 3 3RT1035-1BB40
Infeed contactor for max.configuration 40 A
22 13 22 13
Group 1.1 3 3RH1921-1DA11
23 ON 23 ON 3 3RA1931-1A
Connection module
24 14 24 14 3 3RV1031-4HA10
17 17
4 4 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the
A1+ 4 27 EM. STOP 27 EM. STOP current rating
AUX2 AUX2
11 25 11 21 6 A1 25 11 21 6 A1 3 3 3 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
U2 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
5 26 7 K1 26 7 K2
A2- 4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
12 28 12 22 A2 28 12 22 A2 1
AUX3 AUX3 ) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-)
Three cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations
2) each with jumper between terminals 1, 2

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
F kit 1
PE
N
E
6T3
3~

M
4T2

2T1
Fault
Group 1.1.1
E
A
A9
F kit 1
PE

22
21
N
E
Group 1.1
5L3 6T3
3~
M
3L2 4T2
1L1 2T1
Fault
A
E
A8
Q3
K3
F kit 1
Group 1
22
21
E
5L3 6T3
3~
M
3L2 4T2
1L1 2T1
Fault
A
E
A5
Q2
K2
F kit 1
22
21
E
5L3 6T3
3~
M
3L2 4T2
1L1 2T1
Fault
A
E
A2
1L1 400V AC
Q1
K1
1L2
1L3
PE
Figure 9-13: (cont.) Three cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations N
This configuration is identical with that in Section 9.6.2. Cascading is achieved

by plugging the second and third PM-D F1 power modules into a
TM-PF30 S47-B0 terminal module each.
The circuits have to be cascaded if you use three emergency stop circuits which
respond in the manner described below:
• Emergency stop circuit 1 (potential group) shuts down all of the motor start-
ers, i.e. those in group 1, group 1.1 and group 1.1.1, but the relays of the PM-
D F1 do not shut down group 1.1 and group 1.1.1.
Note the following:
- OUT+ and OUT- remain energized in PM-D F1 group 1.1 and group 1.1.1
- the ON command for restart is required only for PM-D F1 group 1.
• Emergency stop circuit 1.1 (potential subgroup) switches off only the motor
starters in group 1.1 and group 1.1.1.
Note the following:
- OUT+ and OUT- remain energized in PM-D F1 group 1.1.1
- the ON command for restart is required only for PM-D F1 group 1.1.
• Emergency stop circuit 1.1.1 (potential subgroup) switches off only the motor
starters in group 1.1.1.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-33
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 K1
9-34
9.6.5
DS DS RS
PM-D
PM-X
PM-X
3TK2824
IM
151
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
category 2
Terminating cover
TM-P15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
L+
11
EM. STOP The components required to set up this example are as follows:
12
13
U1 Category Order number Description
A1 K1 Y1 1 A1 6 A2 ON A6 2
L+ AUX2
8 13 1 RF 1 14 1 RF 1 1 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
U1
A2 Y2 2 7 1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
M M AUX3 2 2
9 14 2 3RK1 03-1CB00 PM-X
RF 2 RF 2
Figure 9-14: Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2824, category 2
2 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current
rating
1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
2 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
A1+ 13 14 A1+ 4
1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with the current
U2 11 6 6 AUX2 rating
AUX2
Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2824,
1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed

23 24 A2- 5 7 7 AUX3
U2 AUX3 1 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2
12
1 3TK2824-xCB30 External safety combination
x in accordance with the connection
A2-

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
F kit 2
PE
N
E
6T3
3~
M
4T2

2T1

Fault
A
E
A5
F kit 1
PE
N
E
6T3
3~
M
4T2
Fault 2T1
A
E
A4
F kit 1
PE
N
E
5L3 E 6T3
3~
M
3L2 4T2
1L1 2T1
Fault
A
E
A3
1L1 400V AC
1L2
1L3
PE
N
Figure 9-14: (cont.) Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2824, category 2
This configuration integrates ET 200S components into external safety con-

cepts. This configuration satisfies the requirements of category 2 and employs
a safety combination.
The monitored motor starters connect to the right of the load feeders.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-35
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 K2
9-36
9.6.6
DS DS RS
PM-D
PM-X
PM-X
3TK2823
Q1
Power
IM switch
Terminating module
151
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
K1
Infeed
Terminating cover
TM-P15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
contactor

1 2 3/4
1 1 1 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
2 2 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
13 21) 2 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
ON A6 1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40
L+ A1 K2 Y33 L+ 1 A1 6 A2 A
8 13 AUX2 1 RF 1 14 1 RF 121
U1 U1 1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
M A2 Y34 M 2 7 AUX3 K1 1 3RA1931-1A Connection module
2 2
9 14 RF 2 22 1 3RV1031-4HA10 Circuit breaker, protection for max. config. 40A
Y11 EM. STOP RF 2
Figure 9-15: Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2823, category 4
2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current
Y21 11 21 rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
Y22
12 22 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
Y12
2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
13 14 A1+ 4 1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with the current
A1+ AUX2 rating
6 6 A1
Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2823
U2 11 AUX2 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed

7 K1 1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2
23 24 A2- 5 7
U2 AUX3 A2 1 3TK2823-xCB30 External safety combination
12 AUX3 x in accordance with the connection
1
) With module A6 jumper between terminals 1, 2
A2-

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
F kit 2
PE
N
E
6T3
3~
M
4T2

2T1

Fault
A
E
A5
F kit 1
PE
N
E
6T3
3~
M
4T2
Fault 2T1
A
E
A4
F kit 1
PE
22
21
N
E
5L3 E 6T3
3~
M
3L2 4T2
1L1 2T1
Fault
A
E
A3
1L1 400V AC
Q1
K1
1L2
1L3
PE
N
Figure 9-15: (cont.) Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2823, category 4
This configuration integrates ET 200S components into external safety con-

cepts. This configuration satisfies the requirements of all categories up to
category 4 and employs a safety combination.
The monitored motor starters connect to the right of the load feeders.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-37
Category 4 to EN 954-1 Category 1
9-38
9.6.7
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
PM-D DS DS RS
F1
PM-X
PM-E
2DO
2DO
2DI
Q1
Power
IM switch
151 Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
K1
TM-PF30 S47-B1
Infeed
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
contactor
Figure 9-16: Safety circuit incorporating pneumatic valves

Category 4 to EN 954-1 Category 1
Safety circuit incorporating pneumatic valves
L+ 1 A1 6 A5 A6 A7
OUT+
8 13 1 RF 1 21
U1 2 1 DO0
M 2 7 K1
OUT- 2
9 14
RF 2 22 6 5 DO1
22 13
23 ON
24 14
AUX1 4 8 4 8
17
A1+ 4 27 EM. STOP AUX2 24 VDC 2
11 25 11 21 6 A1
U2 6 3 7
5 26 7 K1 M 3
A2- Y2 Y1
12 28 12 22 A2 7
AUX3

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Category 4 to EN 954-1
1 2 3/4 1L1 400V AC
1L2
11) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D 1L3
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1 Q1
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
21
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
12) 1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A K1
1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 22
1L1
5L3
3L2

1 3RV1031-4HA10 Circuit breaker, protection for A2 A3 A4
rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 E E E
1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with the current Fault Fault Fault
rating E F kit 1 E F kit 1 E F kit 2
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed A A A A
1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2
1 6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 PM-E
1 6ES7193-4CC20-0AA0 TM-P15 S23-A1 E E E
Figure 9-16: (cont.) Safety circuit incorporating pneumatic valves

1 6ES7132-4BBxx-xxxx 2DO x depending on type
1 6ES7193-4CA20-0AA0 TM-E15 S24-A1
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
2 XXX Pneumatic valves

1) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-)
2
) with jumper between terminals 1, 2
N
N
N
PE
PE
PE
PE
M M M
3~ 3~ 3~

capability of the ET 200S SIGUARD for category 1 to EN 954-1.

This configuration incorporates pneumatic valves into the safety shutdown

9-39
9-40
9.6.8
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
PM-D DS DS RS
F1
PM-X
PM-E
2DO
2DO
2DI
Q1
Power
IM switch
151
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
K1 K2
Motor
TM-PF30 S47-B1
Infeed
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
contactor contactor
Figure 9-17: Safety circuit incorporating external actuators

1 A1 6 A5 A6 A7 A8
Safety circuit incorporating external actuators
L+ OUT+
8 13 1 RF 1 1 DO0 1 DO0
U1 21 2 2
M 2 7 K1
OUT- 2
9 14 22
RF 2 21 6 5 DO1 6 5 DO1
22 13 K2
22
23 ON 21
A1
14 Y1 21
24 22 8 4 8 4 8 21
21 AUX1 4 K2
17 22 22
Y2
4 27 EM. STOP AUX2 22 A2 Y2
A1+ 24 VDC 2
11 25 11 21 6 A1
21 6 3 7 3 7
U2
5 26 7 K1 22 M 3
A2-
12 28 12 22 A2 Y1 7
AUX3

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
The components required to set up this example are as follows: Category 4 to EN 954-1
Category Order number Description 1L1 400V AC

1 2 3/4 1L2
1L3
11) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
Q1
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X 21
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1 1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01 K1
1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A 22
1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
1L1
5L3
3L2

1 3RV1031-4HA10 Circuit breaker, protection for
rating A2 A3 A4
2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with the current
rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed E E E
1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2 Fault Fault Fault
1 1 1 3RT1034-1BB44 Motor contactor E F kit 1 E F kit 1 E F kit 2
SIGUARD for category 4 to EN 954-1.

1 1 Auxiliary switch for motor contactor (if necessary) K2 1 3 5 21
A A A A
Figure 9-17: (cont.) Safety circuit incorporating external actuators

1 1 1 6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 PM-E
1 1 1 6ES7193-4CC20-0AA0 TM-P15 S23-A1 2 4 6 22
E E E
2 2 2 6ES7132-4BBxx-xxxx 2DO x depending on type
2 2 2 6ES7193-4CA20-0AA0 TM-E15 S24-A1
1 XXX Main valve
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
4T2
1 1 1 XXX Pneumatic valve

1 2 XXX Limit switches for pneumatic/main valves
N
N
1) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-) N
PE
PE
PE
PE
M M M M
Pneumatics 3~ 3~ 3~ 3~
21
Y1 Main valve
22 E = integrated input for programming
21 21 21
Y2
22 22 22
feeders rated > 5.5 kW) into the safety shutdown capability of the ET 200S
This configuration incorporates external actuators (e.g. pneumatic valves, load
9-41
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
9-42
9.6.9
PM-D PM-D DS DS RS
F1 F2
PM-X
PM-X
Q1
Power
IM switch
151
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
K1
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-B0
Infeed
Terminating cover
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
contactor
Figure 9-18: Emergency stop combined with protective door

L+ 1 A1 6 A2 A3 6 A7
OUT+ OUT+
8 13 1 RF 1 13 1 RF 121
U1
Emergency stop combined with protective door
M 2 7 7 K1
OUT- 2 OUT- 2
9 14 14
RF 2 RF 2 22
22 13 22
23 ON 23
24 14 24
17 17
4 27 EM. STOP 27 Protective door AUX2
A1+
11 25 11 21 6 25 11 21 6 A1
U2 AUX2
5 26 7 26 7 K1
A2- AUX3
12 28 12 22 28 12 22 A2
AUX3

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
The components required to set up this example are as follows: 1L1 400V AC
1L2
Category Order number Description 1L3
1 2 3/4
Q1
11) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1 21
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1 K1
1 1 3RK1903-1BB00 PM-D F2 22
1 1 3RK1903-1AA10 TM-PF30 S47-B0
1L1
3L2
5L3
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
2 2 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
2 2
A2 A3 A4
2 ) 2 ) 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A

maximum configuration 40A E E E
2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current Fault Fault Fault
rating F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 2
E E E
to category 4 to EN 954-1.
A A A A
2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with the current E E E
rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed
1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
1 1 1 3SBxx Personnel protection switchxx type

1) Emergency-stop and protective-door contacts looped into infeed for
Figure 9-18: (cont.) Emergency stop combined with protective door

N
N
N
PE
PE
PE
supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-)

2) Important PE
With no infeed contactor connected to the PM-X connection module,
jumper the feedback circuit with terminals 1 and 2. M M M
3~ 3~ 3~

This configuration combines emergency stop and protective door monitoring up

9-43
Group 1
9-44
9.6.10
Group 1.1 Group 1.2
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10
PM-D DS PM-D DS DS PM-D DS
F1 F2 F2
PM-X
PM-X
PM-X
Q1 to 3
Power
IM switch
151
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
K1 to 3
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-B1
Infeed
Terminating cover
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
contactor
Group 1
Group 1.1 Group 1.2
L+ 1 A1 6 A3 L+ 1 A4 6 A7 L+ 1 A8 6 A10
OUT+ OUT+ OUT+
8 13 1 RF 121 8 13 1 RF 121 8 13 1 RF 121
U1 U1 U1
Figure 9-19: Emergency stop combined with 2 cascaded protective-door circuits

M 2 7 K1 M 2 7 K2 M 2 7 K3
OUT- 2 OUT- 2 OUT- 2
9 14 9 14 9 14
RF 2 22 RF 2 22 RF 2 22
22 13 22 13 22 13
23 ON 23 ON 23 ON
24 14 24 14 24 14
17 17 17
4 27 EM. STOP AUX2
A1+ 4 27 Protective door AUX2 A1+ 4 27 Protective door AUX2
A1+
11 25 11 21 6 A1 11 25 11 21 6 A1 11 25 11 21 6 A1
U2 U2 U2
5 26 7 K1 A2- 5 26 7 K2 A2- 5 26 7 K3
A2-
12 28 12 22 A2 12 28 12 22 A2 12 28 12 22 A2
AUX3 AUX3 AUX3
Emergency stop combined with 2 cascaded protective-door circuits

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Group 1
Group 1.1 Group 1.2
Category Order number Description 1L1 400V AC
1L2
1 2 3/4 1L3
11) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01 Q1 Q2 Q3
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1 21 21 21
2 2 3RK1903-1BB00 PM-D F2
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
2 2 3RK1903-1AA10 TM-PF30 S47-B1 K1 K2 K3
22 22 22
3 3 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
1L1
5L3
1L1
5L3
1L1
5L3
3L2
3L2
3L2
32) 3 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01

3 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A A2 A5 A6 A9
rating E E E E
Fault Fault Fault Fault
E F kit 1 E F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 1
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed E E
4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 A A A A
2 2 2 3SBxx Personnel protection switchxx type
1) Emergency-stop and protective-door contacts looped into infeed for
E E E E
2
) Important
jumper the feedback circuit with terminals 1 and 2.
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
4T2
4T2
N
N
PE
PE
monitoring circuits up to category 4 to EN 954-1.

M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~
Figure 9-19: (cont.) Emergency stop combined with 2 cascaded protective-door circuits
This configuration combines emergency stop and two cascaded protective door
9-45
EM. STOP 1
9-46
Category 2 Category 2
9.6.11
STOP CAT. 0 STOP CAT. 1

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
F1 F3
PM-X
IM
151
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-C0
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
Figure 9-20: Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 2

EM. STOP 1
L+ 1 A1 6 A4 6 A7
OUT+ OUT+
8 13 13 1 RF 1
U1
M 2 7 7
OUT- OUT- 2
9 14 14
RF 2
22 13
Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 2
23 ON
24 14
17
A1+ 4 27 EM. STOP A1+ 4
11 25 11 21 11 6
U2 U2 AUX2
A2- 5 26 A2- 5 7
12 22 AUX3
12 28 12

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
The components required to set up this example are as follows: EM. STOP 1
2
1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1 1L1 400 VAC
1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
1L2
1L3
1 3RK1903-1BD00 PM-D F3
1 3RK1903-1AC10 TM-PF30 S47-C0
1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
groups.
1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the
current rating
2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32

with power bus infeed
1L1
5L3
1L1
5L3
3L2
3L2
2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31

with power bus throughfeed A2 A3 A5 A6
4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
E E E E
E F kit 1 E F kit 1 E F kit 1 E F kit 1
A A A A
E E E E
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
4T2
4T2
Figure 9-20: (cont.) Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 2
N
N
PE
PE
PE
M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~

This configuration combines instantaneous (STOP category 0) and delayed

(STOP category 1) shutdown. This configuration consists of 2 potential or load
9-47
EM. STOP 1
9-48
9.6.12

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
F1 F3
PM-X
PM-X
Q1 Q2
Power Power
IM switch switch
151
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
K1 K2
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-C0
TM-X15 S27-01
Infeed Infeed
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
contactor contactor
EM. STOP 1
Figure 9-21: Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 3 or 4

L+ 1 A1 6 A4 A5 6 A8
OUT+ OUT+
8 13 1 13 1 RF 1 21
U1 RF 1
M 2 7 7 K1
OUT- 2 OUT- 2
9 14 RF 2 14 22
RF 2
22 13 21
23 ON K2
24 14 22
Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 3 or 4
17
A1+ 4 27 EM. STOP AUX2 A1+ 4 AUX2
11 25 11 21 6 A1 11 6 A1
U2 U2
5 26 7 K1 5 7 K2
A2- A2-
12 28 12 22 A2 12 A2
AUX3 AUX3

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
The components required to set up this example are as follows: EM. STOP 1
1 2 3/4
21) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D 1L1 400V AC
1L2
2 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01 1L3
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1 Q1 Q2
2)
1 1 3RK1903-1BD00 PM-D F3
groups.
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1 1 3RK1903-1AC10 TM-PF30 S47-C0
1 2 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X 21 21
Important
13) 24) 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01 K1 K2
2 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed contactor for max. configuration 40 A 22 22

1L1
5L3
1L1
5L3
3L2
3L2

2 3RA1931-1A Connection module A2 A3 A6 A7
rating
2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32
with power bus infeed E E E E
2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 Fault Fault Fault Fault
with power bus throughfeed F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 1
E E E E
4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
1
) Emergency stop looped into infeed for U2 supply voltage (A1+, A2-).2) A A A A
Time delay with standard timer relay
3) Important
Subassembly A4 is no longer needed. At the PM-X connection module E E E E
(subassembly A8), jumper the feedback circuit with terminals 1 and 2.
4) Caution
At the PM-X connection module bearing the subassembly designation A4,
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
4T2
4T2
make sure that terminals 1 and 2 are not jumpered.

N
N
PE
PE
Figure 9-21: (cont.) Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 3 or 4
PE
M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~

Category 3 to EN 954-1 is the maximum attainable with delayed stop.

This configuration combines instantaneous (STOP category 0) and delayed
(STOP category 1) shutdown. This configuration consists of 2 potential or load
9-49
EM. STOP 1
9-50
9.6.13
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
F1 F4
PM-X
PM-X
Q1 Q2
Power Power
IM switch IM switch
151 151
Terminating module
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP Profibus-DP
K1 K2
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-C1
TM-X15 S27-01
Infeed Infeed
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
Terminating cover
contactor contactor
EMERGENCY STOP 1 additional ET 200S rails
Figure 9-22: One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails
L+ 1 A1 6 OUT+ A4 L+ 1 A5 6 OUT+ A8 L+ 1 6
OUT+
8 13 1 RF 121 8 13 1 RF 121 8 13 1 RF 121
U1 U1 U1
M 2 7 OUT- K1 M 2 7 OUT- K2 M 2 7 K
2 2 OUT- 2
9 14 9 14 9 14
RF 2 22 RF 2 22 RF 2 22
22 22 RF 1 22 RF 1
23 23 RF 2 23 RF 2
13
One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails
24
ON
17 14
A1+ 4 27 EM. STOP AUX2 A1+ 4 27 IN+ AUX2 A1+ 4 27 IN+ AUX2
11 25 11 21 6 A1 11 28 IN- 6 A1 11 28 IN- 6 A1
U2 U2 U2
5 26 K1 5 K2 5 7 K
A2- 7 A2- 7 A2-
12 28 12 22 A2 12 A2 12 A2
AUX3 AUX3 AUX3

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
The components required to set up this example are as follows: EMERGENCY STOP 1
1L1 400V AC
1 2 3/4 1L2
11) 3RK1903-0BA00
PM-D 1L3
1 3RK1903-0AA00
TM-P15 S27-01
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00
PM-D F1 Q1 Q2
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00
TM-PF30 S47-B1
1 1 3RK1903-1BC00
PM-D F4 21 21
1 1 3RK1903-1AC00
TM-PF30 S47-C1
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
K1 K2
2 2 3RK1903-1CB00
PM-X 22 22
22) 2 3RK1903-1AB00
TM-X15 S27-01
1L1
3L2
5L3
1L1
3L2
5L3
2 3RT1035-1BB40

2 3RH1921-1DA11
A2 A3 A6 A7
2 3RV1031-4HA10
2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 E E E E
with power bus infeed Fault Fault Fault Fault
2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 1
with power bus throughfeed E E E E
4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 A A A A
1
circuit for category 4 to EN 954-1.

) Emergency-stop and protective-door contacts looped into infeed for
2)Important E E E E
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
4T2
4T2
Important
N
N
PE
PE
For each ET 200S rail the dropout time of the PM-D F4 PE
Figure 9-22: (cont.) One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails
increases by 30 ms.
M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~

This configuration incorporates additional ET 200S rails into the emergency stop
9-51
EMERGENCY STOP 1
9-52
9.6.14
EMERGENCY STOP 2
Shutdown group I Shutdown group II Shutdown group III
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11
PM-D DS PM-D DS PM-D PM-D DS DS
F1 F2 F1 F5
PM-X
PM-X
PM-X
Q1 to 3
Power
IM switch
151
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
K1 to 3
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-B0
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-D0
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
Infeed
Terminating cover
contactor
Figure 9-23: Two emergency-stop circuits, three shutdown groups

L+ 1 A1 6 A3 A4 6 A8 A6 L+ 1 A7 6 A11
OUT+ OUT+ OUT+
8 13 1 RF 121 13 1 RF 121 8 13 1 RF 121
U1 U1
M 2 7 K1 7 K2 M 2 7 K3
OUT- 2 OUT- 2 OUT- 2
9 14 14 9 14
RF 2 22 RF 2 22 RF 2 22
22 13 22 22 13
1.1 4 OUT 1 5 1.2
Two emergency-stop circuits, three shutdown groups
23 ON 23 11 12 23 ON
24 14 24 2.1 6 OUT 2 7 2.2 24 14
17 17 13 14 17
4 27 EM. STOP AUX2 27 3.118 OUT 3 19 3.2 AUX2 4 27 EM. STOP AUX2
A1+ A1+
11 25 11 21 6 A1 25 25 26 6 A1 11 25 11 21 6 A1
U2 4.1 20 OUT 4 21 4.2 U2
5 26 7 K1 26 7 K2 5 26 7 K3
A2- 27 28 A2-
12 28 12 22 A2 28 A2 12 28 12 22 A2
AUX3 AUX3 AUX3

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
EMERGENCY STOP 1
Category Order number Description EMERGENCY STOP 2
1 2 3/4 Shutdown gr. Shutdown gr.
Shutdown gr.
31) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D I III
II
3 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
2 2 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1L1 400V AC
2 2 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1L2
1 1 3RK1903-1BB00 PM-D F2 1L3
1 1 3RK1903-1AA10 TM-PF30 S47-B0
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1 1 3RK1903-1BE00 PM-D F5 Q1 Q2 Q3
1 1 3RK1903-1AD10 TM-PF30 S47-D0
3 3 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X

21 21 21
32) 3 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
K1 K2 K3
22 22 22
3 shutdown groups.
1L1
5L3
1L1
3L2
5L3
1L1
5L3
3L2
3L2

3 3RV1031-4HA10 Circuit breaker, protection for A2 A5 A9 A10
3 3 3 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31
with power bus throughfeed E E E E
4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
1 E F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 1
) Emergency-stop and protective-door contacts looped into infeed for E E E
supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-) A A A A
2)Important
E E E E
Figure 9-23: (cont.) Two emergency-stop circuits, three shutdown groups

2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
4T2
4T2
N
N
PE
PE
PE
M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~

This circuit illustrates how 2 emergency-stop circuits can be used to control

9-53
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 K2
9-54
PM-D PM-D DS DS
9.6.15
F1 F5
PM-X
3TK2822
Q1
Power
IM switch
151
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
F kit 1 F kit 1
K1
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-D0
TM-X15 S27-01
Infeed
Terminating cover
contactor
autonomous safety circuits
L+ 1 A1 6 A1 K2 Y33 13 A2 A5
OUT+
8 13 1 RF 121
U1 ON
M 2 7 A2 Y34 K1
OUT- 14 2
9 14 EM. STOP
Y11 RF 2 22
22 13
Y21 11 21 1.1 4 OUT 1 5 1.2
23 ON 11 12
14 Y22 22
24 12 2.1 6 OUT 2 7 2.2
Y12
17 13 14
Floating connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and
Figure 9-24: Floating connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous safety circuits
A1+ 4 27 EM. STOP 13 14 3.118 OUT 3 19 3.2 AUX2
11 25 11 21 25 26 6 A1
U2 4.1 20 OUT 4 21 4.2
5 26 23 24 7 K1
A2- 27 28
12 28 12 22 A2
AUX3

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1L1 400V AC
1L2
Category Order number Description 1L3
1 2 3/4
21) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D Q1
2 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1 21
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
K1
Note
1 1 3RK1903-1BE00 PM-D F5
22
1 1 3RK1903-1AD10 TM-PF30 S47-D0
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1L1
5L3
1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X 3L2
12) 1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01 A2 A3
1 1 3TK2822-xCB30 External safety combination

E E
1 3RV1031-4HA10 Circuit breaker, protection for Fault Fault
E F kit 1 E F kit 1
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 A A
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31
E E
into the ET 200S safety concept.

with power bus throughfeed
2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
1)Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-)
2
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
)with jumper between terminals 1, 2
Multiple PM-D F5 modules can be inserted.

PE
M M
3~ 3~

There are 4 floating contacts available for each PM-D F5.

Figure 9-24: (cont.) Floating connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous safety circuits
This configuration shows how external safety components can be incorporated

9-55
9-56
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
9.6.16
PM-D DS1e-x RS1e-x DSS1e-x

F1
PM-X
Q1
Power
IM switch
151
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
K1 K2
Terminating cover
TM-PF30 S47-B1
Infeed
TM-X15 S27-01
contactor Motor contactor
For the DSS1e-x

(A5)
Figure 9-25: DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starters up to safety category 4
L+ 1 A1 6 A4
OUT+
8 13 1 RF 1
U1 21
M 2 7 K1
OUT- 2
9 14 22
RF 2 21
22 13 K2
22
23 ON
24 14
17
A1+ 4 27 EM. STOP AUX2
11 A1 A1
DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starters up to safety category 4
25 11 21 6
U2
5 26 7 K1 K2
A2-
12 28 12 22 A2 A2
AUX3

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
The components required to set up this example are as follows: Category 4 to EN 954-1
1 2 3/4
1L1 400V AC
1L2
11) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D 1L3
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1 Q1
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
21
1 1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1 3RT1044-1BB40 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 50 A K1
1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 22
1L1
3L2
5L3
1 3RA1941-1AA00 Connection module

1 1 1 3RK1301-0xB10-0AA2 DS1e-x x in accordance with the current
A2 A3 A5
rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AK00 TM-DS65 S32 with power bus infeed
1 1 1 3RK1301-0xB10-1AA2 RS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AL10 TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed
1 1 1 3RK1301-0xB20-0AA2 DSS1e-x x in accordance with the current
rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AK10 TM-DS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed
1 1 3RK1903-0AE00 15 mm jumper module
1 1 3RT1034-1BB44 Motor contactor
up to safety category 4 to EN 954-1.

1 1 Auxiliary switch for motor contactor
(if necessary)
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
4T2
N
N
N
PE
PE
PE
PE
K2 1 3 5 21
Figure 9-25: (cont.) DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starters up to safety category 4
M M
3~ 3~
2 4 6 22
M
3~
This configuration shows how to incorporate a DSS1e-x direct soft starter

9-57
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
9-58
9.6.17
DS DS RS EMERGENCY STOP 1
PM-D
PM-X
PM-X
3RK1105-1AE04-0CA0
Q1
Power EMERGENCY STOP 2
IM switch
151
Terminating module
DP master
AS-I master
AS-i power
supply unit
PLC
EMERGENCY STOP 3
Profibus-DP
AS-i Safety Monitor

K1 EMERGENCY STOP 4
Infeed
Terminating cover
TM-P15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
contactor
Figure 9-26: ET 200S SIGUARD with AS-i Safety at work


1 2 3/4
1 1 1 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
2 2 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
13
21) 2 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
ON
A6 1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A
ET 200S SIGUARD with AS-i Safety at work
L+ L+ A7 1.Y2 14 L+ 1 A1 6 A2
1 RF 121 1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
8 13 AUX2 1 RF 1
U1 U1 1 3RA1931-1A Connection module
M M 1.Y1 M 2 7 AUX3 K1
2 2 1 3RV1031-4HA10 Circuit breaker, protection for
9 14 RF 2 22 maximum configuration 40A
RF 2
AS-i + 2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current
AS-i + rating
AS-i 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
AS-i - AS-i -
2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
1.13 1.14 A1+ 4
AUX2 1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with the current
A1+ rating
U2 11 6 6 A1
AUX2 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed
7 K1
1.23 1.24 A2- 5 7 AUX3 1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2
U2 A2 1 1 1 3RK1105-1AE04-0CA0 AS-I Safety Monitor
12 AUX3 1) With module A6 jumper between terminals 1, 2
A2-

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
F kit 2
PE
N
E
6T3
3~
M
4T2

2T1

Fault
A
E
A5
F kit 1
PE
N
E
6T3
3~
M
4T2
Fault 2T1
A
E
A4
F kit 1
PE
22
21
N
E
5L3 E 6T3
3~
M
3L2 4T2
1L1 2T1
Fault
A
E
A3
1L1 400V AC
Q1
K1
1L2
1L3
PE
N
Figure 9-26: (cont.) ET 200S SIGUARD with AS-i Safety at work
This configuration shows how ET 200S components are incorporated into the
AS-i Safety at work concept. This configuration satisfies the requirements of all
categories up to category 4 and employs an AS-i Safety Monitor.
It combines the advantages of AS-i Safety at work on the sensor side with the
advantages of ET 200S SIGUARD on the actuator side in a way that makes best
use of both.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 9-59

9-60 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
10.1 Overview of expansion modules 10-2
10.2 TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules 10-3
10.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules 10-3
10.3 Brake control module 10-4
10.3.1 Description 10-4
10.3.2 TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules 10-11
10.3.3 Signal response of the xB3, xB4 brake control modules 10-13
and DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x motor starters
10.3.4 Signal response of the xB3, xB4 brake control modules 10-15
and RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x motor starters
10.3.5 Externally powered brake xB1, xB3 10-17
10.3.6 Internally powered brake xB2, xB4 10-20
10.3.7 Installation 10-24
10.3.8 Removing the brake control module 10-26

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 10-1
Expansion modules
10.1 Overview of expansion modules

Expansion modules can be operated only in conjunction with direct, reversing or
soft starters of the following types:
• DS-x
• DS1-x
• DS1e-x
• F-DS1e-x
• DSS1e-x
• RS-x
• RS1-x
• RS1e-x
• F-RS1e-x
The table below lists the expansion modules currently available, complete with
their functions:
Description Function
Brake control xB1 for 24 VDC/4 A brake (externally powered)

module
xB2 for 500 VDC/0.7 A brake (internally powered)
xB3 for 24 VDC/4 A brake (externally powered)

with 2 additional inputs 1)
(no save) with diagnosis
xB4 for 500 VDC/0.7 A brake (internally powered)

with 2 additional inputs 1)
(no save) with diagnosis
1) Only in conjunction with DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
Table 10-1: Overview of expansion modules

10-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Expansion modules
10.2 TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal

modules
The terminal modules are necessary for the wiring of the brake control modules
xB1 to 4.
The following table shows which brake control modules you can use with the
various terminal modules.
• Chapter 9 for SIGUARD
Expansion modules Terminal modules
TM-xB15 TM-xB215
S24-01 S24-01
3RK1903 -0AG00 -0AG01
Brake control module xB1 X

Table 10-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for expansion modules

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 10-3
Expansion modules
10.3 Brake control module

10.3.1 Description
The brake control modules (xB1 to 4) control the integrated DC spring-loaded

brake of a three-phase motor. The brake is actuated by a solenoid which holds
the brake in the off position when energized. When the circuit is deenergized
the solenoid drops out and the brake is applied by spring force, blocking the
motor.
Another possible application is the integration of external actuators such as DC
valves. This applies particularly when the actuators are functionally dependent
on the motor.
The brake control module installs on the right beside the motor starter in ques-
tion. The terminal module of the brake control module connects the brake con-
trol module to the motor starter.
The brake control module is an add-on component for ET 200S motor starters
(MS) with an expansion interface (DS-x, DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x,
RS-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x).
Note
The brake control modules can be used only with ET 200S motor starters with
an expansion interface (DS-x, DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS-x, RS1-
x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x).
Important
Do not use the high feature DSS1e-x direct soft starters for internally powered
brakes (xB2, 4).
Safety note
The brake control modules (xB1 to 4) can only be used with the F-DS1e-x and
F-RS1e-x depending on the category (see Sections 7.3, 8.3).

10-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Expansion modules
Modules and components

The brake control module consists of the following sub-components:
• TM-xB15 S24-01 terminal module for xB1, xB2
• TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal module for xB3, xB4
• Brake control modules (xB1 to 4)
The components of the brake control module are illustrated below.
Brake control module
Link
Connecting terminals for

Coding element
inputs (xB3, 4 only)
Terminals for brake

Plug connector
to the motor starter
Mechanical latch to termi- Terminal module

nal module for brake control
for motor starter module
Figure 10-1: Brake control

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 10-5
Expansion modules
Electronic switch
The brake control module has a single-pole electronic switch for driving a DC
spring-loaded brake integrated into an electric motor.
Drive
The brake control module is driven via the ET 200S bus and its motor starter.
The output (DO 0.2) required for driving the brake comes from the motor
starter.
Important
If a brake is not driven via output DO 0.2 of the motor starter, the motor starts
up with the brake applied and the circuit breaker/thermal motor model can be
tripped.
Latch for mechanical locking

The brake control module is accommodated in a housing 15 mm wide. The link
on the left-hand side of the brake control module (see Figure 10-1) ensures that
the brake control module can be plugged in or pulled only when its motor starter
has been pulled. This excludes the possibility of hot removal or insertion.
Coding
There is a coding element on the housing of the brake control module. This is a
mechanical means of differentiating between different modules.

10-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Expansion modules
Indicator
The brake control module comprises
• A red LED for SF, group error (xB3, xB4),
• Two green LEDs as indicators for inputs 1 and 2 (xB3, xB4 only)
Input 1, terminals 1 and 2, limit switch for clockwise rotation,
Input 2, terminals 5 and 6, limit switch for counterclockwise rotation,
• A yellow LED which indicates the status for output DO 0.2 of the motor
starter.
The LED is on when output DO 0.2 of the motor signal is carrying a 1 signal.
This means the electronic switch is closed and the brake is released.
See Section 3.8.12 on xB3/xB4 diagnostics.
Note
xB1, xB2:
There is no indicator for actuation of the overload or short-circuit protection; the
signal status of the LED for output DO 0.2 does not change under these circum-
stances.
xB3, xB4:
The signal status of the inputs is shown, as is actuation of the overload or short-
circuit protection.
View
LED: SF
LED: Inputs 1, 2
LED: STAT
xB1 xB2 xB3 xB4
Figure 10-2: Brake control modules xB1 to 4

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 10-7
Expansion modules
Common and distinguishing features of the brake control modules
Features xB
1 2 3 4
For externally powered mechanical DC spring-loaded brake X X
For 24 VDC/4 A X X
Supply from a separate 24 VDC auxiliary voltage X X
Brake can be released when the motor is switched off X X

(so that the motor can be turned by hand)
For internally powered mechanical DC spring-loaded brake. 1) X X
For 500 VDC/0.7 A X X
Supply from a rectified voltage tapped from the electric motor X X
Once the motor has been switched off, the brake can no longer be X X
released
Configurable X X
Parameterizable X X
Diagnostics capability X X
2 inputs X X
(functional scope depends on the associated motor starter)
Circuit status of the inputs shown by LEDs X X
Circuit status of the inputs can be analyzed by PLC X X
Diagnosis overload X X
1
) Brake control modules xB2, xB4 can also be used with an external rectifier (in the control
cabinet) for an externally powered mechanical DC spring-loaded brake.
Table 10-3: Features of the brake control modules

10-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Expansion modules
Parameters
The following table indicates the parameters that can be set for the xB3 and
xB4 brake control modules.

value range

• Enable
Table 10-4: Parameter for brake control modules xB3, xB4
Group diagnosis:
Note
The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter suppresses the SF LED.
Note
The xB1 and xB2 modules are purely passive from the point of view of the
IM 151 and require no parameterization.
Parameter assignment of the inputs of the xB3 and xB4

(Only applies if the high feature/fail-safe motor starters are used).
You can assign parameters to the inputs of the xB3 and xB4 expansion modules
independently of one another for different actions via the relevant motor starter.
Parameterization is described in:
• Section 7.3.4 for high feature/fail-safe direct starters
• Section 7.4.5 for high feature direct soft starters
• Section 8.3.4 for high feature/fail-safe reversing starters

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 10-9
Expansion modules
Configuration with brake control module
Caution
See information on derating in Section 2.4.
The configuration of motor starter and brake control module with a

DM-V15 spacing module is illustrated below (only with standard motor starters
with 45/90 mm installation width):
:96/;/
895(
-./6<<<6%
(95*/;
-./6<<<6%
-./=6$
(!5- 1!5-
(! (!/5- 1!/5-
(!/>5- 1!/>5- (!!/>5-
Figure 10-3: Configuration with brake control module and spacing module

10-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Expansion modules
10.3.2 TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules
Features
• The terminal module consists of a support and a Terminal block
terminal block
• Terminal module TM-xB15 S24-01 for
xB1 or xB2 brake control module
• Terminal module TM-xB215 S24-01 for
xB3 or xB4 brake control module
Support
Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-xB15 S24-01,
TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal module:
View Terminal Description Basic circuit diagram
1 Input 1 L+ TM-xB215 S24-01 only

1 5
RS1-x xB3, xB4
2 Input 1 RS1e-x 1 Input 1
2 6 U1
Limit switch
3 Not used Logic
2
cw rotation
K1
5 Input 2 L+ 5
Input 2
Limit switch
6
4 8 6 Input 2 Logic ccw rotation
K2
7 Not used
TM-xB215 S24-01 Logic
4 Wiring options
P-switching
8
+ 4
~
= -
M 8
4 8
Motor with brake Brake control

TM-xB15 S24-01
M-switching
+ 4
~
= -
M 8
Motor with brake Brake control
Table 10-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal module

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 10-11
Expansion modules
Technical specifications - TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01
Depth with brake control module (mm) 117.5
Rated currents
Inputs (terminals 1 and 2, 5, and 6) - TM-xB215 S24-01 only
Brake control (terminals 4 and 8)

1 x 2.5
(mm 2)
AWG cables,
Wiring
Tightening torque (Nm) 0,4 to 0,7

Table 10-6: Technical specifications - TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01

10-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Expansion modules
10.3.3 Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and DS1-x, DS1e-x,
and F-DS1e-x motor starters
The diagram below illustrates the dependencies between the individual signals
DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x: Control (process image outputs) - PLC action

DO 0.0 (motor ON) 1 3 8
DO 0.2 (brake released) 4 braked
DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation 7

DI 0.1 (contactor ON)
xB3, xB4 Rectification of fault
5
Limit switch, cw rotation 2 Limit switch open
Limit switch, ccw rotation 6 9
xB3, xB4: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation
DI 0.0 (limit switch, cw rot.)
DI 0.1 (limit switch, ccw rot.)
xB3, xB4: Diagnoses
LED, switching output
LED, limit switch cw rotation
LED, limit switch ccw rot.
From here, the drive can be moved manually
away from limit-switch position
Original drive signal overridden / rendered ineffective by limit switch

Table 10-7: Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and DS1-x, DS1e-x, and F-DS1e-x motor starters

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 10-13
Expansion modules
Explanation of the individual actions
1 Brake is released (DO 0.2) and motor (DO 0.0) is switched on by the application
program in the PLC.
PLC's switch-on command is drive signal for the contactor (DO 0.0).
Command to release the brake effects drive of brake enabling signal (DO 0.2).
2 Limit position is passed, so the limit switch for clockwise rotation opens (occur-
rence of fault).
When the limit switch opens the direct (no PLC intervention) result is discontin-
uation of the contactor drive signal and cancellation of brake enabling signal.
The PLC's driver signals for the currently active contactor and the brake ena-
bling signal become ineffective (overridden by limit switch).
The motor contactor and the brake driver signal of the DS1-x are switched off.
3 The application program in the PLC cancels the switch-on command (DO 0.0)
and optionally the brake enabling signal (DO 0.2).
4 Brake is released (DO 0.2) by the application program in the PLC. Manual
departure from limit switch possible only with externally powered brake.
5 Rectification of fault. Limit switch closes.
6 Limit switch for counterclockwise rotation is overshot. Brake enabling signal is

canceled.
7 PLC cancels brake enabling signal
8 See step 1
9 The limit switch for counterclockwise rotation recloses.

10-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Expansion modules
10.3.4 Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and RS1-x, RS1e-x,
and F-RS1e-x motor starters
RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x: Control (process image outputs) - PLC action

DO 0.0 (cw rotation) 1 3 - Brake can be controlled again
DO 0.1 (ccw rotation) 4
DO 0.2 (brake released) Braked
RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation
xB3, xB4
Rectification of fault, e.g. by reversal of direction
Limit switch, cw rotation 2 Limit switch open 5
Limit switch, ccw rotation
DI 0.0 (limit switch, cw rot.)
DI 0.1 (limit switch, ccw rot.n)
xB3, xB4: Diagnoses
LED, switching output
LED, limit switch cw rotation
LED, limit switch ccw rot.

Table 10-8: Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x motor starters

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 10-15
Expansion modules
Explanation of the individual actions
1 Brake is released (DO 0.2) and motor (DO 0.0, clockwise rotation) is switched
on by the application program in the PLC.
PLC's switch-on command is drive signal for the contactor (DO 0.0).
Command to release the brake effects drive of brake enabling signal (DO 0.2).
2 Limit position is passed, so the limit switch for clockwise rotation opens (occur-
rence of fault).
When the limit switch opens the direct (no PLC intervention) result is discontin-
uation of the contactor drive signal.
The PLC's driver signal for the currently active contactor becomes ineffective
(overridden by limit switch).
The motor contactor (DO 0.0: clockwise rotation) of the RS1-x is switched off.
3 The application program in the PLC cancels the switch-on command (DO 0.0)
and optionally the brake enabling signal (DO 0.2).
4 Brake is released (DO 0.2) and direction of rotation is reversed by switching on

the motor (DO 0.1: counterclockwise rotation) by the application program in the
PLC.
5 The limit switch for clockwise rotation recloses.

10-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Expansion modules
10.3.5 Externally powered brake xB1, xB3
The xB1 or xB3 is the brake control module for controlling an externally pow-
ered brake.
Features of externally powered brake:

• Brake is released when voltage is applied.
• Brake can be released when the motor is switched off
(so that the motor can be turned by hand).
• The brake control module is a single-pole breaker in the brake's circuit.
• External 24 VDC supply required.
• Maximum switching current is 4 A.

The diagram below shows an externally powered DC spring-loaded brake (P-
switching) with motor starter (DS-x, DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS-x,
RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) and brake control module (xB1, xB3).
ET 200S bus Inputs

DS-x RS-x DS1-x RS1-x xB3 (xB3 only)
DS(S)1e-x RS1e-x 1
DO0 DO0 F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x U1 Input 1
DO0 DO0 IN1 Limit switch
2
Logic Logic Logic Logic cw rotation
K1 K1 K1 K1
5
DO1 DO1 Input 2
IN2 Limit switch
6
Logic Logic ccw rotation
K2 K2
DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 xB1

Logic Logic Logic Logic
xB3
Safe disconn.
Power 500 V
bus
Electronic
switch
Motor starters 8 4 L+
24 VDC
M
Motor with integrated

M
DC spring-loaded brake
Figure 10-4: Sketched circuit diagram of externally powered brake

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 10-17
Expansion modules
Technical specifications for xB1 and xB3
Ambient temperature Operation 0 to 60 °C

Storage -40 to 80 °C
Inputs (terminals 2 and 6) - xB3 only (non-retentive)
Sensor supply (terminals 1 and 5) short-circuit-proof and overload proof
Operating voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 VDC

(referenced to U1 -)
Current limitation in the event of a approx. 1 A

short-circuit to U1-
Isolation
Between drive and brake circuit 500 VAC

Surge withstand capability 8 kV
Switching element of the brake control module (terminals 4 and 8)
Peak voltage (periodic) <35 VDC
Continuous current 1) ≤4 A
Switch-on current at t <120 ms ≤8 A
Switch-off current 13, at 24 VDC ≤4 A
(with ext. induction protection)
Off-state current <10 mA
Voltage drop at Iload <4 A <0.3 V
Permissible power of brake at 24 V ≤95 W
Indication by LED (yellow)

- Motor braked Brake active LED off
(switch open) DO 0.2 = 0
- Motor unbraked Brake released LED on
(switch closed) DO 0.2 = 1
Error message if brake not driven no

Table 10-9: Technical specifications, brake control module xB1, xB3

10-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Expansion modules
Protective measures
Overload protection 2) Integrated current limitation

Short-circuit protection 2) yes
(to EN 60947-5-1 with 24 V / 1 kA)
Reverse polarity protection 3) no
Induction protection Internal Protective diode
External protective circuitry

for inductive load 4) ≤ 40 W Recommended
> 40 W Necessary
1
) See information on derating in Section 2.4
2
) Electronic shutdown (cannot be reactivated until output DO 0.2 of the motor starter has
been switched off)
3
) If polarity is reversed current flows (via protective diode parallel to switching element),
the brake is released and overload and short-circuit protection have no effect.
4
) Circuit with RC element, protective diode or varistor
Table 10-9: (cont.)Technical specifications, brake control module xB1, xB3

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 10-19
Expansion modules
10.3.6 Internally powered brake xB2, xB4
The xB2 or xB4 is the brake control module for controlling an internally powered
brake.
The brake control module is for electric motors connecting to three-phase sup-
plies with a rated voltage of 230/400 V to max. 290/500 V.
Features of internally powered brake:

• Brake is released when voltage is applied.
• Once the motor has been switched off, the brake can no longer be released.
• The brake control module is a single-pole breaker in the brake's circuit.
• The brake receives a rectified supply tapped from the motor's terminal board.
• Maximum switching current is 0.7 A.
Important
The brake control module does not isolate the brake from the line supply.
The additional asymmetric load imposed by the brake's overcurrent trip tran-
sient has to be taken into account for motor starters with low adjustment
ranges.
Do not use soft starters in conjunction with internally powered brakes.

10-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Expansion modules

The diagram below shows an internally powered DC spring-loaded brake with
motor starter (DS-x, DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, RS-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x)
and brake control module (xB2, xB4).
ET 200S bus Inputs

DS-x RS-x DS1-x RS1-x xB4 (xB4 only)
DS1e-x RS1e-x 1
DO0 DO0 F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x U1 Input 1
DO0 DO0 IN1 Limit switch
2
Logic Logic Logic Logic cw rotation
K1 K1 K1 K1
5
DO1 DO1 Input 2
IN2 Limit switch
6
Logic Logic ccw rotation
K2 K2
DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 xB2

Logic Logic Logic Logic
xB4
Safe isolation
Power 500 V
bus
Electronic
switch
Motor starters 4 8
~ +
= -
Motor with integrated

DC spring-loaded brake
M
Figure 10-5: Sketched circuit diagram of internally powered brake

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 10-21
Expansion modules
Technical specifications for xB2 and xB4
Ambient temperature Operation 0 to 60 °C
Storage -40 to 80 °C
Inputs (terminals 2 and 6) - xB4 only (non-retentive)
Sensor supply (terminals 1 and 5) short-circuit-proof and overload proof
Operating voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
(referenced to U1 -)
Current limitation for short-circuit approx. 1 A
to U1-
Isolation
Between drive and brake circuit 500 VAC
Surge withstand capability 8 kV
Switching element of the brake control module (terminals 4 - 8)
Peak voltage (periodic) <710 Vs
Continuous current 1) ≤0.7 A
Switch-on currentat t <120 ms ≤5 A
Switch-off current 13, at 220 VDCeff 2) ≤0.7 A
(with ext. induction protection)
Residual current <1 mA
Voltage drop at Iload <0.7 A <1.4 V
Approved brakes (examples) with
one-way rectification for
230 VAC equals 100 Veff, T <40 °C ≤70 W
400 VAC equals 170 Veff ≤100 W
500 VAC equals 220 Veff ≤135 W
Indication by LED (yellow)
- Motor braked Brake active LED off
(switch open) DO 0.2 = 0
- Motor unbraked Brake released LED on
(switch closed) DO 0.2 = 1
Error message if brake not driven no
Table 10-10: Technical specifications, brake control module xB2, xB4

10-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Expansion modules
Protective measures
Overload protection 3) Integrated current limitation
Short-circuit protection 3) yes
(to EN 60947-5-1 with 230 V / 1 kA)
Reverse polarity protection 4) no
Induction protection Internal Varistor
External protective circuitry
for inductive load 5) ≤ 40 W Recommended
> 40 W Necessary
1
) See information on derating in Section 2.4
2
) Half-wave rectification for an 500 VAC supply
3
) Electronic shutdown (cannot be reactivated until output DO 0.2 of the motor starter has
been switched off)
4
) Module maps short-circuit without current limitation, the brake is released and
overload and short-circuit protection have no effect.
5
) Circuit with RC element or protective diode at the brake coil or varistor at brake
rectifier
Table 10-10: (cont.)Technical specifications, brake control module xB2, xB4

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 10-23
Expansion modules
10.3.7 Installation
Installing terminal module for brake control module
Drawing Procedure
1 Hang the terminal module on the upper rail.
2 Tilt the terminal module backwards into the

lower rail until you hear it engage.
3 Push the terminal to the left with both hands

towards the module you have already installed,
keeping it straight, until you can hear it engage
with the adjacent module.
Table 10-11: Installing terminal module for brake control module

10-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Expansion modules
Connecting the brake control module
Requirement
The terminal module for the brake
module must be installed.
Brake control module

Mechanical coding
When the brake control modules are
plugged in, the terminal modules are
mechanically coded to ensure that, in
the event of a fault, they can only be Code elements
replaced by brake control modules
with identical functions.
You must therefore bear the config-
ured layout in mind when you insert Terminal module
the modules.
If necessary, code elements can be
removed from the terminal module
using a 3 mm screwdriver.
Figure 10-6: Mechanical coding

of terminal modules
Note
If a brand-new brake control module is plugged into a terminal module that is
already coded, the part of the code element for the terminal module must be
removed from the brake control module beforehand.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 10-25
Expansion modules
Connecting the brake control module
Drawing Procedure
xB1 to 4 4 Insert the brake control module onto the

installed and prewired terminal module as
shown in the drawing.
Brake control modules can only be connected

to the correct terminal modules regardless of
TM-xB15 S24-01
TM-xB215 S24-01 the code element.
Table 10-12: Connecting the brake control module
Connecting the motor starter
Requirement
The brake control module (xB1 to 4) has to be connected before the motor
starter (DS-x, DS1-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS-x, RS1-x, F-RS1e-x) is connected.
Drawing Procedure
5 Insert the motor starter onto the installed and

prewired terminal module as shown in the
drawing.
The procedure is described in Section 2.7.
Table 10-13: Connecting the motor starter
10.3.8 Removing the brake control module
The brake control module can be removed only when its motor starter has been
removed.
See Section 2.7 for instructions on removing motor starters.

10-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Fail-safe modules 11
11.1 General description 11-2
11.1.1 Overview 11-3
11.2 Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 and TM-FCM30-S47 11-4
11.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules 11-4
11.2.2 Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 for the PM-D F X1 11-5

power/expansion module
11.2.3 Terminal module TM-FCM30-S47 for the F-CM contact replicator 11-7
11.3 Power/expansion module PM-D F X1 11-9
11.3.2 Electrical configuration 11-11
11.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F X1 11-14
11.4 F-CM contact replicator 11-16
11.4.2 Electrical configuration 11-18
11.4.3 Technical specifications - F-CM 11-21
11.5 Examples with fail-safe modules 11-23

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 11-1
Fail-safe modules
11.1 General description
Safety note
Fail-safe modules cannot be used in conjunction with the safety integrated
SIGUARD system.
Fail-safe means: the F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x, and F-CM interrupt the main conduct-
ing path/enabling circuits if an emergency stop is requested via the mechani-
cally selected SG bus. A device error is detected and the safe state is estab-
lished.

11-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Fail-safe modules
11.1.1 Overview
The table below lists the fail-safe modules currently available together with the
corresponding functions:
Description Function
Power/expansion PM-D F X1 ... supplies external safety devices

module ... loops the 6 SG buses and U1 and M through
Contact replicator F-CM ... used in conjunction with a fail-safe power

module PM-D F PROFIsafe or PM-D F X1
... makes 4 floating relay contacts available
Power module PM-D F See the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe
PROFIsafe Modules manual
Fail-safe direct start- F-DS1e-x See Section 7.3
ers
Fail-safe reversing F-RS1e-x See Section 8.3

starters
Table 11-1: Overview of the fail-safe modules

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 11-3
Fail-safe modules
11.2 Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 and TM-FCM30-S47

Terminal modules are required for wiring the PM-D F X1 fail-safe power/expan-
sion module and the F-CM contact replicator.
The following table shows which fail-safe modules you can use with the various
terminal modules.
• Chapter 9 for SIGUARD
Fail-safe modules Terminal modules
TM-PFX30 TM-FCM30
S47-G1 S47
TM-PFX30
S47-G0
3RK1903 -3AE00 -3AB10

-3AE10
PM-D F X1 power/expansion module X
F-CM contact replicator X

Table 11-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for fail-safe modules

11-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Fail-safe modules
11.2.2 Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 for the PM-D F X1 power/expansion

module
Features
• The terminal modules consist of a Terminal block
• TM-PFX30 S47-G0 terminal module
With an incoming supply from the left to
forward U1 and M as well as SG1 to SG6.
• TM-PFX30 S47-G1 terminal module
No incoming supply from the left in order
to start a new group.
• Connection by screw-type terminal.
• Prewiring of the terminal module. Support
• AUX1 cable fed through without terminals.
• The fail-safe modules are identified by yel-
low labeling strips.
Color coding labels


Terminals 1/8, 2/9, 6/13, 7/14, 15/22, 16/23, 18/25, 19/26, 20/27, and 21/28 are
bridged in the terminal module and can be used to loop the potentials through.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 11-5
Fail-safe modules
Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-PFX30 S47-
G0/G1 terminal modules:

nal nal
1/8 + U1: Fused 24 VDC limited 15/22 SG1

IN/OU to SIMATIC range
1 2
T 1 85 2
2/9 M 2
1
96
2 16/23 SG2
3
IN/OU
T
3/10 - Not used 1 2

17/24 - Not used
8 5
4/11 - Not used 18/25 SG3
1 2
9 6
5/12 - Not used 19/26 SG4
12 2
6/13 L+ Uin: For connecting an 6 30 7 20/27 SG5
external power supply
7/14 M 12 2 21/28 SG6
unit 7 41 8
24 VDC SELV/PELV

minals
Table 11-3: Terminal assignment of the TM-PFX30 S47-G0/G1 terminal modules for the PM-D F X1 power module
Technical specifications - TM-PFX30 S47

1 x 2.5
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947
AWG cables,
Wiring
Table 11-4: Technical specifications - TM-PFX30 S47

11-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Fail-safe modules
11.2.3 Terminal module TM-FCM30-S47 for the F-CM contact replicator
Features
• The terminal module consists of a Terminal block
• TM-PFX30 S47 terminal module
with throughfeed
for the F-CM contact replicator
• Prewiring of the terminal module
• SG bus selection using the wire jumper pro-
vided Support
• The fail-safe modules are identified by yel-
low labeling strips.
Color coding labels

Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the
TM-FCM30-S47 terminal module:

nal nal
1--8 SG1 15 OUT 1.1
2--9 SG2 1 2 16 OUT 1.2

1 85 2
3/10 - Not used 1 2 17-21, - Not used

2 96 3
24
4--11 SG3 22 OUT 2.1
5--12 SG4 4
1
1
2 23 OUT 2.2
5
6--13 SG5 1 2
25 OUT 3.1
5 2 6
7--14 SG6 Jumped in the factory 26 OUT 3.2
1 2
6 3 7
- AUX1 Fed through without ter- 27 OUT 4.1
minals 1 2
7 4 8 28 OUT 4.2
Table 11-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-FCM30-S47 terminal modules for the F-CM contact replicator

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 11-7
Fail-safe modules
Technical specifications - TM-FCM30-S47

1 x 2.5
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947
AWG cables,
Wiring

Table 11-6: Technical specifications - TM-FCM30-S47
Safety note
Only one SG bus can be selected.

11-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Fail-safe modules
11.3 Power/expansion module PM-D F X1

Features
• A new fail-safe potential group begins with the power/expansion module
together with the associated terminal module. The fail-safe motor starters/F-
CM contact replicators of a fail-safe potential group are connected to the right
of the power/expansion module.
• The PM-D F X1 has redundant overvoltage protection that trips the internal
fuse just outside the upper SIMATIC voltage limit, thus ensuring that the
entire system downstream is deenergized.
• The PM-D F X1 conducts the fused voltage (U1) for the supply to the elec-
tronic components and the safety groups SG1 to SG6 to the potential buses
of the terminal modules for all the fail-safe motor starters and F-CM contact
replicators of a fail-safe potential group.
• External safety devices can be supplied with fused voltage U1 from
PM-D F X1. This ensures that overvoltage cannot occur in the system (there
must be no disturbances).
• Switching through the 6 safety groups SG1 to SG6 as well as from U1 and M.
• The state of safety groups SG1 to SG6 is indicated by an LED.
• Transfer of diagnostic messages to the coordinating controller.
• The PM-D F X1 with a terminal module is a forwarding node. The fail-safe
potential group can be switched to an additional ET 200S row.
Caution
Power/expansion modules must not be either inserted or removed during oper-
ation.
View
LEDs:
SF Group error
PWR (power) (U1)

SG1 to SG6 (safety group 1 to 6)
Figure 11-1: PM-D F X1 power/expansion module

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 11-9
Fail-safe modules
11.3.1 Parameters
The following table describes the parameters that can be set

for the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module.

value range

• Enable
Table 11-7: Parameters for the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module
Group diagnosis:
Note

11-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Fail-safe modules
Block circuit diagram for the PM-D F X1

DC 24 V
L+ M SG1 SG2 SG3
6/13 7/14 15/22 16/23 18/25
SF
Safe isolation
Bus connection
Redundant
voltage Interference
monitoring suppressor filter
and display
and disconnection
ET 200S PWR
Bus 1/8 2/9 19/26 20/27 21/28
+ IN/OUT - IN/OUT SG4 SG5 SG6

Fused 24 VDC (U1)
Figure 11-2: Block diagram for the PM-D F X1
Explanation
The PM-D F X1 is inserted at the start of a potential group or a new row
(TM-PFX30 S47-G1) or is inserted to loop through a potential group
(TM-PFX30 S47-G0).
You can connect voltage (Uin) to the PM-D F X1 at terminals 6/13 and 7/14.
You can feed a fused voltage of 24 VDC (U1) in and out at terminals 1/8 and 2/9.
Safety groups SG1 to SG6 can be fed in and out at terminals 15/22, 16/23,
18/25, 19/26, 20/27, and 21/28.
The PM-D F X1 module consists of the following system components:
• Non-safety-related system components:
- Bus connection with communication
- Diagnostic messages via the bus
- Display of switching and error states
• Safety-related system components:
- Monitoring of the U1 voltage for overvoltage
- Disconnection of the U1 voltage in the event of overvoltage (<100 ms)

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 11-11
Fail-safe modules
Rules for laying cables
Safety note
The user must ensure that a cross-circuit between the individual safety groups
SG1 to SG6 or U1 and Uin or other cables cannot occur by complying with the
correct cable-laying rules.
Safety regulations
Safety note
If the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module is supplied via Uin , a PELV power
supply unit that supplies a maximum of 60 VDC even in the event of an error,
must be used.
An external suppressor circuit (surge filter) is necessary between the load

power supply (power supply unit) and the load voltage input (Uin) of the terminal
module to ensure surge resistance (such as Blitzductor VT (order no. 918 402
from Dehn + Söhne).
Safety note
When PM-D F X1, PM-D F PROFIsafe, F-CM, F-DS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x are part
of a single potential group, they must be in the same switch cabinet. Cables for
SG1 to SG6, U1, Uin can only be laid in this switch cabinet.

11-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Fail-safe modules
Safety note
If external safety devices (not ET 200S, e.g. SIGUARD 3TK28, AS-i Safety Moni-
tor) are connected to the PM-D F X1, you must ensure that they have no effect
on the potential group.
The external safety devices then switch U1+ (terminal 1/8) to the SG buses
(emergency stop signal).
A corresponding safety device must be selected depending on the requested

category/SIL.
Please ensure you comply with the regulations for each safety device.
Module replacement
If a PM-D F X1 module has to be replaced, an acceptance test is not necessary.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 11-13
Fail-safe modules
11.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F X1

Ambient temperature (°C) 0 to 60
• IEC 61508 SIL 3

• DIN V 19250 Tripping class 5 and 6
• EN 954-1 Category 4
Safety parameters:
• Low demand PFDAVG (10a) 2.5*10-6

PFH 1/h 5.7*10-11
Table 11-8: Technical specifications - PM-D F X1

11-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Fail-safe modules
Rated operating current Ie 6A

• Internal protection through fusing 7 A (quick-response)
Recommended upstream
short-circuit protection:
• Fuse gL/gG 6.3 A 1)
Supply of:
• Fail-safe motor starters yes
• Motor starters for no
Current consumption:
• From U1 ≤35 mA
• From SGx ≤15 mA
Interrupts None

• Group error/device fault Red SF LED
• Monitoring of the supply voltage for elec-
tronic components U1 (PWR) Green PWR LED
• Monitoring of the 6 safety groups Green LED SG1 to SG6
TÜV yes
1
) The fuse must be selected such that the connected power supply unit can provide the
required current to interrupt it.
Table 11-8: (cont.)Technical specifications - PM-D F X1

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 11-15
Fail-safe modules
11.4 F-CM contact replicator

Features
• The F-CM contact replicator closes its enabling circuits unless there is an
• Redundant circuit design with two output relays with positively driven con-
tacts.
• Can be set to safety group SG1 to SG6 (default setting = SG6).
• Four separate floating enabling circuits as normally open contacts.
• At each on/off cycle of the contact replicator, the switching elements of the
F-CM are checked to ensure that they open and close correctly.
• Welded contacts in any enabling circuits are detected by the F-CM when the
enabling circuits are opened, and a reboot of the device is avoided by the pos-
itively driven operation of the contacts.
• Transfer of diagnostic messages to the coordinating controller.
Caution
Contact replicators cannot be either inserted or removed during
operation.
View
LEDs:
SF SF Group error
PWR
PWR (power) (U1)
STAT STAT (status)

3RK1903-3CA00
Figure 11-3: F-CM contact replicator

11-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Fail-safe modules
11.4.1 Parameters
The following table indicates the parameter that can be set for the PM-D con-
tact replicator.

value range

• Enable
Table 11-9: Parameters for the F-CM contact replicator
Group diagnosis:
Note

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 11-17
Fail-safe modules
Block diagram for the F-CM

OUT
SG1 SG2 SG3 1.1 2.1 3.1 4.1
1 8 2 9 4 11 15 22 25 27
Safe isolation
SFBus connection
Connection
logic
and display
K1 K2
ET 200S U1 M
Bus 5 12 6 13 7 14 16 23 26 28
SG4 SG5 SG6 1.2 2.2 3.2 4.2

OUT
Figure 11-4: Block diagram for the F-CM
Explanation
The F-CM contact replicator consists of the following system components:
• Non safety-related system components:
- Bus connection with communication
- Diagnostic message via the bus
- Display of switching and error states
- Connection logic
• Safety-related system components:
- Disconnection of the enabling circuits if there is no voltage on the selected
SG bus
- Mutual interlocking of the positively driven relays
- Prevention of reclosing if there is an error in the enabling circuit

11-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Fail-safe modules
The F-CM contact replicator can be inserted anywhere in the corresponding

potential group to the right of a fail-safe power module.
Use the wire jumper to set the desired safety group (SG1 to SG6) on the termi-
nal with the following terminals:
- 1/8 for SG1,
- 2/9 for SG2,
- 4/11 for SG3,
- 5/12 for SG4,
- 6/13 for SG5,
- 7/14 for SG6
The F-CM contact replicator is preset to safety group SG6 using the wire
jumper.
You can connect additional actuators or devices to the floating contacts with the
terminals OUT 1.1 - OUT 4.2.
Safety regulations
Safety note
Only one of the 6 SG buses can be selected with a jumper.
Safety note
The F-CM can only be operated in the potential group of a PM-D F PROFIsafe or
PM-D F X1 that safely limits the voltage to within the SIMATIC range.
Safety note
You must only use the F-CM contact replicator to control devices that do not
pose any direct danger to persons or the environment if suddenly disconnected.
Safety note
Cyclic test
The F-CM must be tested at commissioning and then at least every 3 to 6
months by means of an on/off cycle using the selected emergency stop bus.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 11-19
Fail-safe modules
Safety note
The enabling circuits must be appropriately protected against overloading (with
fuses, for example; see Section 11.4.3).
Please note:
If the enabling circuits are integrated into the sensor circuits of an external
safety device, overload protection might not be necessary if there is protection
in the sensor circuits of the external safety device. For more information, con-
sult the operating instructions of the external safety device.
Safety note
The F-CM is designed to shut down safely via the selected SG bus when an
emergency stop occurs.
In the event of a fault, a defined power-up cannot be guaranteed.
Safety note
Make sure that any potential that builds up between the control circuit of the F-
CM (U1/SGx/M) and the main conducting paths (OUT) is not greater than the
safe, functional extra-low voltage.
This can be achieved by means of suitable measures.
Module replacement
If you replace an F-CM module, an acceptance test is not necessary but the
F-CM must be tested (see cyclic test).

11-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Fail-safe modules
11.4.3 Technical specifications - F-CM

Mechanical life 10 x 10 6 switching cycles
Electrical life > 200,000 switching cycles at I e
Ambient temperature 0 to 60 °C
Utilization category DC-13
Control times
• On-delay < 50 ms
• Release time < 80 ms
• IEC 61508 SIL 3
• DIN V 19250 Tripping class 5 and 6
• EN 954-1 Category 4
Safety parameters:
Test interval 3 months 1.8*10 -5
PFH
Test interval 3 months 1/h 4.0*10-10
Test interval 6 months 1/h 6.9*10-10
Table 11-10: Technical specifications - F-CM

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 11-21
Fail-safe modules

Control circuit U1 (PWR):
Power consumption 1.8 W
Floating enabling circuits
Rated operating current Ie
13 to 24 VDC 2A
Thermal continuous current Ith 4A
Recommended short-circuit protection
for enabling circuits
• Fuse gL/gG 6.3 A
Power consumption:
• From U1 ≤15 mA
• From SGx ≤70 mA
Interrupts None
• Group error/device fault red SF LED
• Monitoring of the supply voltage for elec-
tronic components U1 (PWR) green PWR LED
• Monitoring of the circuit state of the ena-
bling circuit green/red LED STAT
TÜV yes
Table 11-10: (cont.)Technical specifications - F-CM

11-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Fail-safe modules
11.5 Examples with fail-safe modules
Safety note
The following applications serve only as examples of typical circuits.
Safety note
In the case of categories 3 and 4 and SIL 2 and 3, a PELV power supply unit that
supplies a maximum output voltage of 60 VDC in the event of a fault must be
used for U1 ext.
U2 ext. must not be supplied from U1 ext.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 11-23
11-24
A0 A1 A2 A3 4A 5A 6A 7A
11.5.1
EM 4/8 PM-D F F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x

F-DI PROFI = SG2 = SG1 = SG6 = SG2
24 VDC safe
IM
Fail-safe modules
151-1
HF
Terminating module
PM-E
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
S7-300F
Terminating cover
TM-P15 S23-A0
TM-E30 S44-A0
TM-PF30 S47-F1
A0 A1 A2 A3
2 2, 4, 6, 8 Vs1
L+
6 1 DI0
U1 ext.
3 5 DI1
M
7 3 DI2
7 DI3
10, 12, 14, 16 Vs2
Figure 11-5: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits up to category 4/SIL3
DI4
Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits
1L+ 9 L+ 20
L+ DI5
2L+ 13 27
U2 ext. U1 ext.
11 DI6 21
M 1M M
2M 4 15 DI7 28
AUX1
8 4 emergency stop circuits
for SG1 to SG6

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1L1 400V AC
1L2 E = integrated input for programming
1L3 A = integrated output for programming
1L1
3L2
5L3
1
A4 A5 A6 A7
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
U U U U

E E E E
A A A A A
affects which safety group(s).

2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
separate PM-E power module.

4T2
4T2
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
N
N
N
N
N
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~
The example shows the circuit for category 4/SIL3.

to 4
1 3RK1903-3BA00 PM-D F PROFIsafe
1 3RK1903-3AA00 TM-PF30 S47-F1
1 6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0 PM-E
1 6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0 TM-P15 S23-A0
1 6ES7138-4FA00-0AB0 EM 4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe
1 6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0 TM-E30 S44-A0
3 3RK1301-0xB13-0AA2 F-DS1e-x x in accordance with current range
) See the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules manual.

1 3RK1903-3AC00 TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed
Figure 11-5: (cont.) Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits up to category 4/SIL3
2 3RK1903-3AC10 TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed
You can use your user program to determine which emergency stop switch
1 3RK1301-0xB13-1AA2 F-RS1e-x x in accordance with current rating
They are supplied by a PM-D F PROFIsafe power module 1). The emergency
1 3RK1903-3AD10 TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed
safety group set accordingly. The motor starters can be arranged in any order.
This example illustrates the configuration with fail-safe motor starters and the
stop switches are connected to a fail-safe digital input module 1) supplied by a

Fail-safe modules
11-25
Fail-safe modules

safety combinations
3TK2822
K2
Y11 EM. STOP

ON
11 21
12 22
14
13
3TK2822
K1
24
Y21
Y22
14
Y34
Y12
A1 K2 Y33
Terminating cover
Terminating module
F-DS1e-x
A2
23
13
= SG2
A5
ON U2 ext.
L+
M
F-DS1e-x
Y11 EM. STOP

11 21
12 22
= SG1
14
13
A4
24
Y21
Y22
14
Y34
Y12
A1 K1 Y33
Make sure the wiring

A2
23
13
F-RS1e-x
A3
= SG1
is cross-proof!
U2 ext.
L+
M
SG1
SG2
SG3
SG4
SG5
SG6
F-DS1e-x
26
23
28
25
27
22
20
21
18
19
A1 15
16
= SG2
A2
13
14
8
1
9
2
7
6
PM-D
A1
TM-PF30 S47-G1
F X1
U1 ext.
L+
M
151-1
Profibus-DP
A0
IM
A0
1L+
2L+
1M
2M
Master
U2 ext.
S7-300
L+
M
PLC
Figure 11-6: Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations
Safety note
A fuse for K1/K2 enabling circuits is not necessary here because the internal
fuse of the PM-D F X1 is sufficient in this instance. If other external safety com-
binations are used, it might be necessary to add a fuse to the enabling circuits
to prevent the occurrence of the common mode fault of contact welding of the
enabling circuits.

11-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1L1 400V AC
1L1
3L2
5L3
A2 A3 A4 A5
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
U U U U

E E E E
A A A A A
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
N
N
N
N
N
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
switch the U1 voltage to the SG buses.

M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~
The example shows the circuit for category 4.


to 4
1 3RK1903-3DA00 PM-D F X1
1 3RK1903-3AE00 TM-PFX30 S47-G1
3 3RK1301-0xB13-0AA2 F-DS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating
Figure 11-6: (cont.) Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations

1 3RK1301-0xB13-1AA2 F-RS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating
emergency stop switches are connected to external safety combinations that

The motor starters are supplied by a PM-D F X1 power/expansion module. The
Fail-safe modules
11-27
11-28
11.5.3
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A0-0 A7 A8 A9
EM 4/8 PM-D F PM-D F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x PM-D F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x
F-DI PROFI F X1 = SG2 = SG6 F X1 = SG3 = SG2
24 VDC safe
IM IM
Fail-safe modules
151-1 151-1
HF
Terminating module
Terminating module
PM-E
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP Profibus-DP
S7-300F
Terminating cover
Terminating cover
TM-P15 S23-A0
TM-E30 S44-A0
TM-PF30 S47-F1
TM-PF30 S47-G0
TM-PF30 S47-G1
A0 A0-0 A1 A2 A3 1 A4 15 1 A7 15
2 2, 4, 6, 8 Vs1 8 22 8 22
L+
6 1 DI0 2 16 2 16
U1 ext.
3 5 DI1 9 23 9 23
M
7 3 DI2 18 18
7 DI3 25 25
19 19
10, 12, 14, 16 Vs2 26 26
Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations
Figure 11-7: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations up to category 4/SIL3
1L+ 1L+ 9 DI4 20 6 20 6 20
L+ L+ L+
2L+ 2L+ 13 DI5 27 13 27 13 27
U2 ext. U2 ext. U1 ext.
1M 1M 11 DI6 21 7 21 7 21
M M M
2M 2M 4 15 DI7 28 14 28 14 28
AUX1
for SG1 to SG6
SG1 to SG6

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1L1 400V AC
1L2
1L3
1L1
5L3
1L1
5L3
3L2
3L2
1
A5 A6 A8 9A
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
U U U U

E E E E
A A A A
affects which safety group.

2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
separate PM-E power module.

N
N
PE
PE
PE
M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~
E = integrated input for programming The components required to set up this example are as follows:
= line for external wiring Category Order number Description

to 4
1 3RK1903-3AA00 TM-PF30 S47-F1
1 6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0 PM-E
1 6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0 TM-P15 S23-A0
Additional ET 200S buses are also supplied by a PM-D F X1.

1 6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0 TM-E30S44-A0
Figure 11-7: (cont.) Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations up to category 4/SIL3
2 3RK1903-3DA00 PM-D F X1
1 3RK1903-3AE10 TM-PFX30 S47-G0
1 3RK1903-3AE00 TM-PFX30 S47-G1
) See the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules manual.

You can use your user program to determine which emergency stop button
They are supplied by a PM-D F PROFIsafe 1) power module. The emergency
stop switches are connected to a fail-safe digital input module 1) supplied by a

Fail-safe modules
11-29
11-30
11.5.4
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
EM 4/8 PM-D F F-CM F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x
F-DI PROFI = SG2 = SG1 = SG6 = SG2
24 VDC safe
IM
Fail-safe modules
151-1
HF
Terminating module
PM-E
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
S7-300F
Terminating cover
TM-P15 S23-A0
TM-E30 S44-A0
TM-PF30 S47-F1
TM-FCM30 S47-E0
A0 A1 A2 A3 1 A4 5
2 2, 4, 6, 8 Vs1 SG1 8 12 SG4
L+
6 1 DI0 2 6
U1 ext.
3 5 DI1 SG2 9 13 SG5
M
7 DI2 4
Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator
3 7
Figure 11-8: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator up to category 4/SIL3
7 DI3 SG3 11 14 SG6
10, 12, 14, 16 Vs2

1L+ 9 DI4 20 1.1 15 16 1.2
L+ L+
13 DI5 27 2.1 22 23 2.2
2L+ U1 ext. OUT OUT
U2 ext. DI6
1M 11 M 21 3.1 25 26 3.2
M DI7
2M 4 15 28 4.1 27 28 4.2
AUX1
for SG1 to SG6

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1L1 400 V AC
1L1
3L2
5L3
A5 A6 A7 A8
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
U U U U
Safety note
wire jumper.

E E E E
A A A A A
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
N
N
N
N
N
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~

to 4
1 3RK1903-3AA00 TM-PF30 S47-F1
1 6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0 PM-E
1 6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0 TM-P15 S23-A0
1 6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0 TM-E30S44-A0
Figure 11-8: (cont.) Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator up to category 4/SIL3
1 3RK1903-3CA00 F-CM
1 3RK1903-3AB10 TM-FCM30 S47-E0
Only one of the 6 SG buses can be selected with a jumper on the F-CM.
determine which safety group (SG) controls the contact replicator using the
order to achieve fail-safe disconnection of additional enabling circuits. You can 1 3RK1301-0xB13-1AA2 F-RS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating
Based on the example in 11.4.1, a contact replicator is added to this example in
Fail-safe modules
11-31
11-32
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 K1 K2
11.5.5
PM-D F-CM F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x

F X1 = SG2 = SG1 = SG1 = SG2
3TK2822 3TK2822
IM
Fail-safe modules
151-1
Terminating module
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
S7-300 Terminating cover
TM-PF30 S47-G1
TM-FCM30 S47-E0
A0 1 A1 15 L+ A1 K1 Y33 13 L+ A1 K2 Y33 13 1 A2 5
8 22 SG1 SG1 8 12 SG4
U2 ext. ON U2 ext. ON
2 16 M A2 Y34 M A2 Y34 2 6
14 14
9 23 SG2 SG2 9 13 SG5
Y11 EM. STOP Y11 EM. STOP
18 4 7
Y21 11 21 Y21 11 21
25 SG3 SG3 11 14 SG6
19 Y22 Y22
26 SG4 Y12 12 22 Y12 12 22
1L+ 6 20 1.1 15 16 1.2
L+ L+ 13 14 13 14
SG5
Figure 11-9: Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator up to category 4
2L+ 13 27 2.1 22 23 2.2
U2 ext. U1 ext. OUT OUT
M 1M M 7 21 3.1 25 26 3.2
2M 14 28 SG6 23 24 23 24 4.1 27 28 4.2
Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator

is cross-proof!

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1L1 400V AC
1L1
3L2
5L3
A3 A4 A5 A6
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
U U U U
Safety note

E E E E
A A A A A
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
N
N
N
N
N
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~

to 4
1 3RK1903-3DA00 PM-D F X1
1 3RK1903-3AE00 TM-PFX30 S47-G1
1 3RK1903-3CA00 F-CM
1 3RK1 03-3AB10 TM-FCM30 S47-E0
Figure 11-9: (cont.) Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator up to category 4

use the wire jumper to set which of the two safety groups (SG1 or SG 2),
Only one of the 6 SG buses may be selected with the jumper on the F-CM.
3RK1301-0xB13-1AA2 F-RS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating
switched via the external safety combinations, controls the contact replicator.
order to achieve fail-safe disconnection of additional enabling circuits. You can
3RK1903-3AD10 TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed
Based on the example in 11.4.2, a contact replicator is added to this example in
Fail-safe modules
11-33
11-34
11.5.6
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
PM-D F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x EM. STOP 1
F X1 = SG1 = SG2 = SG1 = SG2
3RK1105-1BE04-0CA0
Fail-safe modules
IM
EM. STOP 2
151-1
Terminating module
DP master
AS-I master
AS-i power
PLC
supply unit
S7-300 EM. STOP 3
Profibus-DP
AS-i Safety Monitor

EM. STOP 4
Terminating cover
TM-PF30 S47-G1
13
F ON
A0 1 A1 15 L+ L+ A6 1.Y2 14
8 22 SG1
U2 ext.
2 16 M M 1.Y1
9 23 SG2
18 AS-i +
25 SG3
19 AS-i -
26 SG4
ET 200S fail-safe motor starter with AS-i Safety at work
L+ 1L+ L+ 6 20
SG5 1.13 1.14
2L+ 13 27
U2 ext. U1 ext.
1M 7 21 1.23 1.24
Figure 11-10: Example with PM-D F X1 power module and AS-i Safety at work up to category 4/SIL3
M M
2M 14 28 SG6 2.13 2.14
2.23 2.24

is cross-proof!

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1L1 400V AC
1L1
5L3
3L2
A2 A3 A4 A5
both.
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
U U U U
Safety note

E E E E
A A A A A
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
4T2
N
N
N
N
N
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~
occurring with the AS-i safety monitor, add a 4 A MT fuse.

to 4
1 3RK1903-3DA00 PM-D F X1
1 3RK1903-3AE00 TM-PFX30 S47-G1
1 3RK1105-1BE04-0CA0 AS-I Safety Monitor
Figure 11-10: (cont.) Example with PM-D F X1 power module and AS-i Safety at work up to category 4/SIL3
To prevent a common mode fault (contact welding of the enabling circuits)

advantages of ET 200S on the actuator side in a way that makes best use of
It combines the advantages of AS-i Safety at work on the sensor side with the 1 3RK1301-0xB13-1AA2 F-RS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating
This configuration integrates an AS-i safety monitor in an ET 200S system. The
configuration satisfies the requirements of all categories up to category 4/SIL3.
Fail-safe modules
11-35
11-36
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 K1 K2
11.5.7
PM-D F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x F-DS1e-x

F X1 = SG2 = SG1 = SG6
3TK2841 3TK2842
IM
Fail-safe modules
151-1
Terminating module
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
category 4/SIL3
S7-300
safety combinations
Terminating cover
TM-PF30 S47-G1
A0 1 A1 15 1 K1 Y32 13 1 K2 Y32 13
8 22 SG1 Y35 ON Y35 ON
2 16 A1 Y34 A1 Y34
14 14
9 23 SG2
Y11 EM. STOP Y11 EM. STOP
18 A2 A2
Y21 11 21 Y21 11 21
25 SG3
19 Y22 Y22
26 SG4 Y12 12 22 Y12 12 22
L+ 1L+ L+ 6 20
SG5 14 14
2L+ 13 27
U2 ext. U1 ext.
M 1M M 7 21
2M 14 28 SG6 24 28
Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external
Figure 11-11: Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations up to
Make sure the wiring is cross-proof!

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1L1 400V AC
1L2
1L1
3L2
5L3
A2 A3 A4
Note
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
U U U
category 4/SIL3

Fault Fault Fault
E E E
A A A A
power/expansion module.
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
2T1
4T2
6T3
N
N
N
PE
PE
PE
PE
M M M
3~ 3~ 3~

to 4
1 3RK1903-3DA00 PM-D F X1
1 3RK1903-3AE00 TM-PF30 S47-G1
The external safety combinations are also supplied by the PM-D F X1 1 3RK1903-3AC10 TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed
1 3RK2841-1BB40 Electronic safety combination
1 3RK2842-1BB41 Electronic safety combination
Figure 11-11: (cont.) Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations up to
Fail-safe modules
11-37
11-38
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
11.5.8
PM-D F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x F-DS1e-x

F X1 = SG2 = SG1 = SG6
IM
Fail-safe modules
151-1
Terminating module
DP coupler
F-DI ET 200M
F-DO ET 200M
PLC PLC
Master
Master
S7-300 S7-300F
Profibus-DP
Terminating cover
TM-PF30 S47-G1
A0 1 A1 15 3 A5 21 22 17 18 19 20 37 38 39 40
8 22 SG1 4 1L+ 2L+ 3L+
2 16 6 1M 2M 3M
9 23 SG2 7
Figure 11-12: ET 200S fail-safe motor starters and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC
18 9 26
25 SG3 10 27
19 12 29
26 SG4 13 30
L+ 1L+ L+ 6 20 15 32
2L+ 13 27 SG5 16 33
U2 ext. U1 ext.
M 1M M 7 21 23 35
2M 14 28 SG6 24 36
ET 200S fail-safe motor starter and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1L1 400V AC
1L2
1L1
3L2
5L3
A2 A3 A4
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
U U U
safety PLC.

Fault Fault Fault
E E E
A A A A
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
2T1
4T2
6T3
N
N
N
PE
PE
PE
PE
M M M
3~ 3~ 3~
The components required for this example are as follows:

Figure 11-12: (cont.) ET 200S fail-safe motor starter and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC
to 4
1 3RK1903-3DA00 PM-D F X1
is thus not burdened with lengthy calculations of fail-safe links.

1 3RK1903-3AE00 TM-PF30 S47-G1
1 6ES7326-1BK00-0AB0 F-DI ET 200M
1 6ES7326-1BF00-0AB0 F-DO ET 200M
the safe inputs to the safe outputs is implemented in the user program on the

inputs and safe outputs that shut down the motor starters safely. The link from
This example illustrates a configuration with a central safety PLC with local safe
The standard PLC is responsible for operational switching and motor control and
See also the S7-300 Programmable Controller, Fail-Safe Signal Modules manual.
Fail-safe modules
11-39
11-40
11.5.9
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
PM-D F F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x F-DS1e-x EM 4/8
PROFI = SG2 = SG1 = SG6 F-DI
safe 24 VDC
IM IM
Fail-safe modules
151-1 151-1
HF HF
Terminating module
Terminating module
PM-E
PLC
Master
S7-300F
Profibus-DP
+ PROFIsafe
frame
Terminating cover
TM-PF30 S47-F1
TM-P15 S23-A0
TM-E30 S44-A0
Figure 11-13: Distributed selective detection of safety signals

A0 A5 A1 A6 A7
Distributed selective detection of safety signals
2 2, 4, 6, 8 Vs1
L+
6 1 DI0
U1 ext.
3 5 DI1
M
7 3 DI2
7 DI3
10, 12, 14, 16 Vs2

1L+ 1L+ 20 9 DI4
L+ L+ L+
2L+ 2L+ 27 13 DI5
U2 ext. U2 ext. U1 ext.
1M 1M 21 11 DI6
M M M
2M 2M 28 4 15 DI7
AUX1
8
4 emergency stop circu
for SG1 to SG6

GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Fail-safe modules
PE
U
N
6T3
x in accordance with the current rating

3~
x in accordance with the current rating

M
4T2
E = integrated input for programming 2T1
Fault
A
E
A4
TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed
TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed

PE
TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed

U
Description
N
6T3
3~
EM 4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe

M
4T2
2T1
PM-D F PROFIsafe
TM-PF30 S47-F1
TM-E30 S44-A0
TM-P15 S23-A0
F-DS1e-x
F-RS1e-x
PM-E
Fault
A
E
A3
6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0
6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0
6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0
6ES7138-4FA00-0AB0
3RK1301-0xB13-0AA2
3RK1301-0xB13-1AA2
Order number
PE
U
3RK1903-3AA00
3RK1903-3BA00
3RK1903-3AD10
3RK1903-3AC00
N
3RK1903-3AC10
5L3 6T3
3~
M
3L2 4T2
1L1 2T1
Fault
A
E
A2
1L1 400V AC
Category
to 4
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1L3
1L2
PE
N
Figure 11-13: (cont.) Distributed selective detection of safety signals
This example describes the distributed selective detection of safety signals and
the selective safe shutdown of motor starters.
The motor starters can be arranged in any order. They are supplied by a PM-
D F PROFIsafe 1) power module. The emergency stop switches/position
switches/rope-operated switches are connected to a fail-safe digital input mod-
ule 1) supplied by a separate PM-E power module.
The sensors (on the fail-safe digital input module) and the actuators (power
module PM-D F PROFIsafe, fail-safe motor starter) are in different ET 200S sta-
tions.
You can use your user program to determine which emergency stop switch
affects which safety group(s).
1) See the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules manual.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 11-41
Fail-safe modules

11-42 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Order numbers A
A.1 Motor starters A-2
A.1.1 ET 200S standard direct starters DS, DS-x and DS1-x A-2
A.1.2 ET 200S standard reversing starters, RS, RS-x and RS1-x A-3
A.1.3 ET 200S starters high feature with electronic overload protection A-4
(DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x)
A.1.4 ET 200S high feature motor starter for Switch ES A-4
A.1.5 ET 200S fail-safe motor starters with electronic overload protection A-4
(F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x)
A.2 Components for the ET 200S motor starters A-5
A.3 Components required for the safety integrated SIGUARD system A-7
A.4 Components for expansion modules A-8
A.5 Fail-safe components A-8

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 A-1
A.1 Motor starters
A.1.1 ET 200S standard direct starters DS, DS-x and DS1-x
Adjustment range Order number
kW A Direct starter (DS) 1) Direct starter (DS-x) 1) Direct starter (DS1-x)
<0.06 0.14 - 0.20 3RK1301-0BB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0BB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0BB00- 0AA2
0.06 0.18 - 0.25 3RK1301-0CB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0CB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0CB00- 0AA2
0.09 0.22 - 0.32 3RK1301-0DB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0DB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0DB00- 0AA2
0.10 0.28 - 0.40 3RK1301-0EB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0EB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0EB00- 0AA2
0.12 0.35 - 0.50 3RK1301-0FB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0FB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0FB00- 0AA2
0.18 0.45 - 0.63 3RK1301-0GB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0GB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0GB00- 0AA2
0.21 0.55 - 0.80 3RK1301-0HB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0HB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0HB00- 0AA2
0.25 0.70 - 1.00 3RK1301-0JB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0JB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0JB00- 0AA2
0.37 0.90 - 1.25 3RK1301-0KB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0KB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0KB00- 0AA2
0.55 1.10 - 1.60 3RK1301-1AB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-1AB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-1AB00- 0AA2
0.75 1.40 - 2.00 3RK1301-1BB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-1BB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-1BB00- 0AA2

1) Discontinued types
The DS1-x standard motor starter is downward-compatible with DS and DS-x.

When replacing with a module having the new order number, remove the cod-
ing elements in the terminal module (see Figure A -1). There is no need to make
changes to the configuration (STEP 7 / hardware configuration) or the device
master file (GSD).

A-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
A.1.2 ET 200S standard reversing starters, RS, RS-x and RS1-x
kW A Reversing starter (RS) 1) Reversing starter Reversing starter

(RS-x) 1) (RS1-x)
<0.06 0.14 - 0.20 3RK1301-0BB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-0BB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-0BB00- 1AA2
0.55 1.10 - 1.60 3RK1301-1AB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-1AB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-1AB00- 1AA2
0.75 1.40 - 2.00 3RK1301-1BB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-1BB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-1BB00- 1AA2

1) Discontinued types
The RS1-x Standard reversing starter is downward-compatible with RS and

RS-x. When replacing with a module having the new order number, remove the
coding elements in the terminal module. There is no need to make changes to
the configuration (STEP 7 / hardware configuration) or the device master file
(GSD).
Figure A-1: Removing coding elements

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 A-3
A.1.3 ET 200S starters high feature with electronic overload protection
(DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x)
kW A Direct starter Direct soft starter Reversing starter

(DS1e-x) (DSS1e-x) (RS1e-x)
< 1.1 0.3 - 3 3RK1301-0AB10- 0AA2 3RK1301-0AB20- 0AA2 3RK1301-0AB10- 1AA2
3 2.4 - 8 3RK1301-0BB10- 0AA2 3RK1301-0BB20- 0AA2 3RK1301-0BB10- 1AA2
7.5 2.4 - 16 3RK1301-0CB10- 0AA2 3RK1301-0CB20- 0AA2 3RK1301-0CB10- 1AA2
A.1.4 ET 200S high feature motor starter for Switch ES
The following motor starters are suitable for the Switch ES software as of V2.0
kW A Direct starter Direct soft starter Reversing starter

(DS1e-x) (DSS1e-x) (RS1e-x)
< 1.1 0.3 - 3 3RK1301-0AB10- 0AA3 3RK1301-0AB20- 0AA3 3RK1301-0AB10- 1AA3
3 2.4 - 8 3RK1301-0BB10- 0AA3 3RK1301-0BB20- 0AA3 3RK1301-0BB10- 1AA3
7.5 2.4 - 16 3RK1301-0CB10- 0AA3 3RK1301-0CB20- 0AA3 3RK1301-0CB10- 1AA3
A.1.5 ET 200S fail-safe motor starter with electronic overload protection

(F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x)
Suitable for the Switch ES software
kW A Fail-safe Fail-safe
direct starter reversing starter
(F-DS1e-x) (F-RS1e-x)
< 1.1 0.3 - 3 3RK1301-0AB13- 0AA2 3RK1301-0AB13- 1AA2
3 2.4 - 8 3RK1301-0BB13- 0AA2 3RK1301-0BB13- 1AA2
7.5 2.4 - 16 3RK1301-0CB13- 0AA2 3RK1301-0CB13- 1AA2

A-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
A.2 Components for the ET 200S motor starters
Description Model Order number
Power PM-D for direct and reversing starters 3RK1903-0BA00

module
Terminal TM-P15 S27-01 for the PM-D power module 3RK1903-0AA00

modules with terminating cover
TM-DS45-S32 for DS, DS-x, DS1-x, with power bus 3RK1903-0AB00

infeed, with caps
TM-DS45-S31 for DS, DS-x, DS1-x, with power bus 3RK1903-0AB10
throughfeed
TM-RS90-S32 for RS, RS-x, RS1-x, with power bus 3RK1903-0AC00
infeed, with caps
TM-RS90-S31 for RS, RS-x, RS1-x, with power bus 3RK1903-0AC10
throughfeed
TM-DS65-S32 for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x, with power 3RK1903-0AK00
-01 FS L bus infeed, with caps
TM-DS65-S31 for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x, with power 3RK1903-0AK10
-01 S bus throughfeed
TM-RS130-S32 for RS1e-x, with power bus infeed, 3RK1903-0AL00
-01 FS L with caps
TM-RS130-S31 for RS1e-x, with power bus through- 3RK1903-0AL10
-01 S feed
TM-FDS65-S32 for F-DS1e-x, with power bus infeed, 3RK1903-3AC00
-01 FS L with caps
TM-FDS65-S31 for F-DS1e-x, with power bus 3RK1903-3AC10
-01 S throughfeed
TM-FRS130-S32 for F-RS1e-x, with power bus infeed, 3RK1903-3AD00
-01 FS L with caps
TM-FRS130-S31 for F-RS1e-x, with power bus 3RK1903-3AD10
-01 S throughfeed

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 A-5
Spacing mod. DM-V15 for installing dir. starters with derating 3RK1903-0CD00
Accessories Terminal block 30 mm, jumper module 3RK1903-0AF00

L1/L2/L3
L1/L2/L3 15 mm, jumper module 3RK1903-0AE00
terminal block
PE/N terminal block 45 mm, infeed module, 3RK1903-2AA00
with caps
PE/N terminal block 45 mm, infeed and 3RK1903-2AA10
jumper module
PE/N terminal block 30 mm, jumper module 3RK1903-0AJ00
PE/N terminal block 15 mm, jumper module 3RK1903-0AH00
PE/N terminal block 65 mm, infeed module, 3RK1903-2AC00

M65-PEN-F with caps
PE/N terminal block 65 mm, infeed and 3RK1903-2AC10
M65-PEN-S jumper module
3-phase feed-in ter- if necessary for power bus infeed 3RV1925-5AB
minal for S0 for wiring:
2.5 to 25 mm2
• finely stranded with wire end
ferrule:
2.5 to 25 mm2
AWG 12 to 4
Control kit manual actuation for contactors 3RK1903-0CA00
(only for DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x,
RS1-x) (5 of)
Control unit for direct drive of the contactor coils 3RK1903-0CG00
of ET 200S devices
(only for DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x,
RS1-x)
2DI control module 2DI digital input module for full local 3RK1903-0CH00
operation
(only for DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x)
2DI COM 2DI COM digital input module for 3RK1903-0CH10
control module local operation with PC interface
(only for DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x)
LOGO! PC cable to connect the PC to the 2DI COM 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0
control module
Diagnostic and software for diagnostics and com- 3ZS1310-0CC20-0YA0
commissioning tool missioning for motor starters
Switch ES Motor (version 2.0 and above)
Starter

A-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
A.3 Components for the safety integrated SIGUARD system
Power PM-D F1 fail-safe, up to safety category 4, 3RK1903-1BA00

EN 954-1
modules
for EMERGENCY STOP
PM-D F2 fail-safe, up to safety category 4, 3RK1903-1BB00
EN 954-1 for autostart for protective
door monitoring;
PM-D F3 fail-safe, up to safety category 3, 3RK1903-1BD00
EN 954-1 for expansion delay 0.5 ...
30 s
PM-D F4 fail-safe, up to safety category 4, 3RK1903-1BC00
EN 954-1 for expansion
PM-D F5 contact replicator, up to safety 3RK1903-1BE00
category 4, (EN 954-1)
Connection PM-X connection unit for infeed contactor, 3RK1903-1CB00
fail-safe, up to safety category 4
module
(EN 954-1)
Terminal TM-PF30 S47-B1 for potential group, 3RK1903-1AA00
for PM-D F1,2 infeed U1, U2, sensor connection
modules
TM-PF30 S47-B0 for potential subgroup, 3RK1903-1AA10
for PM-D F1,2 sensor connection
TM-PF30 S47-C1 for potential group, 3RK1903-1AC00
for PM-D F3,4 infeed U1, U2
TM-PF30 S47-C0 for potential subgroup, 3RK1903-1AC10
for PM-D F3,4 infeed U2
TM-PF30 S47-D0 for contact replicator 3RK1903-1AD10
for PM-D F5
TM-X15 S27-01 for PM-X connection module 3RK1903-1AB00
connection unit for infeed contactor,
categories 3 and 4 (EN 954-1)
Fail-safe kit Fail-safe kit 1 for direct starters DS, DS-x, DS1-x, 3RK1903-1CA00
up to category 4, (EN 954-1)
• 1 auxiliary switch block
• 1 contact holder with connecting
lead for direct starter
• 1 contact support for terminal
module (feedback loop)
• 1 contact support for terminal
module (infeed contactor)
Fail-safe kit 2 for reversing starters RS, RS-x, RS1-x, 3RK1903-1CA01
up to category 4, (EN 954-1)
• 2 auxiliary switch blocks
• 1 contact holder with connecting
lead for reversing starter
• 1 light gray contact support for
terminal module (feedback loop)
• 1 dark gray contact support for
terminal module (feedback loop)
• 2 contact supports for terminal
module (infeed contactor)
• 1 connecting lead

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 A-7
A.4 Components for expansion modules
Brake control xB1 for brake 24 VDC/4 A 3RK1903-0CB00

module xB3 with 2 extra inputs 3RK1903-0CE00
xB2 for brake 500 VDC/0.7 A 3RK1903-0CC00

xB4 with 2 extra inputs 3RK1903-0CF00
Terminal TM-xB15 S24-01 for brake control modules xB1, xB2 3RK1903-0AG00
modules
TM-xB215 S24-01 for brake control modules xB3, xB4 3RK1903-0AG01
A.5 Fail-safe components
Power module PM-D F With overvoltage protection 3RK1903-3BA00

PROFIsafe With diagnostics
(for a description see the ET 200S
Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe
Modules manual)
Power/expan- PM-D F X1 With overvoltage protection for the 3RK1903-3DA00

sion module infeed of external emergency stop
signals
Contact F-CM With 4 safe, floating contacts 3RK1903-3CA00

replicator
Terminal TM-PF30 S47-F1 For potential group, 3RK1903-3AA00

modules for PM-D F with infeed U1, SG1 to SG6,
PROFIsafe with terminating cover
(for a description see ET 200S Distrib-
uted I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules)
TM-PFX30 S47-G1 For potential group, 3RK1903-3AE00
for PM-D F X1 without infeed from the left for
U1, SG1 to SG6
TM-PFX30 S47-G0 For potential group, 3RK1903-3AE10
for PM-D F X1 with infeed from the left
U1, SG1 to SG6,
TM-FCM30 S47-E0 With throughfeed U1, SG1 to SG6, 3RK1903-3AB10
for F-CM

A-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Dimensional drawings B
B.1 Motor starters B-2
B.1.1 DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters and TM-DS45 terminal mod- B-2
ule
B.1.2 High feature DS1e-x direct starter, B-3

High feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter and
TM-DS65 terminal module
Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter and TM-FDS65 terminal module
B.1.3 RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters and B-4

TM-RS90 terminal module
B.1.4 RS1e-x high feature reversing starter and TM-RS130 terminal module B-5
F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter and
TM-FRS130 terminal module
B.2 Power modules, connection module B-6
B.2.1 PM-D power module and TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module B-6
B.2.2 PM-D F1 to 5 power modules and B-7

TM-PF30 S47-B0/-B1/-C0/-C1/-D0 terminal modules
PM-D F PROFIsafe power module and TM-PF30 S47-F1 terminal
module
F-CM contact replicator and TM-FCM30 S47-E0 terminal module
B.2.3 PM-X connection module and TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module B-8
B.3 DM-V15 spacing module B-8
B.4 Expansion modules B-9
B.4.1 xB1 to 4 brake control modules B-9

TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 B-1
B.1 Motor starters
B.1.1 DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters and TM-DS45 terminal module
heat removal
DS, DS-x, DS1-x

Space for
DS, DS-x, DS1-x

Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
TM-DS45
Connection zone
heat removal
Space for

B-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
B.1.2 High feature DS1e-x direct starter,
High feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter and TM-DS65 terminal module
Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter and TM-FDS65 terminal module
DS1e-x,
DSS1e-x,
F-DS1e-x
heat removal
Space for
DS1e-x, Rail
DSS1e-x, 35 x 7.5/15 mm
F-DS1e-x
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
LOGO! PC cable
Control module
2DI/-2DI COM
TM-DS65
TM-FDS65
Connection zone
heat removal
Space for

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 B-3
B.1.3 RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters and TM-RS90 terminal module
RS,
RS-x,
RS1-x
RS,
RS-x,
Rail
RS1-x 35 x 7.5/15 mm
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
TM-RS90

B-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
B.1.4 RS1e-x high feature reversing starter and TM-RS130 terminal module
F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter and TM-FRS130 terminal module
RS1e-x
F-RS1e-x
heat removal
Space for
RS1e-x
F-RS1e-x Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
LOGO! PC cable
Control module
2DI/-2DI COM
TM-RS130
TM-FRS130
Connection zone
heat removal
Space for

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 B-5
B.2 Power modules, connection module
B.2.1 PM-D power module and TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module
PM-D
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
TM-P15 S27-01
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm

B-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
B.2.2 PM-D F1 to 5 power modules and
terminal modules TM-PF30 S47-B0/-B1/-C0/-C1/-D0
PM-D F PROFIsafe power module and TM-PF30 S47-F1 terminal module
F-CM contact replicator and TM-FCM30 S47-E0 terminal module
PM-D F1 to 5
PM-D F PROFIsafe
PM-D F X1
F-CM Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
TM-PF30 S47
TM-PFX30
TM-FCM30
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 B-7
B.2.3 PM-X connection module and TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module
PM-X
SF
PM-X
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
TM-X15 S27-01
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
B.3 DM-V15 spacing module
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm

B-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
B.4 Expansion modules
B.4.1 xB1 to 4 brake control modules and
TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules
-./
()'%*+%,
% 0
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
& '
$ %
!"#"
$12/34$5
4).44
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 B-9
B-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Applications C
C.1 Examples with brake control modules C-2
C.1.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation C-2

without brake
C.1.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake C-4

with external power supply
C.1.3 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake C-6
with internal power supply
C.1.4 Example with frequency converter and 400 V brake with internal C-8
power supply and delayed EMERGENCY STOP shutdown,
category 3
C.1.5 Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve C-10
C.1.6 Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor C-12
C.2 Examples with reversible motors C-14
C.2.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds C-14

with one Dahlander winding
C.2.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds C-16

with two Dahlander windings

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 C-1
Applications
Safety note
The following applications are only some examples of typical circuits.
Caution
Derating (see Section 2.4) is not taken into account in these examples.
C.1 Examples with brake control modules

C.1.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without
brake
Terminating cover
Terminating module
A3
xB3, 4 TM-xB215 S24-01
ccw rotation
Limit switch
Limit switch
cw rotation
RS1-x
22
21
22
21
A2
Brake
IN1
IN2
1 L+
5 L+
8
2
6
A3
PM-D
A1
TM-P15 S27-01
AUX2
AUX3
Profibus-DP
151
IM
7
14
13
Master
A1
12
11
8
1
9
2
5
4
PLC
A1+
L+
U1
A2-
M
U2
Figure C-1: Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without brake

C-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1L2
Number Order number Description 1L3
1 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x xx in accordance with the
current rating
1 3RK1903-0AC00 TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed
1 3RK1903-0AG01 TM-xB215 S24-01terminal module for xB3, 4
1L1
3L2
5L3
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1 3RK1903-0CE00 xB3 1) brake control
1 3RK1903-0CF00 xB4 1) brake control A2
2 XXX Limit switch for brake control module

1) either xB3 or xB4
A3
E
Fault
E
A A
E
8
4
2T1
6T3
4T2
N
N
PE
PE
M
3~

Figure C-1: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without brake
C-3
Applications
Applications

external power supply
ccw rotation
Limit switch
Limit switch
cw rotation
22
21
22
21
24 V brake
Terminating cover
Terminating module
A5
xB3 TM-xB215 S24-01

RS1-x
IN1
IN2
1 L+
5 L+
8
2
6
A4
A5
A3
xB3 TM-xB215 S24-01

RS1-x
1 IN1+
5 IN2+
IN2-
IN1-
8
2
24 VDC
A3
A2
-
AUX2
AUX3
PM-D
A1
TM-P15 S27-01
6
7
14
13
Profibus-DP
151
IM
A1
12
11
8
1
9
2
5
4
Master
A1+
U1
L+
A2-
M
U2
PLC
Figure C-2: Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply

C-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1L2
1L3
Number Order number Description
1 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
current rating
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
2 3RK1903-0AG01 TM-xB215 S24-01terminal module for xB3
1L1
5L3
3L2
2 3RK1903-0CE00 xB3 brake control
1 3RK1903-0AE00 15 mm jumper module L1,2,3 A2 A4

A3 A5
E E
Fault Fault
E E
A A A A
E E
8
8
4
4
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
N
N to A5
PE
PE
+ -
PE
1W 2U
1V M 2V
1U 3~ 2W

Figure C-2: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply
C-5
Applications
Applications
internal power supply
ccw rotation
Limit switch
Limit switch
cw rotation
Terminating cover
Terminating module
22
21
22
21
xB4
A5
TM-xB215 S24-01
400 V brake
RS1-x
A4
IN1
IN2
1 L+
5 L+
8
2
6
A5
xB4
A3
TM-xB215 S24-01
400 V brake
RS1-x
IN1
IN2
A2
1 L+
5 L+
8
2
6
A3
AUX2
AUX3
PM-D
A1
TM-P15 S27-01
Profibus-DP
151
IM
7
14
13
A1
Master
12
11
8
1
9
2
5
4
A1+
U1
L+
A2-
M
U2
PLC
Figure C-3: Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply

C-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1L2
Number Order number Description 1L3
1 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
current rating
1L1
5L3
3L2
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
2 3RK1903-0CF00 xB4 brake control
2 3RK1903-0AE00 15 mm jumper module L1,2,3 A2 A4

A3 A5
E E
Fault Fault
E E
A A A A
E E
8
8
4
4
2T1
6T3
2T1
6T3
4T2
4T2
N
N
PE
PE
PE
1W 2U
1V M 2V
1U 3~ 2W

Figure C-3: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply
C-7
Applications
Applications
C.1.4 Example with frequency converter and 400 V brake with internal power
supply and delayed EMERGENCY STOP shutdown, category 3
A5
Frequency
converter
K2
Contactor
Brake
K1
K2
Q1
K1
21
21
22
22
K1
A1
A2
contactor
1 RF 1
RF 2
AUX3
AUX2
switch
Power
Infeed
7
2
A4
Terminating cover
OUT+
Terminating module
OUT-
A4
PM-X TM-X15 S27-01

DS1-x
14
F kit 1
7
13
A3
A2
12
11
PM-D
5
4
A2
TM-PF30 S47-C0
STOP
F3
27 EMERGENCYA1+
A2-
U2
PM-D
A1
TM-PF30 S47-B1
11 21
12 22
F1
ON
OUT+
OUT-
14
13
Profibus-DP
151
IM
22
23
24
25
26
28
6
7
14
13
17
A1
Master 12
11
8
1
9
2
5
4A1+
L+
U1
A2-
M
U2
PLC
Figure C-4: Example with frequency converter and 400 V brake with internal power supply and delayed
EMERGENCY STOP shutdown, category 3

C-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
1L2
1L3
1 2 3/4 Q1
11) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
21
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1 K1
1 1 3RK1903-1BD00 PM-D F3 22
1L1
5L3
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
3L2
1 1 3RK1903-1AC10 TM-PF30 S47-C0
1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X A3
1 1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01

1 3RV1031-4HA10 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A
E
EMERGENCY STOP shutdown, category 3

1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating Fault
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed F kit 1
E
1 1 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
A
1 1 1 3RT1xxx-xxxxx Motor contactorxx in accordance with the rating
1 1 Auxiliary switch for motor contactor
(if necessary) E
1
) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-)
2T1
4T2
6T3
N
N
PE
PE
A1 21
A5
Frequency K2
converter 22
A2
M
3~

Figure C-4: (cont.) Example with frequency converter and 400 V brake with internal power supply and delayed
C-9
Applications
Applications
C.1.5 Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve

A1 A2 A3 Lifting platform configuration
xB3 input 1
Terminating module
PM-D
DS1-x Limit switch, top
xB3
xB3 input 2
Limit switch, bottom
IM
Master
151
PLC
Terminating cover
Profibus-DP
TM-xB215 S24-01
TM-P15 S27-01
Hydraulic diagram
Y1
M
3~
1L1 400 VAC

1L2
1L3
1L1
3L2
5L3
A2
A3
E 1 A1 6 A3
Fault L+ AUX2
8 13 1 L+ 21
E U1 Limit switch
M 2 7
A AUX3 2 Top
9 14 22
IN1
E 5 L+ 21
Limit switch
6 Bottom
2T1
6T3
4T2
4
8
IN2 22
A1+ 4
11 4
N
N
PE
PE U2
A2- 5 8
12 Y1
M
3~
E = integrated input for programming The components required to set up this example are as follows:
= line for external wiring Number Order number Description
1 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
1 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating
1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
1 3RK1903-0CE00 xB3 brake control
1 XXX Valve (Y1)
Figure C-5: Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve

C-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Applications
DS1-x: Control (process image outputs) - PLC action

DO 0.0 (pump motor ON) 1 3 8
DO 0.2 (valve open) 4

DS1-x: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation 7

xB3, xB4
Lifting platform at top5
Limit switch, top 2
Limit switch, bottom 6
Lifting platform at bottom

DI 0.0 (limit switch, top)
DI 0.1 (limit sw., bottom)
xB3, xB4: Diagnoses
LED, switching output 4
LED, limit switch, top
LED, limit switch, bottom

Figure C-5: (cont.) Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve
1 Pump motor is switched on (DO 0.0) by the application program in the PLC. PLC's switch-on
command is drive signal for the contactor.
2 Limit position is passed, so the limit switch for lifting table at top opens.
When the limit switch opens the direct (no PLC intervention) result is discontinuation of the
contactor drive signal.
The PLC's drive signal for the contactor is rendered ineffective (overridden by limit switch).
The motor contactor is switched off.
3 The application program in the PLC cancels the switch-on command (DO 0.0).
4 The valve for lowering the lifting platform is opened (DO 0.2) by the application program in
the PLC.
5 The limit switch for lifting platform at top position recloses.
6 The limit switch for lifting platform at bottom opens.
The switching output for the valve is disabled.
7 The application program in the PLC cancels the switch-on command for DO 0.2.
8 See step 1
Each upward or downward action of the platform can take place individually within the limits
of travel.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 C-11
Applications
C.1.6 Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
Terminating module
PM-D
PM-E
RS1-x
2DI
xB4
IM
Master
151
PLC
Terminating cover
Profibus-DP
TM-xB215 S24-01
TM-P15 S27-01
Lifting platform configuration
xB3 input 1
Limit switch, top
2DI input 1
BERO limit switch, top
2DI input 2
BERO limit switch, bottom
xB3 input 2
Limit switch, bottom
Brake motor
Number Order number Description
1 6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 PM-E DC24V

1 6ES7193-4CE00-0AA0 TM-P15S22-01
1 6ES7131-4BB00-0AA0 2DI DC24V
1 6ES7193-4CB00-0AA0 TM-E15S23-01
1 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating
1 3RK1903-0CF00 xB4 brake control
2 XXX BERO
Figure C-6: Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor

C-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Applications
1L1 400V AC
1L2
1L3
1L1
3L2
5L3
A4
A5
E
Fault
E
A A
E
2T1
6T3
4T2
8
4
N
N
PE
PE
M E = integrated input for programming

3~ A = integrated output for programming
24 VDC 2 A1 A2 1 DI0 Top

L+ 1 A3 6 A5
AUX2
6 8 13 1 L+ 21
I U1 Limit switch
3 2 7
M 2 24 VDC M AUX3 2 Top
7 9 14 22
IN1
3 M
5 L+ 21
Limit switch
6 Bottom
1 DI1 Bottom IN2 22
I A1+ 4
2 24 VDC 11 4
U2 400 V brake
5 8
3 M A2-
12
Figure C-6: (cont.) Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor
At each limit position, the lifting platform is controlled by a BERO limit switch. If
a limit switch fails, the positioning switch acts directly on the RS1-x reversing
starter through the xB4 brake control module. The starter is shut down immedi-
ately and the brake is actuated. This rapid shutdown bypasses the user program
in the PLC. With the positioning switch actuated, the PLC can start the starter
only in the opposite direction. The process image of the inputs at the brake con-
trol module is also made available to the PLC. This means that the PLC can
react accordingly to the situation.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 C-13
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
C-14
C.2
PM-D RS1-x RS1-x DS1-x C.2.1

F1
PM-X
Q1
Applications
Power
IM switch
151
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
K1
TM-PF30 S47-B1
Infeed
Terminating cover
TM-X15 S27-01
contactor
with one Dahlander winding
L+ 1 A1 6 A5
Category Order number Description OUT+
8 13 1 RF 121
1 2 3/4 U1
M 2 7 K1
11) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D OUT- 2
9 14
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01 RF 2 22
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
22 13
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1 23 ON
Examples with reversible motors
1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X 14
24
1 1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
17
A1+ 4 27 EM. STOP
1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor AUX2
Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds
1 3RA1931-1A Connection module 11 25 11 21 6 A1

U2
1 3RV1031-4HA10 Circuit breaker, protection for max. config. 40A K1
A2- 5 26 7
1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS1-x xx in accordance with the current 12 22 A2
Figure C-7: Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding
rating
12 28 AUX3
1 1 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1
2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current
rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed
2 2 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2
1
) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-)
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Applications
F kit 1
PE
N
E
6T3

4T2

2T1
Fault
A
E
A4
F kit 2
PE

N
2W
L3
6T3
4T2
2T1
1U
2U
A
1V
L1
1W
1W
1U
1V
2V
L2
3~
M
L3
1W
Fault
2W
2U
2V
A
E
A3
2U
1U
F kit 2
PE
2V
L1
22
21
N
E
2W
5L3 6T3
1V
3L2 4T2
L2
1L1 2T1
A
Q1
K1
1L1 400V AC
Fault
A
E
A2
1L2
1L3
PE
N
Figure C-7: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding
Warning
You must ensure that there is an appropriate, software-specific interlocking with
a sufficiently apportioned time delay between module A3 and A4.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 C-15
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
C-16
C.2.2
PM-D RS1-x RS1-x RS1-x DS1-x

F1
PM-X
Terminating module
Q1
Applications
Power
IM switch
151
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
windings
K1
TM-PF30 S47-B1
Infeed
Terminating cover
TM-X15 S27-01
contactor

1 2 3/4 1 A1 6 A6
L+ OUT+
11) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D 8 13 1 RF 121
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01 U1
M 2 7 K1
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1 OUT- 2
9 14
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1 RF 2 22
22 13
1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
1 1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01 23 ON
1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A 14
24
17
Figure C-8: Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2 Dahlander windings
A1+ 4 27 EM. STOP
1 3RV1031-4HA10 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A AUX2
1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating
11 25 11 21 6 A1
U2
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 5 26 7 K1
1 1 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 A2-
12 28 12 22 A2
3 3 3 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating AUX3
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed
3 3 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2
Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with two Dahlander
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Applications
F kit 1
PE
N
E
6T3

4T2

2T1
Fault
A
E
A5
F kit 2
PE

N
E
6T3
4T2
2T1
3W
L3
A
2U
3U
2V
L1
2W
3V
L2
Fault
A
E
A4
L3
2W
F kit 2
PE
2W
2U
2V
N
3U
E
2U
6T3 3W
3~
3V
L1
M
4T2 3V
2T1 3U
3W
1W
1U
A
1V
2V
L2
1W
L3
1U
Fault
L1
A
E
A3
F kit 2
PE
1V
22
21
L2
N
E
5L3 6T3
3L2 4T2
1L1 2T1
A
Q1
K1
1L1 400V AC
Fault
A
E
A2
1L2
1L3
PE
N
Figure C-8: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2 Dahlander windings
Warning
You must ensure that there is an appropriate, software-specific interlocking with
a sufficiently apportioned time delay between module A4 and A5.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 C-17
Applications

C-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Glossary
2-channel (contactor control)

A two-channel contactor drive circuit is accessible when at least two release cir-
cuits are available and the primary current is disconnected redundantly.
2-channel (sensor)
The emergency stop switch is polled by means of two contacts, and the results
are sent separately to the evaluating device.
AUX1
Freely usable potential line carried through all modules. Only the PM-E modules
have connecting terminals.
AUX2
Supply for infeed contactor, connect to A1+.
AUX3
Supply for infeed contactor, connect to A2-.
CON
See U2.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 Glossary-1
Cross-circuit-proof
In the event of a short circuit between the cables of the emergency stop switch,
all the safety-related components of the ET 200S are switched off.
EMERGENCY STOP switch

895(6?/
The operating status of the ET 200S cannot be restored until the problem
has been rectified.
Direct starter
A direct starter is a −> motor starter for a single direction of rotation that
switches a motor on or off directly. It consists of a circuit breaker and a contac-
tor.
Enabling circuit
A positively driven output with redundant, monitored normally open contacts
that drives other switchgear such as motor starters or infeed contactors.
F systems
See fail-safe systems.
Fail-safe modules
ET 200S modules that can be used for safety-related operation in the ET 200S
distributed I/O system. These modules have integrated safety functions.
Fail-safe motor starters

Fail-safe motor starters have the following features:
• Device designations: F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
• Usable up to 7.5 kW
• Installation widths: 65 mm for F-DS1e-x
130 mm for RS1e-x
Fail-safe systems
Fail-safe systems (F systems) are characterized by the fact that they remain in a
safe state or transfer directly into another safe state when certain failures occur.

Glossary-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Feedback loop
Operation of the contactor can be monitored by monitoring the slave auxiliary
contacts (normally closed contacts) of the motor starter from the PM-D F1 to 5
power module. If a contactor is welded, the EMERGENCY STOP segment can
no longer be started.
High feature motor starter

High feature motor starters have the following features:
• Device designations: DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x
• Installation widths: 65 mm for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x
130 mm for RS1e-x
Load group
A group of motor starters supplied by a single power bus infeed. A load group
can be within a → potential group or comprise parts of two potential groups.
Monitored start
At start-up, the emergency stop switch must always be closed first and the sup-
ply voltage switched on. Only then can the on switch be pressed. If the ON
switch is bridged, the PM-D F1 evaluation device detects an error, which is indi-
cated by a channel LED.
MS (motor starter)
Motor starter is the generic term for direct and reversing starters.
With motor starters the start-up and direction of rotation of a motor is deter-
mined.
OUT+/-
A positively driven output that drives other safety devices such as expansion
units (PM-D F4) or a time-delayed safety combination (PM-D F3).
PELV
Protective Extra-Low Voltage. A DIN VDE 0100 T410 protective measure against
accidental contact.
Potential group
A group of motor starters and/or electronic modules that are supplied by a sin-
gle power module.
Potential subgroup
A potential subgroup exists if the auxiliary voltage U2 can be partially switched
off within a potential group.

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 Glossary-3
PWR
See U1.
Redundancy
All the components required for a function are duplicated.
In order to achieve complete redundancy for ET 200S in the enabling circuits,
two normally open contacts are connected in series in the PM-D F1 to 5 power
module. If there is a failure of a normally open contact - if it is welded, for exam-
ple - safe switching off is guaranteed.
Reversing starters
A reversing starter is a −> motor starter for two directions of rotation of a
motor. It consists of a circuit breaker and two contactors.
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage. A circuit that is designed and protected in such a way
that when under normal conditions just one error occurs the following can be
ensured: The voltage between any two accessible parts, one of which can
either be a grounded or a conductive accessible part, does not exceed the
safety extra-low voltage and no overvoltage is produced that is greater than the
safety extra-low voltage.
SGx
SG stands for safety group. Six safety groups (SG1 to SG6) can be encoded
using the corresponding terminal module of the motor starters.
Standard motor starter

Standard motor starters have the following features:
• Device designations: DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x, RS1-x
• Installation widths: 45 mm for DS, DS-x, DS1-x
90 mm for RS, RS-x, RS1-x
U1
(PWR) supply voltage for electronics.
U2
(CON) supply voltage for contactor control.

Glossary-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
Index
Numerics Control module 2DI COM 1-7, 3-11

2DI 1-7, 3-8 Control unit 1-5, 3-7
2DI COM 1-7, 3-11 Cross-circuit-proof Gl-2
3-phase feed-in terminal 1-3 Current flow via the power bus 5-16
Current limit 7-52
A Current limit violation 7-53
Actual motor current 7-48 Current-carrying capacity 1-19, 5-14
Aggregate current 5-16 Cyclic duration factor CD 7-37
Anti-blocking function 7-47 Cyclic test of the F-CM 11-19
Assignment of the terminal modules 5-2 Cyclic test of the F-DS1e-x 7-15
Asymmetry 7-53 Cyclic test of the F-RS1e-x 8-15
AUX1 Gl-1
AUX2 Gl-1 D
AUX3 Gl-1 Deinstalling motor starters 2-26
Auxiliary switch block 9-22 Derating 2-5
DI, input signal 3-35, 3-36
B Diagnostics 3-18
Behavior of the inputs 3-37 Dimensional drawings B-1
Blocking current 7-47 DIN rail 1-2
Blocking time 7-47 Diodes 3-4
Brake control 10-5 Direct soft starter, high feature 7-26
Brake control module xB1, xB3 10-17 Direct starter Gl-2
Brake control module xB2, xB4 10-20 Direct starter, high feature 7-11
DM-V15 1-2, 2-7, 10-10
C DM-V15 spacing module 2-6
Cap 2-30, 5-6, 5-7, 5-8, 5-10, 5-11, 5-12, DO, output signal 3-35, 3-38
5-14, 5-15 DS 1-4, 7-4
Caps 1-3 DS1e-x 1-6, 7-11
Circuit breaker 7-9, 7-45, 8-9 DS1-x 1-4, 7-4
Coasting down time 7-36 DSS1e-x 1-6, 7-26
Coding 2-12, 2-16, 2-17, 2-24 DS-x 1-4, 7-4
Coding (SIGUARD) 9-15
Color coding labels 5-4, 9-4, 9-11, 11-5,
11-7
CON 6-2, 9-19, Gl-1
Configuration 3-12
Configuration options 1-13
Connection module PM-X 9-20
Contact carrier 9-21
Contact holder 9-21
Contact replicator F-CM 1-9, 11-16
Contactor 7-9, 7-24, 8-9, 8-24
Contents vii
Control kit 1-5, 3-6
Control module 2DI 1-7, 3-8
GWA-4NEB950007202-07 Index-1
E Frequency converter 7-28
Electrical connections 2-17, 2-24 F-RS1e-x 1-8, 8-11
Electrical isolation 3-4
Electrical service life 7-10, 7-25, 8-10, G
8-25 General warning 3-36
Emergency start 7-56 Group error 3-21, 3-36
Emergency stop circuit 9-22, 9-23
Enabling circuit Gl-2 H
Environmental conditions 4-2 High feature direct soft starter 1-6
ET 200S DS1e-x high feature direct High feature direct starters 1-6
starter 1-6
ET 200S DSS1e-x high feature direct soft I
starter 1-6 Identifying the modules 2-12, 9-15
ET 200S fail-safe direct starter Idle time 7-51
F-DS1e-x 1-8, 7-11 IM 151 1-2
ET 200S fail-safe reversing starter Infeed contactor 1-11, 9-2
F-RS1e-x 1-8, 8-11 Input signal DI 3-35, 3-36, 3-39
ET 200S high feature DS1e-x direct Inserting power modules 2-16
starter 7-11 Installation measurements and
ET 200S high feature DSS1e-x direct soft clearances 2-4
starter 7-32 Installation position 2-3
ET 200S high feature reversing starter Installation rules 2-3
RS1e-x 8-11 Installing an ET 200S with motor
ET 200S manuals 1-20 starters 2-3
ET 200S RS, RS-x, RS1-x, standard rever- Installing brake control module 10-24
sing starters 8-4 Installing motor starters 2-17, 2-24
ET 200S RS1e-x high feature reversing Installing terminal modules 2-12
starter 1-6 Interface module IM 151 1-2
ET 200S standard direct starters DS, DS-x, Internally powered brake xB2, xB4 10-20
DS1-x 1-4
ET 200S standard DS, DS-x and DS1-x J
direct starters 7-4 Jumper module L1/L2/L3 1-3
ET 200S standard reversing starters RS, Jumper module PE/N 1-7
RS-x, RS1-x 1-4
L
External short-circuit protection 3-3
Labeling strips 2-12, 9-15
Externally powered brake xB1, xB3 10-17
Latched positions 2-17, 2-24
F Load group 1-17, 5-16, Gl-3
F systems Gl-2 LOGO! PC cable 3-11
Factory setting 7-57
M
Fail-safe direct starter 1-8, 7-11
Main circuit 7-8, 7-23, 7-44, 8-8, 8-23
Fail-safe kit (F-kit) 9-21
Manual operation local 3-36, 7-55
Fail-safe kit 1 1-11, 9-22
Manuals 1-20
Fail-safe kit 2 1-11, 9-23
Maximum current-carrying capacity 1-19
Fail-safe modules 11-1, Gl-2
Module replacement of the F-DS1e-x
Fail-safe motor starters Gl-2
7-19
Fail-safe reversing starter 1-8, 8-11
Module replacement of the F-RS1e-x
Fail-safe systems Gl-2
8-19
FB125 3-18
Monitored start Gl-3
FC125 3-18
Monitoring 3-18
F-CM 1-9, 11-16
Motor connection 5-14
F-CM module replacement 11-20
Motor current 3-36
F-DS1e-x 1-8, 7-11
Motor starters 7-1, 8-1
Feedback loop 9-21, 9-22, 9-23, Gl-3
Feed-in terminal 1-3
Figures xiii

Index-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-07
O Reversing starter, standard 8-4
Operating position 2-18, 2-25 Reversing starters 3-4, Gl-4
Output signal DO 3-35, 3-38 RS 1-4, 8-4
Overload tripping 3-4 RS1e-x 1-6, 8-11
Overload tripping test 3-3 RS1-x 1-4, 8-4
RS-x 1-4, 8-4
P Rules for laying cables 11-12
Parameter length 1-18
Parameters of the soft starters 7-42 S
Parked position 2-18, 2-25 Safety regulations 11-12
PC interface 3-11 Safety relay 3-23, 3-24, 3-25, 3-26, 3-27,
PE/N jumper module 1-3 3-29
PE/N terminal block 5-15 Self-test 7-16, 8-16
PELV Gl-3 SELV Gl-4
Phase firing 7-29 Set current Ie 3-2
PM-D 1-2, 6-1 Settings 7-35
PM-D F PROFIsafe 1-9 SGx Gl-4
PM-D F X1 1-9, 11-9 Shipping conditions 4-1
PM-D F X1 module replacement 11-13 Short-circuit protection 7-46
PM-D F1 to 5 1-10, 9-4, 9-13 Short-circuit tripping 3-4
PM-D F1 to 5 power modules 9-13 SIRIUS switchgear 7-4, 7-11, 7-32, 8-4,
PM-D F1, F2 9-16 8-11
PM-D F3, F4 9-17 Soft rundown function 7-35
PM-D F5 9-18 Soft starter 7-29, 7-45
PM-X 1-10, 9-4, 9-20 Soft starting function 7-35
Potential group 1-17, 9-5, Gl-3 Spacing module 1-2, 2-5, 10-10
Potential subgroup 9-5, Gl-3 Specifying the safety group 2-23
Potentiometers 7-40 Standard direct starters 1-4, 7-4
Power bus 5-14 Standard reversing starter 1-4
Power bus infeed 5-6, 5-7, 5-8, 5-10, 5-11, Standards for safety systems 9-19, 11-15,
5-12, 5-14 11-22
Power bus throughfeed 5-6, 5-7, 5-8, Star starting 7-27
5-10, 5-11, 5-12, 5-14 Start Time 7-36
Power module PM-D 6-1 Start Voltage 7-36
Power module PM-D F PROFIsafe 1-9 Starting current 7-26
Power/expansion module PM-D F X1 1-9, Starting current protection 7-46
11-9 Starting current, reducing 7-27
Preventing unauthorized persons from Starting time 7-41
switching on 3-5 Starting torque 7-39
Process image 3-35 Starting voltage 7-36, 7-39
PROFIBUS-DP 3-18 Stop time 7-36
Protection against dirt 2-30 Storage conditions 4-1
PWR 6-2, 9-19, 11-22, Gl-4 Storage temperature 4-1
Switch ES Motor Starter 3-11, 3-40
R Switch-over interval 8-4
Rails 2-3
Ramp time 7-36
Rated operational current 7-49
Recovery time 7-46
Reduction in starting current 7-27
Reductions 7-39
Redundancy Gl-4
Removal of motor starters 2-17, 2-24
Removing motor starters 2-19
Residual current detection 7-53
Reversing starter, high feature 1-6, 8-11

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 Index-3
T
Tables xviii
Terminal block 1-5, 5-14
Terminal modules 5-1
Terminating cover for control bus 1-3,
2-30
Terminating module 1-3, 2-30
Thermal motor mode 7-49
Three-phase current - asynchronous
motors 7-26
Time ramp 7-36
TM-DS45 1-4, 5-3, 5-6
TM-DS65 1-6, 5-3, 5-7
TM-FCM30 1-9, 5-3
TM-FCM30 S47 11-4
TM-FDS65 1-8, 5-3, 5-8
TM-FRS130 1-8, 5-3, 5-12
TM-P15 1-2, 5-2, 5-4
TM-PF30 1-10, 5-2, 9-4, 9-7
TM-PFX30 5-3, 11-5, 11-7
TM-PFX30 S47 11-4
TM-RS130 1-6, 5-3, 5-11
TM-RS90 1-4, 5-3, 5-10
TM-X15 1-10, 5-2, 9-4
TM-xB15 1-12, 10-3
TM-xB215 1-12, 10-3
Trip Reset 3-21, 7-49, 7-56
Tripping class 7-50
U
U1 6-2, 9-19, 11-22, Gl-4
U2 6-2, 9-19, Gl-4
User program 3-18
V
Version 3-37
Voltage tolerance for contactor supply
3-2
X
xB1 10-17
xB1 to 4 1-12, 10-4
xB2 10-20
xB3 10-17
xB4 10-20
Z
Zener diodes 3-4

GWA-4NEB950007202-07 Index-4
Sender (please complete)
Name
Company / Office
To
Siemens AG Address
A&D CD MS 3
Phone
92220 Amberg
Fax
Fax: + 49 9621 / 80-3337
SIMATIC - ET 200S with motor starters and safety integrated SIGUARD system manual
Have you come across any errors in this manual?

Please describe the errors on this form.
We will be very grateful to you for any ideas and suggestions for improvements.
GWA-4NEB950007202-07
GWA-4NEB950007202-07

ET200SM e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ET200SM e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ET200SM e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Important information,

Copyright Siemens AG 2002 All rights reserved Disclaimer of liability

Purpose of the manual

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC ET 200S ET 200S IM 151/CPU Interface Module

• Installing and wiring motor • Installing and wiring the • Addressing of

ET 200S ET 200S ET 200S

• 1Count 24V/100kHz • 1STEP5V/204 kHZ • 1 SI

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

The delivery package for S7 F Systems (order number 6ES7988-8FA11-8BA0)

Distributed I/O System Safety Engineering S7 Distributed Safety

• Product overview • Use, structure and principle • Configuration of the F-CPU

Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter 7.3

PM-D F X1 and F-CM fail-safe modules, examples 11

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

Standards, certificates and approvals

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

Position in the information landscape

Aids to accessing information

Constantly updated information

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

A.1 Motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

B.1 Motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

1.1 Overview 1-2

1.1.1 General components 1-2

1.1.2 Components up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width for 1-4

1.1.3 Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for 1-6

1.1.4 Fail-safe components 1-8

1.1.6 Components of the expansion modules 1-12

1.2 ET 200S configuration options 1-13

1.3 Maximum number of modules that can be connected/maximum 1-18

1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals 1-20

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

Component Function Drawing

DIN rails ... are the mechanical supports onto which

Interface ... connects the ET 200S with the PROFI-

Power mod- The module monitors the voltage of the

Spacing ... a spacing module must be inserted

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

Component Function Drawing

Jumper ... loops L1, L2 and L3 through

Jumper ... adds a PEN conductor (N) and protective

Caps ... protect the contacts of the power bus